Astounding Science-Fiction v21n02, April 1938

ISFDB
Archive.org

_____________________

Editor, John W. Campbell Jr.

Three Thousand Years! (Part 1 of 3) • serial by Thomas Calvert McClary ∗∗∗+
Matter Is Conserved • short story by Raymond A. Palmer
Hyperpilosity • short story by L. Sprague de Camp
Negative Space • novelette by Nat Schachner
The Faithful • short story by Lester del Rey +
Iszt—Earthman • novelette by Raymond Z. Gallun
Jason Sows Again (Part 2 of 2) • serial by Arthur J. Burks

Cover • Howard V. Brown
Interior artwork • Howard V. Brown (2), Jack Binder, Elliott Dold (4), Charles Schneeman (4), H. W. Wesso (3)
In Times to Come
Of the 500 Known Elements • science filler
Detail—But Immensely Important to Engineering • science filler
Radiation in Uniform • essay by Herbert C. McKay
Democracy • editorial by John W. Campbell, Jr.
Ignition Point • science essay by John W. Campbell, Jr. [as by Arthur McCann]
Science Discussions • letters
Brass Tacks • letters

_____________________

This issue sees incremental progress by Campbell in his quest to change the magazine into what he wants it to become. The most notable evidence of that here is the début of Lester del Rey and a second appearance by L. Sprague de Camp.

The first part of Three Thousand Years! by Thomas Calvert McClary gets off to a rather dull start with an argument between Drega, a wealthy industrialist, and Gamble, a scientist. The latter wants to release a number of his discoveries and inventions, which will provide cheap food for the masses, etc., but the businessman disagrees:

Heaven knew, their vaults were loaded with secret formulas Drega did not dare release because of the economic chaos which would ensue. Certainly they were progress! One would wipe out the Bessemer steel industry overnight. Another would crash the wool, cotton and pulp wood industries in weeks. p. 9

The story then leaps forward ten years, and picks up with a journalist called Lucky, who is discussing an end of the world story with his copy-editor when he suddenly thinks he is made of mud. Before this inexplicable event is explained there are a number of other bizarre episodes described:

A psychiatrist sat with a “client” overlooking a green inland valley. His client was under the delusion that there was no world except the imagination.
“If your theory were correct,” the psychiatrist explained simply, “we could imagine that the ocean rolled up to the foot of this cliff and it would be there.”
“Well,” insisted the client simply, “it is.”
The psychiatrist smiled tolerantly. His smile froze. From the foot of the cliff came the hollow thunder of surf. A sea broke in mottled spume.

At a famed university a renowned scientist held indignantly, “Prophecies are rubbish!” and led the way into another room. He stopped, batting his eyes rapidly. The other room had somehow become a field of rampant violets. A brook ran at his feet.

The Reverend Percival Tweedy stepped forward to the cement parapet of the stage. “I would like to give a graphic illustration of the shockingness of modern dress.”
There was a burst of applause from hatchet-faced dowagers. The applause broke into startled gasps. Mrs. Hildebran said sharply, “Really, Reverend, it is highly unnecessary to be so graphic!”
But Reverend Tweedy could not bring his mind to dwell on that statement. Mrs. Hildebran was staring at him indignantly through lorgnettes. She was wholly unclad! Even in his amazement he thought, “Skinny old wretch!” p. 11-12

Lucky the reporter he finds that he isn’t actually made of mud but encased in it:

He moved his body slowly. Joints popped and creaked. Muscles cramped. He went through a series of simple exercises, but his motions were very limited and uncertain. Gradually, they became easier. Then, for a long time, his body was afire with prickling sensations and infinite small cramps. He knew that he should be in agony, but the sensations seemed very far away—as if they might be in another body.
He turned to careful inspection of himself. He found he was naked. There were numberless questions about how he got that way, but for the time being he simply accepted the fact. His nostrils were completely caked and closed, but only at the tips. He cleared them of chunks of rock-hard dirt. He found his whole body covered by a coating of peculiar mud, varying from one-eighth inch to two-inch thickness.
The hair on his legs was eight to twelve inches long. But it was brittle and broke off. His skin was peculiarly white and colorless and dry, so dry that he peeled off a three inch strip of flesh before realizing it. Blood began to ooze through the raw gash. The blood of a dead man might look like that, just before it turned to water.
[. . .]
A lock of hair fell across his chest. It was fully three feet long, and broke off in a bunch with a slight yank. It was gnarled and filthy and lifeless. It made him think of cadavers he had seen. Systematically, he pulled off all his hair. He kept scratching himself by accident, and suddenly noticed his finger nails were three inches long. His toe nails had been long, too, but most of them had broken off while he shambled about. He bent his finger nails and they snapped. Dry—brittle—dead. It was unpleasant, this deadness of a living body. p. 14

Although these events are not explained at the time, it becomes clear that all life has been in suspended animation for three thousand years (later, Gamble the scientist takes responsibility for this), hence the people encased in dirt with long hair and nails, and the changed landscape. There are myriad other environmental changes: buried buildings, steel and clothing has rotted away, etc.
The rest of this far-fetched but intriguing instalment follows Lucky’s subsequent adventures in this new world which include, at one point, a hand coming out of the soil and grabbing his leg! After digging the man out, Lucky swims across the bay (sunken city buildings can be seen at the bottom) to find Drega the businessman.

Once Lucky finds Drega, he describes what he has seen. Drega takes charge:

Drega clapped Lucky on the shoulder. “It’s marvelous, my boy!” he boomed lustily.
“What?” asked Lucky.
“The opportunity to build!” Drega said glowingly. “Look at it. A whole city, maybe a whole world, to rebuild. And this time we’ll build it right.” p. 23

Drega organises a team of workers he comes upon and leads them all back to the city.
The beginning of this installment could have been better structured but, if an unlikely start to the novel, it is also an intriguing, original, and enjoyable one.

Matter Is Conserved by Raymond A. Palmer1 starts with a data dump (albeit a well done one involving a talking parrot) about the gravitational lensing of light proving the existence of aether. A lone scientist has developed a machine to see into the past, but when used he finds himself in the future, materialising in an alien body. When he returns to his own time he still that form.
Subsequently his friends burst into the laboratory and find the ‘alien’ there but their friend missing. They think the ‘alien’ has stolen the machine and left their friend in the future, so they force it to take them there.
This is a poor pulp potboiler but it has (spoiler) a neat twist ending (the pair take some of the dust from the floor of the machine during their search for the scientist—the remains of Byrne’s body upon him taking alien form—and when they reverse the process he is left dead of a chest wound—the missing dust).

Hyperpilosity by L. Sprague de Camp is de Camp’s second story for the magazine.2 It has a man at a poker game telling of The Great Change, a historical account of a flu virus which had the side effect of causing permanent body hair growth on all humanity. De Camp uses this maguffin for occasional comedic and political purposes:

“In July Natasha, the gorilla in the Bronx Zoo, escaped from her cage and wandered around the park for hours before anyone noticed her. The zoo visitors all thought she was merely an unusually ugly member of their own species.” p. 43

“The destitution in the South intensified the ever-present race problem, and led eventually to the Negro revolt in Alabama and Mississippi, which was put down only after some pretty savage fighting. Under the agreement that ended that little civil war the Negroes were given the present Pale, a sort of reservation with considerable local autonomy. They haven’t done as well as they claimed they were going to under that arrangement, but they’ve done better than the Southern whites said they would. Which I suppose is about what you’d expect. But, boy, just let a white man visiting their territory get uppity, and see what happens to him! They won’t take any lip. p. 43

When the narrator and his boss finally create a cure (there is talk about alpha, beta and gamma proteins) there is no interest in returning to the status quo ante.
A smart if minor story told in a breezy style.

Negative Space by Nat Schachner has Space Commander Dan Garin getting things off to a fairly dire start:

“By the Beard of the Comet,” he roared suddenly, “I’m getting fed up with this silly patrol duty and sillier transportation of distinguished space tourists from one end of the Solar System to the other. I’m a fighting man, and the Arethusa’s a fighting ship. It ain’t natural for us to shuttle back and forth like brood hens clucking over blasted little chicks. I think I’ll ground me and spend my declining days in the Martian pulque-caves, mumbling over my drink and telling tall tales to the gaping tourists.” p. 50

Two other characters are quickly introduced, Jerry, a young scientist en route to a new job on Callisto, and his girlfriend Sandra. As the three are talking on the bridge, they watch a freighter fly towards what looks like a cloud of fireflies. Jerry tells Greer to issue a warning. He does so but the freighter ignores it (the freighter captain responds on the radio like a truculent fourteen-year-old) and it flies into the cloud and perishes. Greer, thinking this a new pirate weapon, attempts to attack but Jerry fires the rockets and they avoid the same fate.
Jerry’s research reveals that the sparkles are a huge negative energy space (there is another Dirac positron mini-lecture here, similar to the one inserted by Campbell into Kent Casey’s story last issue). If the cloud continues on the same course the Earth will be annihilated.
The Planetary Council ignore Jerry when he warns them. Thereafter it is just a matter of waiting until the Council’s science expedition gets fried before they give him dictatorial powers to sort the problem out. The rest of the story describes the seemingly losing battle they fight firing massive rockets into the cloud to annihilate the positrons. When no more suicide volunteers are available (spoiler), Space Commander Dan Garin forsakes his boozy retirement in the pulque-caves to make the Final Sacrifice.
The last part is marginally better than the beginning but, overall, it is pretty bad.

The Faithful by Lester del Rey is his first published story, and it is a pretty impressive début. Written in response to Manly Wade Wellman’s Pithecanthropus Rejectus in the January issue,3 it is narrated by an intelligent dog called Hungor in a future where mankind—after a nuclear war, plague and poison gas attacks—appears to have died off.
After the fighting stops, Hungor becomes the leader of his people. They eventually meet another group and, when they hear that the poison gas covering Chicago has dissipated, Hungor leads an expedition to the city. Once the wild dog packs are dealt with they set it in motion again.
While engaged on this project—problematical because of the dogs’ lack of proper hands—a man called Paul Kenyon arrives: he has survived because of the biological experiments he performed on himself before the war. He suggests to Hungor that the hands they want are in Africa: men were creating intelligent apes there, although they had not gone as far as they had with dogs. Hungor agrees that they should send an expedition and, after they have trained pilots and repaired aircraft, Kenyon and a team leave.
In Africa they search for the apes and eventually meet their leader, Tolemy. Nine hundred or so of the thousand apes eventually agree come to Chicago (attracted in part, no doubt, by the coffee and cigarettes they are given!)
Time passes, and matters progress successfully. In the last few pages Hungor talks of changing the apes to become more like men:

Today I have come back from the bed of Paul Kenyon. We are often together now—perhaps I should include the faithful Tolemy—when he can talk, and among us there has grown a great friendship. I laid certain plans before him today for adapting the apes mentally and physically until they are men.
Nature did it with an ape-like brute once; why can we not do it with the Ape-People now? The Earth would be peopled again, science would rediscover the stars, and Man would have a foster child in his own likeness.
And—we of the Dog-People have followed Man for two hundred thousand years. That is too long to change. Of all Earth’s creatures, the Dog-People alone have followed Man thus. My people cannot lead now. No dog was ever complete without the companionship of Man. The Ape-People will be Men.
It is a pleasant dream, surely not an impossible one. p. 84

A mature, sober, and affecting work.

Iszt—Earthman by Raymond Z. Gallun starts with the alien Iszt climbing into a human-like robot and going to Earth—the planet is going to be used by his race to prevent two suns crashing into each other and imperilling the galaxy. The rest of the first half has him driving a car to his base. Sitting next to him is ‘his’ girlfriend Anne (Iszt has previously put the original Curt Shelby, who the robot was built to replace, in suspended animation). A farmer takes a pot shot at the car as they are driving along (don’t ask) and Iszt’s robot shell is damaged. They only just make it to the underground lair, where Anne learns that her boyfriend is an alien-controlled robot. She is given an amnesia drug.

The second half starts with descriptions of a variety of natural catastrophes that Earth is undergoing. Iszt has caused these so humanity will appoint him world dictator (that’s two world dictators in this issue so far). When he is successful he starts his plan to save the Galaxy, although by now he has decided to protect the cities and give Earth a second chance.
The final act has Earth and two hundred worlds being moved through space to stop the suns colliding (this requires burning off the top two hundred feet of the surface of the Earth). Iszt threatens to wreck the plan unless the rest of his kind help him give Earth a second chance after the collision is averted.
There is a glimmer of some super-science sense of wonder in the last part, but it is smothered by all the badly written and unconvincing pulp nonsense that precedes it. This story is even worse than the Schachner.

The second and last part of Jason Sows Again by Arthur J. Burks actually improves somewhat in quality (from the preceding dismal level) about a chapter in, by which time Jarl Strang has made ten copies of himself. They all depart by aircraft with the plan of photographing the newly arrived Emperor with the replication machine atom-cameras. The next part has some interesting, and prescient, comment about the enemy they are facing (and some boilerplate ‘Yellow Peril’ material, it must be said):

Hopelessness hung over the fortifications of the American army, as Jarl Harvey and Daryl Strang faced each other behind locked, soundproof doors, in a room off Strang’s headquarters office. The arrival on American shores of His Majesty Hetira had turned every Yellow Girdle soldier into a starry-eyed, invincible fanatic. To die for his Emperor was the greatest glory a member of the Yellow Girdle could attain. Thousands, receiving the word that their God-Emperor had landed, raced to die on American bayonet points, before American bullets, in the midst of bomb-bursts, from sheer exuberation—from sheer exaltation.
Their God-Emperor had landed! The Godhead under whose inspiration Japan, China, all the races of color in the Orient, had been welded together into one vast whole, that whole the Empire of the Yellow Girdle.
Napoleon, long ago, had fired men to great deeds with a little piece of red ribbon on their left breasts. Hetira, copying everything that conquerors before him had used to inspire men and make themselves great in history, caused his followers to wear belts of yellow. And thousands went into battle and died, because they believed that while they wore the yellow girdles they would not die.
And those who wore them saw men die all around them, and still believed in the efficacy of the yellow girdle. Those men died, perhaps, because their hearts were weak, or evil, or their faith in the yellow girdle faltered. If a man died, sure of his faith, and his belief in the girdle, he could not tell the living that the girdle had betrayed him.
If the girdle itself, a mere yellow strip of cloth, could inspire men to such deeds, all America realized what the actual physical presence of His Majesty Hetira would do to them.
Nothing could stop those soldiers! p. 129-130

Harvey thought, as he flew, how the chickens of many white powers were coming home to roost.While Japan had been fighting China, white nations had furnished China with their best scientific brains, in a vain effort to keep Japan from winning. Japan had won over and subdued China, and with her had conquered the fruits of white man’s teachings. And while Japan almost never created or invented anything, she could take anything invented by others, and adapt it, or advance it, to a state of marvelous perfection.
Give Japan a plane, and she would develop that same plane into one of her own that could fly twice as fast and far, twice as high, and on half the fuel the original would have needed. Then she could further develop her own plane—
Well, there seemed no end to it. And after conquering China, Japan had taken all other nations of color in her stride, because her Chinese vassal had the manpower she had always lacked. And so—the army of fifty millions which Hetira could expend without thought p. 132-33

Bombs burst, and where they burst clouds of mist came forth, to creep along the ground. It caught at those who fled, and they were gone. So that everywhere were the thousands and millions, fleeing from the creeping mist.
And the Yellow Girdle varied its attack. In many places, especially in cities, where “regional strongholds” had been more carefully constructed, and so withstood assault for longer periods, the Yellow Girdle released bombs which exploded—and freed in the crisp air the horror of disease!
Disease which was worse than any gas. Disease of which medical authorities knew nothing. Disease bred in Oriental tarns and swamps, in eastern slime, from the bodies of eastern carrion. Disease which mottled bodies of babies and women, and ate them slowly away— p. 136

While Jarl Harvey and his copies fly towards the Emperor, the war continues around them, and the men eventually parachute down on to enemy soil. Shortly after they land, and when the Yellow Girdle soldiers realise they all look the same, the Emperor arrives. The surviving Jarl Harveys are granted an audience, and manage to convince him to let them build replicator machines to produce gold.
What they actually do, of course, is (spoiler) make four copies of the Emperor who, with the original, descend into civil war. Nonsense, but quite a clever ending.
This isn’t a good story, but there are parts of this instalment that are interesting, compelling, and clever, and I came away with an inkling of why Burks was such a popular writer.

At first glance, the Cover by Howard V. Brown for Three Thousand Years! didn’t really appeal, but when you look at a larger cleaned-up image it is striking to say the least. It depicts the ‘resurrection’ scene: look at those apparently elongated fingers, which look that way due to three-thousand-year old nails!
The Interior artwork is by Howard V. Brown (uncredited, but the illustrations for the serial are presumably his as he did the cover—and the figure in the ‘drowned city’ scene matches), Jack Binder (again uncredited but it looks like his work for the Palmer), Elliott Dold, Charles Schneeman, and H. W. Wesso. Hard to pick a favourite this issue but probably Brown (for the previously mentioned underwater scene) followed close behind by Wesso/Schneeman/Dold.
In Times to Come trails a new three-part serial starting next issue, Jack Williamson’s The Legion of Probability (retitled The Legion of Time on publication). Campbell says it will be “our first mutant, new-concept story,” and that Williamson’s story embodies “a completely new fundamental idea, an idea that permits of dozens of other plots.” He also mentions a science article from ‘Doc’ Smith. The closing section has Campbell reiterate that the ‘mutant’ tag is only used for new concepts and ideas, and that he thinks it may be as long as six months before the next one.
Of the 500 Known Elements is a chemistry filler which states that isotopes are “different physical elements”.
Detail—But Immensely Important to Engineering is the second science filler, which is about new electrical motors and their glass tape insulation.
Radiation in Uniform by Herbert C. McKay is a science article on polarised light. I gave up on it after a few pages: it is unintelligible (and I say that as someone with a degree in physics and chemistry).
In this month’s editorial, Democracy, John W. Campbell, Jr. states “a magazine is not an autocracy” but a “democracy by the readers’ votes”. Mmmm . . . for now, maybe. He adds that, while he can’t print all the letters he receives, he will publish a representative selection, and that the letters received are helpful in “forming and directing” the magazine’s expansion.
Ignition Point is another short pseudonymous science filler by Campbell which examines the energies required to produce atomic reactions.
A pseudonymous Campbell also contributes a ridiculous letter about the evolutionary pressures of modern living on man to Science Discussions:

Man had prehensile toes once, and he probably had a nice prehensile tail. I’ve seen worker in a steel-mill who worked controls on a special open-hearth furnace loading machine by using both hands, both feet, and by pushing controls with the side of his head. Just think how darned handy a man with prehensile, individually controllable toes, and a really useable monkeylike tail would be!
And eyes! Not a few creatures have eyes capable of individual operation. Give a man eyes that could at will, operate either as two separate units of vision or in stereoscopic cooperation, and you’d have something. A little development of brain tissue already available, and he’d be watching indicating meters, and the operations he was performing at the same time.
That is, if a change does occur in Man so that a slightly variant type arises, he’s apt to get his chance pretty quickly. That little thing like the two-way eyes, for instance. A workman who developed that knack would get a pretty good salary, because his efficiency would be higher.

A man with two-way eyes would probably not do that well on Tinder, and thus fail to reproduce and pass on his mutation.
After another letter about evolution, there is a request for an astronomical cover of Earth as seen from the Moon. The final letter is about escape velocity.
Brass Tacks has letters from a couple of names I recognise (Robert A. Madle, the long-time bookseller, and Langley Searles, the future editor of Fantasy Commentator). As well as the usual comments about the stories4 there are quite a few that mention the artwork, and their like or dislike of various artists.

An interesting issue, with the appearance of del Rey the highlight. ●

_____________________

1. Ray Palmer was just about to start, or had just started, at Ziff Davis, taking over the editorship of Amazing Stories from T. O’Conor Sloane (Palmer’s first issue was the June 1938 issue).

2. De Camp’s first story for the magazine was The Isolinguals (Astounding, September 1937). He would become an important contributor to the magazine.
Alexi & Cory Panshin’s The World Beyond the Hill (Chapter 12) (Amazon UK; ebook on iTunes) has three or so pages about Campbell meeting de Camp and their early relationship. It includes this:

It didn’t take Campbell long to see that de Camp had a highly developed sense of a universe of interconnection, a universe in which all things hang together. And Campbell was able to recognize this as the same in essence as the universe of his own vision—the universe of underlying operating principles.
De Camp became Campbell’s right-hand man. In 1938, Campbell would publish only three short stories and one article by de Camp. But in 1939, the figures would be two two-part articles, two novels, and six stories, and Campbell would also use de Camp as a script doctor to do a complete revision of another author’s not-quite acceptable novel.
It would be hard to overstate the value de Camp held for Campbell in those early years. It was a complex and interrelated program of change that Campbell was attempting to engineer in 
Astounding through 1938 and 1939, and the writing that best exemplified the modern science fiction that Campbell was striving to bring into being was the work of L. Sprague de Camp. Until other writers finally showed up with their own versions of the new Atomic Age vision, it was de Camp who served as Campbell’s corroboration and proof.

3. Del Rey describes how his first story came to be written in The Early Del Rey by Lester Del Rey, Doubleday, 1975:

I was busy reading [Astounding] a few days before Christmas [1937] when my girlfriend dropped by to see me. She lived a couple of blocks away, and the landlady knew her and liked her enough to let her go up to my room unannounced. So she appeared just as I was throwing the magazine rather forcibly onto the floor. I still do that sometimes when a story irritates me, though I’m somewhat more tolerant now.
I can’t remember why I was so disgusted. The story was one by Manly Wade Wellman, “Pithecanthropus Rejectus,” in the January 1938 issue of Astounding Stories, in which normal human beings were unsuccessfully imitated by an ape; I suspect my dislike was at the unsuccessful part of the idea.
[. . .]
Anyhow, my girlfriend wanted to know what all the fuss was about, and I responded with a long and overly impassioned diatribe against the story. In return, I got the most irritating question a critic can receive: “What makes you think you have the right to judge writers when you can’t write a story yourself?”
My expostulations on the great critics who couldn’t write fiction got nowhere.
“So what makes you think I can’t write?” I wanted to know.
“Prove it,” she answered.
That was something of a stopper. But I couldn’t back down at that stage. So eventually, I talked her down to admitting that maybe even successful writers couldn’t sell every story, and that if I could get a personal letter from the editor, rather than a standard rejection slip, I would win the bet.
When she left, I sat down to do a little hard thinking. I was pretty sure I could win, partly because I knew that John W. Campbell had just been made editor of the magazine; I’d written some very nice things about his stories in my letters to the editor, and I was sure he’d remember my name, which would help. That was cheating, a bit, but I still didn’t think the challenge was fair, either. Anyhow, I’d stuck my lip out, and now I had to make good: I have always enjoyed challenges, and I meant to enjoy this one.
Well, I’d read an amazing number of articles on how to write fiction in the old Writers’ Digest—splendid articles by many of my favorite pulp writers. I’d read them because it helped me to enjoy their fiction even more, but I must have learned something out of them. And I’d also come up with a number of ideas for stories during the years of reading. I hadn’t written any of them down, even in notes, but I remembered the best of them.
In the end, however, I decided that the best idea was to rebut the story I’d disliked by writing one in which man failed and some other animal took over. Wellman had used an ape, so I chose dogs as my hopefuls. So far as I could remember, few science fiction stories had used dogs, though a lot had messed around with the apes.
During that evening and the next day, I figured out what I hoped was a plot. Then I sat down at my old three-row Oliver and began writing steadily. It took me about three hours to finish. And looking at the results, I wasn’t at all happy. It was too wordy in style, and too long. I knew that editors get too many long stories and are usually most interested in fiction that is under five thousand words in length. Mine ran to eight thousand. So I sat down with a pencil and began slashing out and shortening. When I finished, I had only four thousand words left, but the results were much better. I’d also learned a tremendous amount about the art of writing fiction—so much that I never had to resort to that business of slashing again; thereafter, I slashed mentally as I went along.
So I shoved the old 1909 Oliver under the bed and dragged out my modern four-row Woodstock. (There was something about the old machine that suited it for composing; but the Woodstock made much neater copy.) I retyped the story neatly in approved form, put it in an envelope with the required stamped, return-address envelope, and mailed it off to John W. Campbell the day before Christmas, 1937.
The story was entitled “The Faithful,” and I thought it a little too simple to sell, but good enough to get a personal letter.
[. . .]
I’d read enough about manuscripts from unknown writers to expect a long delay before I received any notice of my story. But to my surprise, there was an envelope from Astounding Stories in the mail of January 8. And it was a small envelope, instead of the large return one I had sent to hold my manuscript. There was no personal letter from the editor—but there was a check for $40.
It’s a little hard to find the right word to describe my reaction. Perhaps ecstatic delight is the best description; and from other writers, I’ve heard that this is a sort of standard, normal feeling. There seems to be something about having one’s first work of fiction accepted for publication that is not equaled by any other success on earth!
Naturally, I called the girl friend, who agreed that I’d won the bet—and who never again questioned my right to throw a magazine across the room! Then I called my uncle, who had sold a lot of pulp fiction himself; I think his reaction was fully the equal to mine when he finally figured out what I was saying.
But I was far too practical to frame the check; that got cashed at once, leaving me with more money in one lump than I’d had for several months. And then the second reaction began. How long had all this been going on? Forty dollars was a lot of money in those days; and I’d earned it for only a couple of days of fairly easy work that had been fun. Aha! Mr. World, here I come!

I’ve read very little of Del Rey’s work, but the early stories of his that are always mentioned are Helen O’Loy (Astounding, December 1938) and Nerves (Astounding, September 1942). That said, The Faithful placed fifth in the 1939 Retro Hugo short story awards (Helen O’Loy placed second behind Arthur C. Clarke’s How We Went to Mars).

4. The Analytical Laboratory (a story-rating feature that begins next month) in the June issue reveals what readers thought of the stories in this one:

The pecking order is close to my own: I would swap the del Rey/McLeary and the de Camp/Burks. It is interesting to note that the readers of 1938 also clocked the Palmer, Schachner and Gallun stories as the weak material in this issue. ●

Edited 15th November 2019: formatting, archive.org link.

rssrss

Leave a Reply

This site uses Akismet to reduce spam. Learn how your comment data is processed.

New Writings in SF #1, 1964

ISFDB link

Other reviews1:
Andrew Darlington, Eight Miles Higher
P. Schuyler Miller, Analog (January 1967)
Michael Moorcock, New Worlds #144 (September-October 1964)
Various, Goodreads
Roddy Williams, SF to Read Before You Die
Charles Winstone, Vector #28 (September 1964)

Editor, John Carnell

Fiction:
Key to Chaos • novelette by Edward Mackin –
Two’s Company • short story by Douglas R. Mason [as by John Rankine] ∗∗
Man on Bridge • short story by Brian W. Aldiss
Haggard Honeymoon • novelette by Joseph Green and James Webbert –
The Sea’s Furthest End • novelette by Damien Broderick

Non-fiction:
Foreword • essay by John Carnell

The third leg of the stool for British SF magazine readers in 1964 (New Worlds and Science Fantasy being the other two) wasn’t another magazine but a new original anthology series by John Carnell. Although there had been earlier SF anthologies containing new fiction, they were not common, and NWISF was unique—it had initial hardcover publication by Dobson Books2, followed a few months later by the paperback from Corgi Books3.

The anthology was initially quarterly in frequency but this publication schedule would not be maintained for long. However, the series lasted thirty volumes, and to 1977. Beyond John Carnell’s death in 1972 it was edited by Kenneth Bulmer.
The interior format stayed remarkably consistent throughout its run: there would be an editorial or foreword by the editor, and each story would have a short introduction, followed by a blank page, followed by the story itself.4

The Foreword by John Carnell starts with this:

New Writings in S-F is a radical departure in the field of the science fiction short story. As its name implies, not only new stories written specially for the series as well as s-f stories which would not normally be seen by the vast majority of readers, will appear in future editions, but new styles, ideas, and even new writers who have something worth contributing to the genre, will be presented. p. 7

He then mentions short fiction and the SF magazines, and how anthologies have until now presented already published material. He goes on to say:

Now the time has come to take this development one natural stage further—and introduce new material specially written and selected for the new market. p. 7

He briefly trails the contents before finishing with:

Science fiction (an unwieldy and unattractive title which should more aptly be called “Speculative fiction”) is now expanding into the field of general literature and has largely outstripped the western romance in popularity and is fast catching up with the thriller. New Writings in S-F will, in future volumes, form a bridgehead between the old and new versions of speculative fiction. p. 9

Given this editorial pitch, it is surprising that the volume opens with Key to Chaos, a long novelette by Edward Mackin5 which reads like an overly padded, single-draft story from the 1940s. It is one of Mackin’s series about the cyberneticist and all-round chancer Hek Belov. It starts intriguingly enough:

The first time I met Frank Tetchum he was hammering on the front door of an apartment house block on East Third Level. Beside him was a chair, a small table, and a plastic bowl with some cutlery in it. Evicted tenants are not an uncommon sight in these parts, and I was about to walk on when he spoke to me.
“It’s one thing being slung out,” he said heatedly, “but it’s a bit thick when they slap an order on your furniture and you don’t even owe any rent. The scoundrels have got my id-scope in there, too, and they’re hanging on to it.” He recommenced his hammering on the door, using the chair this time.
I looked at him, curiously. He was slimly built, perhaps thirty years old, and badly in need of a shave. “What’s an id-scope?” I asked.
He put the chair down, and frowned at me. “It’s a thought visualizer,” he said. “I invented it.” Then he went back to his frenzied assault on the door, and smashed the chair without eliciting any response. p. 13

The story then details how the two of them obtain the device under false pretences from the businessman who has repossessed the flat. They hide away in a nearby deserted building, and Belov gets Tetchum to demonstrate the device. He sees (lascivious) visions from his own id, and then sees Tetchum’s. The latter involves a nightmarish machine making all sorts of devices, including what would seem to be killer robots.
The two are soon found by Benson, the businessman that appropriated Tetchum’s flat, and they are both pressured into working for him.
Long story short, the machine they build produces a small globe that is a rejuvenation device. There is some attempted double-dealing after this, and then the discovery that the machine is actually some sort of chaos device. If it sounds like I am struggling to synopsise this story it is because I am. The story wanders all over the place, and my comprehension was not aided by all the scientific gobbledygook. Take this far from atypical example:

“What’s this?” I asked him.
“A simple K-type amplifier.”
I shook my head. “As far as the machine, or I should say the computer, is concerned that’s a key. A key to Chaos. My guess is that this is anything but a simple K-amp. The bit about youthfulness was the barb. I programmed that as part of an explanation; but the computer has referred to its standard banks, and got some other answers, which it chewed over in that decision box, the homeostatic part of the set-up. The result was that the computer was faced with something of an insoluble problem. It knew what to produce; but the materials weren’t available, not all the materials, that is.
“Now this is where we have to make a leap in the dark. Here we are, a speck in the cosmic eye. The tiniest of tiny islands, where two and two make four, and logic—our peculiar brand of logic—holds sway. Outside, and everywhere, the primal stuff of the universe patterns itself crazily on stray thoughts escaping from the odd, alien, organism in its midst, because Chaos has its own logic. The logic of perfect illogicality. The infinite patterning that both is and isn’t, now and forever, in the shifting nevernever land of everything and everywhere and nothing anywhere. That’s what lies outside the mind; but it doesn’t lie outside the mental scope of a machine. A machine has no fear, and only the mental reservations with which man, in his wisdom, endows it. . . .”
“Cut the prologue and get to the explanations,” said Tetchum impatiently. “I still think you’re waffling.”

Quite.
I presume the random plot and gibberish explanations are meant to be overlooked as the piece is allegedly a ‘humorous’ one, but this appears to consist largely of Belov calling people names (one extended example is a two page diversion where Belov goes for a meal in a restaurant and the owner attempts to get Belov to pay an outstanding bill, p. 36-38). Now name-calling can be funny (e.g. John Cleese in Fawlty Towers) but it isn’t here. This is an awful start to the anthology.
Two’s Company by Douglas R. Mason is the first of his pseudonymous ‘Dag Fletcher, Womaniser in Space’ stories (although that description is accurate, it’s really the ‘Dag Fletcher’ series). In this one he is on an alien world, the Controller on a terraforming project, and his new colleague is a reserved female mathematician, Meryl Winguard. When I say reserved, I mean she pays no attention to Fletcher.
They go to one of the distant stations to rectify a computer fault and, when they are finished, leave in time to get back to base before the planet’s freezing night begins. En route they crash. They have to spend the night cuddled together in a makeshift sleeping bag, and then have work together to traverse rocky terrain and a cliff edge to get home before the next nightfall. During this they establish a bond.
This is an economically told story that is okay I guess—if you can ignore the period sexism, and that the story is essentially an adolescent sexual fantasy. Fletcher is almost constantly aware of Meryl’s model looks and figure—even when he is about to perform mouth to mouth resuscitation on her after the crash there is this:

He registered the light strength she had, the perfectly modelled knees and ankles and high round breasts. p. 82

And, of course, after they are safely back to base, and Fletcher has showered and dressed, he comes out of his room to find Meryl has made dinner and slipped into something more comfortable.
In the introduction to Man on Bridge by Brian W. Aldiss, Carnell says it has “overtones of 1984,” something repeated in other reviews. Personally, I don’t really think the story is more than tangentially about totalitarianism, but is perhaps more an examination of human consciousness. That said, you can see why some would make the comparison, given the story takes place in an unspecified Eastern European country where proles keep the intellectuals, called ‘Cerebrals,’ in camps under armed guard. This is from later in the story:

The common people had often revolted against the rich—but the rich were not identifiable once shorn of their money; then the tide of anger turned against the intelligent. You can always tell an intellectual, even when he cowers naked and bruised before you with his spectacles squashed in the muck; you only have to get him to talk. So the intellectuals had elected to live in camps, behind wire, for their own safety. Things were better now— because we were fewer and they infinitely more; but the situation had changed again: the stay was no longer voluntary, for we had lost our place in the world. We had even lost our standing in the camps. Throughout the more than-mediaeval darkness that had fallen over Europe, our cerebral monasteries were ruled over by the pistol and whip; and the flagellation of the new order of monks was never self-inflicted. p. 109

In the camp two of the Cerebrals, Grabowicz and Winther, have created a new kind of man, Adam X, by removing half his brain. Adam has no visceral responses at all.
Grabowicz and Winther are summoned by the camp commander, who interrogates them about Adam X, and later sends a report to his superiors. Grabowicz is taken away and punished for his insolence to the commander during their conversation, whereas Winther and Adam X are allowed to temporarily leave the camp to visit Winther’s family in the nearby village.
On the way there Winther, the narrator, talks to Adam X:

I took his arm and led him towards the gates. It was always an ordeal, moving towards those great slab-cheeked guards, so contemptuous of eye, so large in their rough uniforms and boots, as they stood there holding their rifles like paddles. We produced our identity sticks, which were taken from us, and were allowed to pass, and go through the side-gate, between the strands of barbed wire, into the free world outside.
“They enjoy their show of might,” Adam said. “These people have to express their unhappiness by using ugly things like guns and ill-fitting uniforms, and the whole conception of the camp.”
“We are unhappy, but we don’t find that sort of thing necessary.”
“No, Jon, I am not unhappy. I just feel empty and do not wish to live.”
His talk was full of that sort of conversation-stopper.
We strode down the road at increasing pace as the way steepened between cliffs. The ruined spires and roofs of the town were rising out of the dip ahead, and I wanted only to get home; but since I had never caught Adam in so communicative a frame of mind, I felt I had to take advantage of it and find out what I could from him.
“This not wishing to live, Adam—this is just post-operational depression. When it wears off, you will recover your spirits.”
“I think not. I have no spirits. Morgem Grabowicz cut them away. I can only reason, and I see that there is no point to life but death.”
“That I repudiate with all my heart. On the contrary, while there is life, there is no death. Even now, with all my limbs aching from that filthy prole punishment, I rejoice in every breath I take, and in the effect of the light on those houses, and the crunch of this track under our feet.”
“Well, Jon, you must be allowed your simple vegetable responses.” He spoke with such finality that my mouth was stopped. p. 104-105

They arrive at the village, and later socialise with Winther’s family and their neighbours. Later, Adam X disappears and Winther goes to search, finding him walking on the parapet of the bridge above a perilous drop. Adam only just avoids falling to his death and is rescued by Winther and two of the onlookers. On the way home, Winther has another conversation with Adam, and a realisation:

I told him then. “I can’t work on these brain operations any more.”
“Grabowicz can. Grabowicz will. You’re too late to be squeamish, Jon; already there is a new force in the world.”
After what I had seen on the bridge, I felt he might be right. But a new force for good or bad? How would the change come? What would it be? I closed my eyes and saw clearly the sort of world that Grabowicz and I, with the unwitting co-operation of the prole leaders, might have already brought into being. Given enough men and women like Adam, with their visceral brains removed, they would bring up children unswayed and unsoftened by human emotion, whose motives were inscrutable to the rest of mankind. The rulers of our world would find such people very useful at first, and so a place would be made for them.
And from being instruments of power, they would turn into a power in their own right. It was a process often witnessed by history. p. 116

I’m not entirely sure what this story is about, but it is an absorbing, intellectual piece that would have been a good fit for the New Worlds of 1966.
Haggard Honeymoon by Joseph Green and James Webbert is a long novelette in four chapters about an alien planet where a colony is mining uranium: the men do the mining, the women look after the domestic side of life, and the Rilli natives act as servants.
The first part of this story sets up one of many maguffins, which is that the planet causes men to crack up after a few months there. Previously, a young wife had smuggled herself out with her husband and it was found that newly-weds had the best chance of lasting the six months required to make the operation economically viable. The reason newly-weds last longer is never adequately explained.
When the narrator, Carter Mason, is watching an evening film in the rec room with his wife, he sees one of the other men have a breakdown. The next morning, after his mining shift at the lake (second maguffin: this is a weird place, with lumps of uranium at the bottom, and red water that acts as a radiation baffle) he is promoted to major to take the sick man’s place. Soon after this Carter’s wife, atypically, starts having the dreams. The colonel agrees that she and Carter need to go back early.
The third chapter introduces three more elements: one of the other colonists tells Carter he thinks the lake wasn’t made by an asteroid but by a spaceship; there is mention of the native Rilli temple on forbidden ground; and Valle has a waking dream where she is riding a creature between the stars and a Rilli swings a sword at her throat.
In the final act (spoiler) Carter deduces what the problem is: the Rilli are the descendants of the spaceship crew, and their priests are mind broadcasting to their people from the forbidden temple. Their transmissions are driving the humans crazy. Carter takes one of the crawlers to the temple and (after running over one of the defending Rilli) sabotages the coolant system and runs away, leaving the nuclear drive to go critical and explode (no fail-safe then), killing many Rilli and leaving others to die of radiation poisoning. The broadcasting stops.
Back at base he explains himself to the colonel, who is not convinced by Carter’s ‘ends-justify the means’ actions:

“But this doesn’t fully explain why you chose the drastic method of blowing up the tower, killing the broadcasting priests and ruining one valuable crawler, instead of simply telling me about your suspicions and letting us check them out together.”
“Valle couldn’t have lasted the night,” said Carter simply. “And it hadn’t occurred to me those people would be broadcasting on line-of-sight.”
“Well, it’s too late to worry now,” said Simpson with a sigh. “I suppose your contribution to the programme will far outweigh the demerits you’re in line for. You’ll have to go through a formal court-martial when we get back to Earth, of course, but that shouldn’t be for several years now.” p. 149

This is an unconvincingly contrived piece with many plot holes (why are the newlyweds better at surviving, why is Valle the first female affected, why didn’t he put Valle in the crawler and drive her away from the temple?). It also has a morally repugnant ending. (I know it is unwise to view older fiction from a modern perspective but I suspect some of the attitudes here may have been unpalatable even in the mid-sixties. With the excesses of the Vietnam War to come it is, at least, an unsettling ending.)
I’m not sure that The Sea’s Furthest End by Damien Broderick is his first published SF story but it is certainly an early one.6 It has a data dump beginning (including an italicised prologue) that describes a collapsed Galactic Empire, and centres around Aylan, the son of a new Emporer who intends to reunify it.
Aylan’s friend Milenn visits, and tells him that rebel forces at the Calais are in danger of being slaughtered. Millen asks Aylan to get the Emperor to give him control of the besieging forces, and suggests that Federation and not Empire is the way forward. When Aylan’s plan is humiliatingly rejected by his father at Council, he challenges him to a duel. Aylan already hates his father because of what happened to a lover of his:

Adriel was the lovely daughter of the ex-Tyrant of Corydon. The scientists of that Rim system had reached their finest achievement in her, for she was genetically, designed for beauty, intelligence, and . . . something else. Geneticists gave her a talent, a wildly improbable gift, and even they did not know what it would be.
She was an Emote.
“Chameleon-like” was the inevitable adjective, but it wasn’t accurate. Adriel could control her Emoting. It was a defence-mechanism, but it was more. It was a talent, and she could use it at will.
Of course, everybody loved her. In a fraternal, helping fashion. Her subconscious knew better than to Emote in a sexually attractive manner. She had no desire to be raped by every male who came within her Emotive range. But for Aylan, the quiet son of her father’s conqueror, she had felt the stirrings of love.
They had been like children, in their new discovery. Their love was sunrise and the scent of roses and the soft breath in the sheets. She drew the beginnings of manhood from the frightened adolescent who was Aylan, and their love was a burgeoning flower.
For Malvara, it was unthinkable that his son should have such a victory. So Adriel became his diplomatic mistress. p. 162

Before the duel Milenn gives Aylan a stasis gun from the old Empire to make sure he wins, which he does. Aylan departs with a small fleet for Calais to take control of the attacking forces. En route he learns of a mutiny by the Duke of Calais. Millen then gives Aylan plans for stasis weapons to fit to their ships (throughout there are a number of short italic passages suggesting an omnipotent ‘Player’ is externally manipulating the events that are unfolding). Aylan arrives at the Centre and puts down the mutiny.
Up until this point the story is a competent enough piece but clichéd and unexceptional. The last chapter’s revelations about Millen, however, lift it to another level:

So, finally, he became the Civilizer.
He was Gilgamesh, Odin, Ra, Indra, Zeus, Tonactechtli, Moses, Gandhi, Hammarskjold, Holden-Smith, Porter, and Andreas. In the mud of the Nile he trod water and straw; his statue was carried before the tallow candles in Tenochtitlan; he advised the Great One in Tibet while the wind whistled through his thin bones; he thundered in the Terran Planetary Parliament; he laboured on alien worlds, muscles twisting to hammer wood and steel into homes for his fellows. And everywhere, he remembered. Peace was his goal, for no man can go through a million years’ odyssey without learning compassion and humanity. p. 187

Then, during the peace conference on Calais, reality dissolves, and we find events have been controlled by Millen, who is also the Player, to amuse and distract itself. The last lines are pretty corny but still work for the story:

Alone. Darkness, bodiless, infinite. All the questions answered and the tears wept. The Immortal wondered at the memory, and knew the reason. There was no Player. There was only himself, alone, eternally lonely. Infinity is a quiet place, eternity a lonely time. The Immortal remembered himself as Milenn, and forever the memory satisfied him. But forever is a short while, and memory is no cure for loneliness. Only participation, and forgetfulness.
The Tasks had been a good idea, but they had ended. The problem he had set himself: a universe, a race of naturally belligerent sapients, a goal of peace, freely accepted by them. And three times he had succeeded. Planetary government, Galactic empire, Galactic Federation. Himself eternal, not knowing the reason, only aware of the compulsion.
An Immortal Child grows lonely in the dark of eternity, and he knew that there was forgetfulness in the Game. So again in the deep of himself he uttered the Words.
“Let there be light!”
And, yet again, there was light.

This bootstrapping of the story in the final pages really worked for me, and improved my opinion of the story considerably. I was reminded of Charles Harness’s more complex super-science stories of the late 1940s and 50s.

As for the volume as a whole, it is not so much a “bridgehead between old and new SF,” but a better than normal issue of the Carnell New Worlds. ●

_____________________

1. Because NWISF #1 is a book and not a magazine there are three off-line reviews listed on ISFDB. I managed to obtain copies (thanks to Andy Sawyer for his help with the Vector one). James Colvin (Micheal Moorcock) in New Worlds #144 says it is another of Carnell’s “solidly balanced” collections, and adds the Aldiss is “very good,” the Broderick “excellent,” and that he “enjoyed the Belov [Mackin] best.” I don’t think he particularly appreciated the Rankine.
P. Schuyler Miller in the January 1967 Analog says the Aldiss “is bound to get itself reprinted,” and the Mackin “is as close as we’ve come in years to the broad, outrageous comedy of the great “Gallagher” stories that “Lewis Padgett” ([Kuttner/Moore] used to writer for Astounding.” He found the Rankine “trite” and thought the Green/Webbert made the “psychic perils very convincing” despite some “unbelievable chemistry.” He ends on a positive note about the Broderick.
Finally, in Vector #28, Charles Winstone reckons the aim of the anthology , as John Carnell writes in the introduction, to be “a radical departure in the field of the science fiction short story” is “not achieved.” He adds “the stories are new but the plots and characters are not. In only one story did the feeling of ‘I’ve been here before’ leave me.” Winstone liked the Aldiss best, was mystified by the Broderick, and had mixed feelings about the rest.

2. I presume they used the same plates for both editions as the editorial pages (i.e. everything apart from the publisher information at the front and the in-house ads at the back) in the hardback were identical to those in the paperback, except for the larger margins in the former (or at least they are in New Writings in SF #13, the only one I own in both formats). The publisher for both editions was Richard Clay (The Chaucer Press) Ltd.

3. Those Corgi editions would be very popular—the collection was reprinted in 1965 and again in 1970 (with a different cover):

3. The story introduction and title pages look like this (the story is Keith Roberts’ Manipulation from the third volume in the series):

4. Our Edward Mackin should not be confused with Ralph McInerny, who used “Edward Mackin” as a pseudonym (the latter’s Wikipedia entry shows a huge number of non-SF books).

5. On Broderick’s ISFDB page there are a couple of earlier stories listed but no information as to where or exactly when they were published. It also states that this volume’s story was “rewritten and expanded” to become The Game of Stars and Souls (2009). ●

Revised 7th September 2018 to include disambiguation information for Edward Mackin (footnote 4).

rssrss

4 thoughts on “New Writings in SF #1, 1964

  1. Walker Martin

    Thanks for the link to the EIGHT MILES HIGHER review which not only reviews this book but also covers all 30 volumes in the series. Too bad Carnell never managed to fill each issue with high quality fiction. Nice try however.

    Reply
    1. paul.fraser@sfmagazines.com Post author

      Yes, Andrew’s post is very useful.
      If you treat the series as an occasional magazine then it’s less underwhelming—there are usually a couple of interesting stories in every volume, sometimes more. In the short term it improves with Keith Roberts appearing regularly (and sometimes twice per volume) in #3 to #8.

      Reply
    1. paul.fraser@sfmagazines.com Post author

      Thanks for that link, Rich, and the information that it contains about the expansion/contraction of the story. It sounds like an interesting collection—I have a copy of ‘Uncle Bones’ in an Asimov’s, I think. Will dig it out.

      Reply

Leave a Reply

This site uses Akismet to reduce spam. Learn how your comment data is processed.

Science Fantasy #65, June-July 1964

ISFDB link

Other reviews: Strange Highways: Reading Science Fantasy, 1950-1967 by John Boston & Damien Broderick (Amazon)

_____________________

Editor, Kyril Bonfiglioli

Fiction:
Pink Plastic Gods • short story by Brian W. Aldiss ∗∗∗
The Contraption • novelette by Kenneth Bulmer
Blast Off • short story by Kyril Bonfiglioli [as by uncredited]
Lazarus • short story by Brian W. Aldiss [as by Jael Cracken]
Unauthorised Persons • novelette by Brian W. Aldiss [as by John Runciman]
Matchbox • short story by Peter Bradley
The Great Chan • short story by Archie Potts

Non-fiction:
Cover • by Roger Harris
Editorial • by Kyril Bonfiglioli
“Science Fantasy” • poem by Peter Levi
Competition: For Professional Scientists Only

_____________________

As I mentioned in my review of New Worlds #142 (Science Fantasy’s sister magazine), Nova Publications were struggling with the poor circulations of both magazines during 1963, a situation which caused Nova’s board of directors to close them down. When a new publisher was found at the last moment, a new editor was required as the previous one, John Carnell, had made other plans for the future. Both Michael Moorcock and Kyril Bonfiglioli were approached by (or had approached) David Warburton of Roberts & Vinter (the new publisher) about the job. Warburton decided to split the positions: Moorcock expressed a preference for New Worlds, so Bonfiglioli became Science Fantasy’s new editor.
Kyril Bonfiglioli, unlike Moorcock, was a complete unknown in the SF field and so his appointment “came as a surprise to many.” An Oxford art dealer friend of Brian W. Aldiss, he was “the director of two art galleries, a bookshop and an antique shop; and had at one time been a sabre champion.”1, 2 Apart from his swordsmanship skills, Bonfigliloi had no editorial qualifications.

The issue opens with the new editor’s Editorial, which is more in the ‘house-keeping’ rather than ‘manifesto’ tradition of inaugural addresses. After acknowledging the change of publisher and editor, the Editorial exhorts readers to buy rather than borrow the magazine as a small increase in circulation will make a big difference to the rates paid to writers (and the profits made by publishers, one presumes). His second exhortation to the readership is to start writing stories as, after having read a quarter of a million words of manuscript “so bad it made me blush,” he has concluded that no-one is writing the kind of material the readers want. Finally he denies that science fantasy exists but, before getting too far into his theological reasons why, wanders off into a list of the things he doesn’t want to see in a story, concluding with:

What you really cannot do—if you are writing for adults—is have a Venusian princess materialise out of the air, offering to free your hero from the BEM’s clutches if he will come to Krzk and kill the wicked High Priest of Zoz with the magic sword of Ugg. Ugh. My editorial watchword, then, is “Science Fiction for Grown-Ups!” I hope I shall be able to make it hold good. p. 3

After the editorial there is a poem titled “Science Fantasy”, “specially written” by Peter Levi (there is a short note about it after the Aldiss story). The individual stanzas are okay but the first pair don’t seem to have anything to do with the last.
The first of the stories is Pink Plastic Gods by Brian W. Aldiss, one of three pieces by him in this issue.3 It has an intriguing start:

Every day that hot August of 2111 I was in Long Barrow Field, getting on with the potato harvesting. The six neosimians I employed worked hard in their monkey way, the heat shimmering above their bent backs. They worked two hours on and a half hour off, scamping if I let them.
“Keep up with us, Judy! Hey, Tess, that’s Daisy’s trench!”
Judy was the laziest of the bunch, yet Judy was the one I liked best.
Our first shift began as Sol rose, and the last shift finished after he’d gone and we were up to our knees in a mist as thick as rice pudding. Slowly we worked our way round the long pillow shape of Barrow Hill, day in, day out, from pearly light to purple. Neosimians have their drawbacks—they’re slow for one thing—but they are vastly cheaper than machines; and unlike machines they never miss a potato—if you keep watching them.
I kept watching them. Every potato meant a penny off the load of debt I had shouldered since manhood. But that still left me time to glance up to the top of Barrow Hill every so often, to regard the solitary figure up there surveying me. p. 5-6

The figure is Smith’s affluent neighbour, Aurel Derek Seyfert. One day Seyfert comes to speak to Smith and, after Smith’s initial rebuff, convinces him to go to a party taking place at Seyfert’s home. The party segment reveals a number of things: first, Smith leads a circumscribed life; second, he is an person who is blunt to the point of rudeness; third, Seyfert is as out of place at his own party as Smith is; fourth, Seyfert’s son Monday is the inventor of the robots—styled after famous sculptures—that are serving at the party, the eponymous “pink plastic gods”:

I turned to Seyfert. Catching him looking at me in that same enigmatic way, I said angrily. “Why do you keep all these statues around?”
“You mean our pink plastic gods!” he exclaimed. Suddenly he became animated. “They’re at once our slaves and our rulers! How do you like them, eh? Aren’t they foul, aren’t they vulgar? Aren’t they the epitome of our stinking, decadent, useless, putrid civilization? Come on, Smith, I value your opinion as the first honest man I’ve met in years. Aren’t they just the goddammed end of everything?”
“They’re beautiful,” I said.
“Beautiful! They’re cheap and nasty! They’re fakes. Famous sculptures brought to life. That was the Venus de Milo to greet us at the door. Michelangelo’s David gave us our first drinks. This little beauty is one of Canova’s marbles. The castle crawls with walking statues. ‘Any masterpiece copied for your delight’ is Monday’s motto. I told you he manufactures them? Pink plastic outside, wheels and levers inside. p. 12

The final section has Smith leaving the party and walking home, with Seyfert as unwelcome company. During the journey it looks like there will be a falling out over Smith’s bankrupt father (Seyfert was one of the creditors). However, Seyfert tells Smith he is indebted to his father, as it was after the collapse of his company that Seyfert travelled to another planet and met and married an alien woman. He tells Smith of his life with her, but (spoiler) the account has a tragic end:

“[In] twenty-seventy the Anti-Miscegenation Laws were passed with cheers from all the do-gooders in the universe. The net result was the establishing of strict segregation from which it’ll take Uffitsi ages to recover. If you can picture a cross between the colour bar in the United States and the apartheid that ruled what was the South African Republic last century, you have an idea of what happened on that beautiful planet almost overnight.
“So I found myself outside the law, with my marriage declared null and void, and Adam officially proclaimed a Sport. According to biologists it was amazing we’d had a living child at all. Yes, they caught up with us, the bastards. We could have gone on living peacefully in that valley for ever, Pampas and Adam and I, but the officials came with their cases full of forms and police support. Hardacre, I could have killed every mother’s son of them—yet they were nice polite men, personally very sorry for interfering, but orders were orders and the law was the law . . . You know the attitude. No law is so legal as a new law, and we couldn’t escape it.
“We were all three hauled up for trial in a city a thousand miles away from our valley. We did the journey on the Uffitsian monorail, under government escort. On the way—it must have been just the sorrow of it all—poor little Adam died. He did it so easily, James, so easily, like falling into an after dinner doze, and never a word he spoke.”
I did not know what to say. Dying has always seemed to me the hardest job a man can put his hand to. Of course, for all Seyfert said, his kid was a freak, no denying it. We walked in silence for some way while I mulled the matter over, until Seyfert wiped a hand across his eyes and spoke again. p. 19-20

The different parts of this story don’t really work together (the ‘pink plastic gods’ part in particular seems out of place) but I liked it nonetheless. The main characters are complex and fascinating characters, and I also liked the maturity and the grimness of the piece. These elements foreshadows Aldiss’s later, better work.
The Contraption by Kenneth Bulmer also gets off to a promising start with an attempt at defusing a booby trap on an unknown device in an alien ship:

They all saw him die without a sound. On the closed-circuit screen, the silent flare of the explosion, utterly sudden, utterly deadly, momentarily blinded the watching men in the bunker.
Bill Barrington was not the first man to gamble his life against the thing out there. He was, in fact, the fifth.
Like all the others, he had lost. Luke Rawson fought down the sick, helpless anger in him, the useless nerve-corroding rage. Bill Barrington had been a friend. Now he was only a memory. They wouldn’t find enough of him decently to bury in a matchbox. p. 23

Unfortunately it soon turns into a Royal Navy in space story, with a plot about the alien Brute ships (U-boats) decimating the Terran (Atlantic) convoys, and the humans (Brits) trying to discover the alien’s (Nazi’s) secret. The central character Rawson is dispatched to capture another ship. At the same time, a Terran Intelligence colonel waiting for a ride to a planet called Cudham I—this is added into the mix so it can provide a solution to the problem at the end of the story. (Cudham I is surrounded by a 3-D version of Saturn’s rings and, later, the colonel cannot penetrate the debris field. Sure enough, (spoiler) the booby-trapped device turns out to be a navigation device that enables the Earthmen to find a path to the surface of the planet.) However, before this finale the story plods on for what seems like forever.
As with most of these stories it suffers from many failures of imagination (advanced spaceships with the guns of a battleship, a colonel who carries a briefcase and unrolls a paper star chart, bacon and egg sandwiches for breakfast, etc., etc.) A Carnell reject I suspect.
Blast Off is an anonymous piece subtitled “Astronaut’s thoughts from the Finnish.” When the story was later reprinted it emerged that Bonfigliloi was the author.4 It is an interesting work that presages the New Wave with the stream-of-consciousness thoughts of an astronaut about to board a spaceship:

Yes, well, there it stands, that’s the thing you have to ride on, next stop the heavens ha ha and don’t think you aren’t scared don’t let anyone think I’m scared I mean I’m don’t anyone think I’m not scared oh you know. But anyway there it stands and I suppose like the man says it has a kind of stark beauty and all—long and slim and pointing up to the stars my destination and don’t anyone think I’m oh hell. p. 55

I wonder what old-school readers of Carnell’s New Worlds and Science Fantasy made of this.
The second of the Aldiss stories, Lazarus, is published under his ‘Jael Cracken’ pseudonym, which (as with the John Runciman pseudonym for the next story) would be used once more in Science Fantasy and never again.
The story starts with an ex-astronaut giving a speech at a school. He tells the boys the story of the space station project he was part of before the Third World War started. During this mission one of the three crew members died on the moon but, before they could recover him, the war started and the two remaining astronauts were brought back to Earth.
He goes on to say that some years later the other surviving astronaut contacted him to say they had received a message from the station. When usable rockets were found on enemy soil shortly after this, he and the other astronaut organised a mission to the station. There (spoiler) they found the dead astronaut, apparently alive but host to an alien organism. The astronaut that contacted the narrator dies during this mission, and the latter takes both of the bodies back to Earth along with a religious message from the original dead crewman:

“I am beyond medicine. But I am not dead, for up here I cannot die. No life can come into being except on earth. No death can come into being except on earth. This is all my message.” p. 77

A new cult/religion starts, the war ends.
The first half of this is an overly padded setup, and the second isn’t convincing. That said, the scene on the space station where they meet the dead man has a certain momentum of its own.
Unauthorised Persons by Brian W. Aldiss is his third story in the issue and by far the worst. It starts with a bumptious colonial administrator called Pepkinson going to a planet where an archaeologist called Bullock has found a city from the First Galactic Empire buried in ice. The planet is part of an unusual binary star system, and its eccentric orbit has taken it a long way from the major sun. Consequently, the atmosphere has frozen and life has died out, except for some mutated vermin in the underground (or under-ice) city.
They descend and start exploring, and discover a previously buried tunnel that leads to a building that, bizarrely, has a warning sign in English telling them to keep out. They ignore it and find a time machine inside which takes them back eight thousand years.
Back in the past the time machine guards take them to one of the city’s leaders. Bullock is shown around while the leader’s daughter entertains Pepkinson. Bullock is lectured about the peculiarities of the local star system, and told that a catastrophic ice-age is imminent. The city’s occupants will use the time machine to escape the disaster.
The last part of the story is a time travel escapade with various versions of Pepkinson, Bullock and the daughter running around in the future city.
There is too much sfnal furniture in this overly gimmicky story, and it full of cardboard characters. A poor piece.
The last two stories are what would later be described in a reader’s letter as “typical Bonfiglioli space-fillers”. Matchbox by Peter Bradley (a one-shot writer) is about a reporter covering a Women’s Institute meeting for a local newspaper. The winner of their competition to put the greatest number of objects in a matchbox appears to have one that is a tesseract (larger on the inside than the outside). The reporter and the women retire to her house to experiment with it. The ending (spoiler: it is used develop a space drive) is weak.
The story is little more than a notion, but is told in an entertaining enough style:

I left, having persuaded Mrs. O’Neill to let me have the matchbox and its vital contents, and exchanged a not very subtle pleasantry with the milkman as I let myself into my lodgings. I awoke a couple of hours later feeling as fresh as if I’d just had a couple of hours sleep, and made my way to the office.
Harvey, my news editor, glanced up at me as I entered. His glance evidently took in my all-night eyes and unshaven (no, if I must be scrupulously honest, even unwashed) features for, after looking at the Diary for the previous day, he started to warn me against the perils of being drawn into Women’s Institute orgies.
“You mark my words, Sock,” he said (Sock is short for Socrates. How I got this nickname is a long and not very interesting story.) “I’ve seen it happen too often. These harpies out in the county drag you into their midst, load you up with rhubarb wine, and before you know where you are you’re passing round mystery parcels and taking part in other obscene rituals, and . . .
It went on for several minutes more. Our Mr. Harvey was noted for his ingenious improvisations on original themes, and this morning he was in good voice. He concluded by asking me what I had got out of my night’s work. p. 122

The Great Chan by Archie Potts5 is another story told to a third party.6 This one concerns the last performance of the Great Chan, a magician, at a town music hall. The narrator is a newspaper reviewer who interviews Chan at the end of the show:

He was seated in front of the mirror getting his greasepaint off, and waved me to a seat without stopping his work.
“You won’t mind, I hope, if I carry on with this as we talk?”
To my surprise, his yellow complexion and almond eyes were disappearing under the cream as I watched, revealing unmistakably European features beneath the make-up. Seeing me stare, he laughed.
“No, the Chinese guise is just part of the act. People don’t like an ordinary-looking man performing apparent miracles so in Europe I always make-up Chinese-style. When I tour the Far East, of course, I have to wear a top-hat and tails.” p. 127

The twist (spoiler) is that he claims, on departing the building, to be Alessandro Cagliostro, the eighteenth century magician and occultist. No, me neither.

Roger Harris’s abstract design for the Cover is strikingly different from anything seen on an SF magazine of the time or before, and presumably we have Bonfiglioli’s art dealer eye to thank for it. I rather like it; the magazine looks rather smart, and very non-pulp. Harris would be the cover artist for the next three issues.
Apart from the Editorial there is no other non-fiction, but there is a one page notice about a Competition: For Professional Scientists Only. I think that the quite substantial prize would have been better used in a general competition (if you adjust a 1964 £50 for inflation, it is supposedly worth just short of a grand now7).
Finally, a few miscellaneous notes. First, the external physical appearance of this magazine is different from that of New Worlds #142 (which Roberts & Vinter had published a month earlier). Rather than the flimsy, coated (shiny) cover #142 had, this issue has a slightly stiffer, matt finish one, presumably a cost-saving measure. I’d also note that these magazines are probably the smallest A-format paperbacks I’ve seen.8
The inner front cover carries an advert for the Science Fiction Book Club (just like New Worlds #142) but the inner rear cover has an advert for New Worlds #143, the July-August issue, out June 24th.
Last of all, the title page has a quirky “All terrestrial characters and places are fictitious” disclaimer at the bottom:

The cover, the first of the Aldiss, and the Bonfigliloli are fairly good quality, but the rest of the issue is quite poor. My recollection is that the next issue is much worse. ●

_____________________

1. Transformations: The Story of the Science Fiction Magazines 1950-1970 by Mike Ashley, p. 237 (Amazon UK).

2. There are a number of posts by Don Wells that recall Bonfiglioli’s early military life on the blog Bonfiglioli Remembered – and other stuff.
There is one striking passage where Wells mentions the death of Bonfiglioli’s first wife:

Only once in our time together did I see Bonfig in a vulnerable moment. I suppose the hurt was still fresh in his mind. He told me his first wife Elizabeth had died in her sleep; he woke to find her dead beside him. More than once — no, many times more than once — in my 45 years of marriage, I lay quiet in bed, listening for my wife’s breathing.
Fifty years after Bonfig’s Elizabeth died, my first wife Margaret died beside me.

Bonfiglioli’s Wikipedia page is here.

3. “[Bonfiglioli] was feeling his way in the first few issues, relying heavily on bottom drawer material from Brian Aldiss.” (Ibid. p. 243)

4. I found out about Bonfiglioli’s authorship of Blast Off from John Boston’s review (link above).

5. Potts was a two-shot writer: he previously had a story, The Warriors, in New Worlds #124, November 1962.

6. I’ve come to the conclusion that fiction told in the form of a stories related to a third party are probably using a chatty conversational mode to distract from the slightness of the tale.

7. I used this website for the inflation adjustment. I’m not entirely convinced.

8. Science Fantasy #65 is 109 x 178mm in size; New Worlds #142 is 107 x 180mm in size, very slightly narrower and taller (this size variation holds broadly true for the issues #66 & #143 too), making me wonder if Rugby Advertiser Ltd. had two different presses. By comparison, my Corgi edition (1965 reprint) of New Writings in SF 1 edited by John Carnell (to be reviewed here soon) is 111 x 180mm. These differences are minute, so maybe it is the thinness of the books (128 pp.) that give the impression that they are smaller. ●

Edited 8th March 2018 to add Wells passage in footnote 2.

rssrss

Leave a Reply

This site uses Akismet to reduce spam. Learn how your comment data is processed.

Astounding Science-Fiction v21n01, March 1938

ISFDB link

Editor, John W. Campbell Jr.

Something from Jupiter • novelette by Raymond Z. Gallun [as by Dow Elstar] ∗∗
Flight of the Dawn Star • short story by Robert Moore Williams
The Master Shall Not Die! • novelette by R. DeWitt Miller
Duel in the Space Lanes • short story by William C. Beckett –
Jason Sows Again (Part 1 of 2) • novella serial by Arthur J. Burks –
Wings of the Storm • short story by Manly Wade Wellman
Martyrs Don’t Mind Dying • short story by John Victor Peterson –
Vibratory • short story by Nelson Tremaine [as by Warner Van Lorne]
Flareback • short story by Kent Casey
Eye of the Past • novelette by Otto Binder [as by Eando Binder] –

Cover • by H. W. Wesso
Interior artwork • by H. W. Wesso (4), Charles Schneeman (4), Jack Binder (3), Elliott Dold, Jr. (3)
In Times to Come
Science-Fiction • editorial by John W. Campbell, Jr.
Power Plants of Tomorrow: Putting the Moon on the Job • science essay by Willy Ley
Science Discussions
Brass Tacks • letters
Heavy Elements are not Necessarily Inert • science filler

The major change this issue is a significant change of title, from Astounding Stories to Astounding Science-Fiction.1 There is an accompanying editorial, Science-Fiction, where Campbell gives his reasons for the change, before continuing with missionary zeal:

Something from Jupiter by Raymond Z. Gallun has a lot happening in its first few pages. Gregory Cross lives on an Earth suffering from an overactive sun and, meantime, has been communicating by Morse code with aliens on Jupiter, hoping to get their help. A spherical spaceship arrives and splits open to receive him. He feels compelled to enter, and is soon on his way.

After his arrival on Jupiter Cross wakes up in different chamber, and rubs the frost on the inside of the window—his skin has changed colour and the frost feels hot—and sees an alien outside. They communicate by Morse and Cross learns the Jovians have changed the biochemistry of his body so he can survive on the planet. He is taken out of the chamber and through a transparent tunnel to another part of their city:

Confronted thus by the vivid reality of the giant planet’s eternal, raging holocaust, Greg almost forgot his present position. He could see little through that blinding maelstrom, it was true; but from that little, one could still construct a mental picture that was more complete.
Wind. Lightning. Rain. Rain of liquefied ammonia, it must be. Greg could not smell its acrid pungence; but this, he decided, was natural. The sensitivity of his olfactory nerves had been changed, along with his flesh. On Earth, the water vapor in the air is almost odorless, too, as a result of human conditioning to its constant presence.
The rain thumped against the clear roof of the tunnel with the maddening roar of an avalanche. It was reddish, mucky rain, filled, no doubt, with the powdered ejecta of volcanoes. Not hot volcanoes such as existed on Earth, for Jupiter must be cold almost to the core. This vast world was composed largely of gases. The great cloud from which it had been formed, torn from the Sun by the passage of another star, had contracted slowly because of its low density.
Cold, however, does not deny the possibility of violent physical and chemical changes. On Jupiter there was still heat enough to produce tremendous explosive forces. Differences of high pressure in the vast atmosphere still could create winds that hurtled along at speeds of hundreds, even thousands of miles an hour. And deep in this planet’s solid core there was still warmth enough to change liquid ammonia to gas, creating pressure that could move masses of rock huger than the Earth. Thus Jupiter must still have belching volcanoes, erupting not molten lava and steam, but cold, speeding vapors, and the muck of silicious dust. p. 12-13

Cross doesn’t have time to contemplate the Jovian landscape for much longer, or the huge chamber the tunnel debouches into. He is taken to a spherical room, and watches a screen which shows the chamber he is in (as well as two others) take off and go to Ganymede.
When they get to the satellite, Cross sees a transformed Jovian disembark. Cross learns that Ganymede was the Jovians’ original home but, when the sun cooled ages ago, they had to change their form and go to Jupiter. When the sun resumed its former activity they could not return as they had lost the secret of the change technology—hence Cross’s presence: the study of his biology taught them what they needed to know. Cross asks if they will help Earth and, when he does not receive an answer, plots to steal their ship.
Later, Cross is taken by a Jovian for conversion back to his original form so he can disembark on Ganymede, but he escapes and hides on the ship. He destroys a robot and gains access to the control room.
He learns to fly the ship, and sets off for Earth. En route there are various struggles with another robot onboard until he is converted back to human form and put on a smaller vessel. It leaves the mother ship, which is moving too fast to land on Earth and crashes into the moon and blows it to smithereens. The rubble will end up orbit around Earth and shelter it from the sun’s heat. The story ends with a message of friendship from the Jovians.
This story is, as you can probably tell from the synopsis, a bit unlikely, but it moves along with a certain superscience verve and the aliens and the descriptions of Jupiter are quite well done.

The highlight of the issue is Flight of the Dawn Star by Robert Moore Williams.2 In this one a pair of spacemen land on a planet after accidentally passing through a warp. They leave their spaceship and see a deserted futuristic city. Later they hear voices, a find a group of people who seem like teenage youths but are in fact near-immortals.
The two spacemen try to adjust to their hosts’ pastoral existence but, when they find out one of the immortals can help them, they decide they want to return to Earth. They go to a room with a machine that simulates all the planets in the universe. After synchronizing the machine to the Earthman’s time, Nard searches for Earth but is unsuccessful. He quizzes the pair again as to the characteristics of Earth. After making an adjustment he eventually finds the Earthmen’s solar system. He then breaks the news that (spoiler) they can never go home as they are already on Earth, but a million years in the future. They have passed through a time warp, not a spatial one.
The synopsis of this probably makes it sound rather ho-hum, but it is a well-written mood piece.

The Master Shall Not Die! by R. DeWitt Miller3 starts with the eponymous Master contemplating his longevity (he has lived a thousand years), and the ennui that has begun to afflict him. We then find out that he is in charge of the world, assisted by the body of scientists under him (although limited political autonomy allowed to the populace). The reason he has to serve as the world’s Master is because a normal lifespan is too short to absorb the amount of knowledge required to run the system.
We later discover he has extended his life is by receiving complete blood transfusions from a young donor every thirty years (there is a lot of waffle about new and old blood, and associated ageing processes which was most likely nonsense at the time). The Master rejuvenates after the new blood; if the young donor receives the old blood they die.
The rest of the story concerns his interaction with Barrett Norgard, his prospective donor. The Master reveals to Norgard that, unknown to anyone else, all the other donors are in suspended animation along with jars of his old blood. The Master also reveals that he believes that he has discovered how to turn old blood into new (more gobbledygook).
Complications arise when the Master finds that the rat he has experimented on has died, and he decides he has had enough; Norgard tells him he must go on for the sake of humanity. A scuffle ensues, and the Master is knocked unconscious.

For all that the politics and science of this one are ridiculous, Miller does a good, if sometimes ponderous job of telling the story, and produces quite a good ending (spoiler: Norbert completes the Master’s rejuvenation process, potentially sacrificing himself. When the Master wakes he nonetheless decides to kill himself, but his mind is changed by a note left by Norbert telling him that he owes it to humanity to continue his search for a cure, referring to an earlier conversation about the “focal length of his mental lens”: a reference to taking the longer view. If it wasn’t for the dodgy science I would have rated this one higher.

Duel in the Space Lanes by one-shot wonder William C. Beckett is an awful story about one spaceman betraying another to aliens, and “emanations” from Jupiter. It is full of writing like this:

Thorp grasped a heavily armored cable, inserted its triple-pronged plug into a receptacle on a shining new panel above the instrument board. Plunging shut a switch, he watched as the frequency poured into the outer shell built up.
“If the equations are correct,” he mused, “the electromagnetic wave of the seventeenth octave should neutralize the emanation by interference. If it doesn’t—good-by, Theodore!” p. 62

One that escaped from the slushpile.

Next is the first half of a novella by Arthur J. Burks, Jason Sows Again.4 This story has America attacked by the “Yellow Girdle”, an unnamed Asian country. Fifty million soldiers launch a surprise attack in the American continent:

They struck like thunderbolts of doom on a certain morning never to be forgotten. Monsters rose from the deep off the West Coast of North America, over against San Diego, and San Francisco, Portland, Seattle, Vancouver—nor did the enemy care for a single instant that the attack on Vancouver automatically forced Great Britain into the holocaust. They gave no thought to Great Britain at all, for world conquest was their goal, and they would swallow all nations as they declared war, or whether they did or not.
Great shells smashed into the coast cities. Sounds so great and dreadful the mind of man could not believe them—sounds which drove the hearers instantly mad, so that they turned on one another and fought like dogs in the streets, until the vast projectiles fell among them, leaving only piles of bloody human clay where the mad ones had fought. p. 65-66

There are several pages of this generalised destruction to start (and many more throughout the story, all described in a portentous and distant third person voice) before a twenty-five-year-old becomes a four star general and asks for a miracle from his Rockies redoubt.
The miracle appears in the form of Jarl Harvey:

Yet there would be a miracle, at that. It was even now moving up the mountainside, in the shape of a man with a small black box in his arms—a thing that looked like a camera.
But his hand, both of his hands, were hideous, for they had no fingers. And he must have been a man of great courage, for he tottered along on the stubs of his ankles, because his feet were gone.
And he couldn’t see where he was going, because his eye-sockets were empty.
Yet this caricature, this horror of a man, was the miracle for which a nation prayed— p. 70

This unlikely figure eventually manages to get to the Rockies stronghold (even more unlikely) with his superweapon. When they arrive the soldiers who rescued him leave him with his box—although they haven’t ascertained what the device is—and happily send for the General to speak with him. Jarl writes out his messages in the sand using his stump (his tongue is missing as well).

“The box must be guarded with all our lives until I have done my work! It is our salvation! It means defeat for the enemy!”
[. . .]
Maybe I am your miracle. There is a way to find out. I must have a room to myself, immediately. I must have a box of any size, so long as it is bigger than six by three, and deeper than two feet, inside that room. The box must contain ration components—300 pounds in all—in any form obtainable—meats, metals, condiments—and must be made radioactive. Your chemists will know. And hold the enemy at all costs until I am ready. p. 76-77

The General tells his men to hop to it. To cut a long story short, the box creates a healthy copy of Jarl, who then organises a demonstration for the General—just as the Yellow Girdle launch an attack on the Rockies. The General points out the flaw in Jarl’s plan: to make a million equipped men would take 300 million pounds of raw material! Which they don’t have.
This is pretty awful, but is of minor interest for its depiction of total war. I assume at the time there was a fear of something much worse than WWI occurring if the world fell into conflict again (due to technological developments, and what was seen in the Spanish Civil War, etc.).

Wings of the Storm by Manly Wade Wellman5 starts with an elderly science teacher reading something in a child’s essay that catches his attention:

“Many scientists believe that the smallest of the insects, such as the ants, are not aware of human beings near them. Human beings appear too big for ants to see or understand; they are like big shadows on the sky. When we step on an ant hill, it is like a hurricane to them, only harder for them to understand than for us to understand a hurricane.” p.88

He initially dismisses this out of hand, but later the thought returns and he speculates that there may be a huge creature that causes storms and hurricanes. Before much longer he is experimenting with a substance that will increase his size (both H. G. Wells and Ray Cummings are explicitly referenced at this point) and he transforms himself into a two hundred mile high being:

He gazed down at himself, and saw his naked body as it had always been, but misty, as though glimpsed through a light cloud of smoke. His hand, for instance, was recognizable in every crook and knob—but its nails had no clarity of outline. When he touched his face, the tag of moustache felt artificial and amorphous, like a single piece of fabric instead of a close-grown strip of separate hairs. p. 93

When he nears the hurricane he sees the massive creature:

What hovered between him and South America?
Mogollon’s first sensation was of looking an elephant in the face. There was a gray expanse that might have been the front of a smooth skull, with an earlike flap stirring gently to either side and a trailing proboscis at the bottom. Patently it was three-dimensional, and patently it was alive. Its bulk was as great as his own or even greater and—relatively speaking—it was as close as though on the opposite side of a wideish street. Mogollon narrowed his faulty eyes for a better view, and made out that the head had no body, was in fact a body in itself. What he had seen as ears were wings, or served as such. Wings of the storm—the hymn had been right about it! And the trunk was rather a neck or throat, as thick at the base as his calf and rather smaller at the tip than his wrist. p. 94

Battle commences.
If you can swallow both these unlikely ideas—the science teacher’s size change and the hurricane monster—there is some entertainment here.
A year or so later a story of this type would have appeared in Unknown.

Martyrs Don’t Mind Dying by John Victor Peterson is a breathless melodrama about a time-traveller called Duhamel, who vanishes in front of the worldwide viewing public and never returns. Several imitators come to grisly ends and further experimentation is banned.
The story picks up with one of the students of Duhamel, Bara Lowndi (and sister of one of the failed travellers who died a particularly grisly death, legs left behind, etc.), who has built another machine. She and her boyfriend Russ are arguing about the risk to her life when he is called by an assistant who tells him a metal capsule has been found among fossils near the site of Duhamel’s first attempt.
Russ jets over and telepathically receives the combination (never explained) to the capsule. Inside there is a note written in blood stating (spoiler) that he will return to Bara’s lab, argue with her, lose his mind, and shoot her in the head. He will then go back in time, meet Duhamel, and bash in his skull while being shot in the lung.
Russ jets back to Bara’s lab and it looks like this scenario will melodramatically play out:

But the madness—the stark, chilling insanity—had conquered whatever there was of culture, refinement, and decency within him. He thrust her savagely from him. She struck against a sharp edge of the helix and he laughed jerkily at the cry of pain that came from her lips.
“You can’t!” he screamed. “Can’t—wrong, utterly wrong! Time message—must kill—kill—” His pupils were dilated; he clawed the gun from its holster, aimed it at her white, terrified face—“KILL!” p. 195

The assistant who discovered the capsule intervenes, however. He is the aged Duhamel and provides a ‘many worlds’ explanation as to how he managed to change the course of history in this one timestream.
Another slush pile effort.

Vibratory by Nelson Tremaine6 starts with yet another loner scientist, this one a professor who has created what appears a technologically advanced organ capable of producing very specific frequencies. Having discovered how to “duplicate the vibrational chord of any object by mechanical means” he moves it to a deserted factory to experiment further and, during one of the testing sessions, one of the supporting beams of the factory disappears. He goes to inspect the area:

There was a hole in the foundation, as well as in the ceiling overhead. It was curved like a bowl and sunk about six feet below the surrounding level. The vibration in the pillar affected everything around it for a certain distance. The size of both openings were identical.
As his gaze wandered up through the opening, he saw the blunt end of the hissing steel beam hanging from the second-story ceiling. It appeared as if it had been sheared off about the same distance above the top of the pillar in the first story as the depth of the opening in the foundation. There was vague unreality about the missing section, almost as if the empty space between the two openings was cloudy. As Ernest bent forward to peer closer at the hole in the floor, his head hit something solid!
It threw him off his feet, as if he had been shoved back by some fast-moving object! His forehead was burned where it had made contact, and for a moment he couldn’t see. p. 126

When his vision clears he can see that the beam is beginning to rematerialise and he sees there is a living creature in the pillar. He falls into unconsciousness. When he comes to he sees the creature is trapped:

In the vibrational state the creature must have been more solid than the steel of the support. When the steel returned to the present form, by the elimination of vibration, the creature had come with it—and was alive in the pillar!
It was covered with thick hair, of a bronze hue, and wore no sign of clothing. He might have been an ape of the jungle, except that his hands were enormous—with twelve fingers on the one which was free of the pillar. His foot had nine digits.
His arm and leg seemed to be of about the same length, and were both long in proportion to his body. But his general proportions were similar to those of a man. He would stand about nine feet tall, and weigh about three hundred and fifty pounds.
The light was poor, but Ernest was able to see that his face was smooth and very pink. Suddenly he realized that he was watching an intelligent creature. The thing was motioning for aid to escape from the imprisoning metal! p. 127-8

The last section (spoiler) has the professor bond with the creature (he builds a structure to support it while he works out how to release it, feeds it, etc.). He then fires up the machine again after leaving notes to say that he is off to the creature’s world to support it in its recovery, and that his machine should not be used again until he returns, etc.
The last half of this is the best of what is still a pretty creaky story (this is largely due to the dated ‘lone inventor’ and ‘weird made-up science’ vibes) and it takes a long time getting there.

Flareback by Kent Casey7 is the first of four ‘Dr von Theil and Sgt John West’ stories. This origin story does not get off to a promising start with West, a college graduate and spaceman doing some pulp grumbling to himself:

“Just a space bum, that’s what I am. And now that the lanes are closed for duration of the war even bums like me can’t roam around. Free lance, huh! ‘Aye, aye, Sir! Sergeant West reporting for orderly duty, Sir!’ Phooey! I can’t even get to the front, but have to stick around here running errands for Colonel Brumby, the old Miss Nancy! Sit here twiddling my thumbs and opening doors for whiskery little goats like that Dutchman who just came in. I’ll bet I have to convoy him safe home and make sure no big, bad Uranians bite him after he’s through chewing the fat with the Colonel. Wotta life, wotta life!” p. 133

The Dutchman turns out to be Professor von Thiel, and West’s colonel tells him to take him out in a ship and to obey his orders. The rest of the story (spoiler) has them vaporise an asteroid with an experimental device, and then go to a station on Mars to repair some minor damage to their ship. While they are on the planet a Uranian ship lands and steals the professor’s device. West is knocked out during the first skirmish with the Uranians and, when he comes to, Von Theil freely admits that he knew the Uranians followed them to Mars. Just as West is about to rough him up, the Uranians attempt to use the weapon on the pair but destroy their own ship instead—as the professor expected.
This isn’t a particularly good story, but there are promising signs: there are passages of this that are quite lucid and concise (the explanation of how the device works mentions Dirac, and the creation of electron-positron pairs from space—but see footnote 7) and there is an attempt at some complexity of plot. The ‘buddy’ relationship works reasonably well, too.

Eye of the Past by Otto Binder is the sixth or seventh story in the issue that has a lone inventor or scientist at the centre of it. This one starts with a prologue that details a twenty year war on Earth that is so devastating that Earth becomes a pacifist world. Then, of course, the aliens arrive and start razing all the major cities of Earth to the ground.
Cut to our inventor, who is working on a machine to examine the insides of atoms to see into the past:

The young scientist’s voice became a sharp hiss. “Within the atoms of all the matter around us lie the records of the past, in the form of ether vibrations. An instrument that can reach down within the atom and translate those vibrations into visible light waves would make the past an open book. In plain words—television of the past!”
Tanya, womanlike, tried to hide the deep admiration in her eyes as she looked at the man she loved.

He eventually tracks down the inventor of an atomic ray device that was destroyed, along with the creator’s notes, after the twenty year war. Earth is saved.
This is very poor, and I was surprised that this came from the writer who would produce I, Robot (Amazing Stories, January 1939) less than a year later.

The Cover by H. W. Wesso, illustrates Gallun’s story Something from Jupiter. He also provides some of the Interior artwork along with Schneeman, Binder and Dold. Schneeman and Dold provide the best of the illustrations for my money; Binder’s aren’t of the same quality as the other three and look quite dated.
In Times to Come is, initially, In Times Present, as it starts by mentioning that the Burks’ serial in this issue arrived so late they couldn’t announce it last issue. After that there is mention of a couple of science articles before the big news:

Jack Williamson has submitted an outline for a story to be called “The Legion of Probability.” It isn’t finished, and I can’t be certain until it is— but I think Williamson is going to be the author of our first new-concept mutant story. He’s a corking good author under any circumstances, but he has a completely new concept to work on, and I’m expecting another, really great serial from him. p. 4

Power Plants of Tomorrow: Putting the Moon on the Job by Willy Ley is a fairly dull piece about using the seas as an alternative power source (tidal, temperature differential, etc.). It could do with more illustrations.
Science Discussions8 leads off with a letter from ‘Arthur McCann’ (Campbell’s science writer pseudonym) about lightweight magnesium alloys. The others are a decidedly cranky bunch (cranky-eccentric rather than the usual cranky-irritable) that includes stuff like this from George Trott, Bronx, NYC:

Anthropologists do know that homo-sapiens have advanced very little if at all in the past five or six thousand years. So you can imagine how long it must have taken to evolve up to then. I am of the opinion that the Bible was not so far wrong in its story of the creation of man, that is, in so far as the length of time it took to form mankind. Let me explain myself; today, scientists are experimenting with the mutation of species, which mostly consists of subjecting the eggs or female lower forms of life to X-rays, ultraviolet rays, radium rays, etc. The offspring of the parents in many cases are totally different species. p. 114

In Brass Tacks a number of the letters address Campbell by name, including one from Mark Reinsberg, Chicago, Illinois, who says this about the January issue in the first of his two letters:

The magazine shows the influence of its new editor a mile away.

With this kind of comment, and various other mentions of the new editor, it’s hard to see how you could say, as some do, that this is Campbell’s ‘first’ issue. There are various story comments: Fearn’s Red Heritage gets a number of positive mentions, likewise Van Lorne’s (Nelson Tremain’s) Ormoly of Roonerion.
Heavy Elements are not Necessarily Inert9 is a half-page filler that starts off with some facts about uranium (denser than lead, reacts with water, etc.) before mentioning other metallic elements.

A mediocre issue with a lot of pulp filler. ●

_____________________

1. Alexi & Cory Panshin’s The World Beyond the Hill (Chapter 12) (Amazon UK; ebook on iTunes) has this comment about the title change:

It was Campbell’s intention to gradually shift the name of the magazine from Astounding (which he didn’t much care for, perhaps thinking it imitative of Amazing—which, we may remember, it had been) to the generic Science Fiction. He would be forestalled when, early in 1939, one of the many new SF pulps then springing up was named Science Fiction first.
And still, Campbell had established a point. The first magazine to specifically present itself as science fiction—using those words as part of its title—was the Campbell Astounding.

In late 1946 the cover design changed (there had been previous alterations) to one that minimized the “Astounding” part of the title (and would until early 1953). This is the July 1949 cover:

The above (original image from Siren in the Night) is also an example of one of the magazine’s sober and occasional ‘fact’ covers.

2. As ever, Fantasy Commentator #59/60 by A. Langley Searles and Sam Moskowitz (recommended, and available at Lulu.com) has a number of letters from Campbell containing comments about these stories (with additional commentary from Sam Moskowitz). This is from his letter to Swisher of 11th November 1937:

“Robert Moore and Robert Moore Williams (‘Beyond That Curtain’, Thrilling Wonder Stories. December. 1937) are the same guy—and he’s sent in one that I’m taking that’s a definite try at a Don A. Stuart style. The sunuvagun positively cribbed—but did it delicately and very nicely. ‘Flight of the Dawn Star’, scheduled for February [. . .] Well told, but not new even for 1938.” p. 68

Now you know what Campbell and I thought about the stories, here is the reader vote from the first Analytical Laboratory in the May issue (bottom of page):

3. Letter from Campbell to Swisher dated 11th February 1938 (Fantasy Commentator #59/60):

“We—Astounding—are announcing to authors a new policy. Actually, strengthening an old one. Tremaine started, about 14 months ago, using more of the human interest type, definitely slanting toward human stories. The latest circulation figures show that we upped 30% in 12 months.
“We want more stories of the type of ‘The Master Shall Not Die!’ (by R. DeWitt Miller, March, 1938. This author [Moskowitz], while visiting Campbell in the Spring of 1938 was challenged to name one story in the entire history of science fiction better than Millers, so sold was Campbell on that story)— which I thought was darned good. I know you like heavy science, but you’ll have to part with it this time, because the readers don’t. I did notice you said it was an ‘impressive’ story, but gave it a blue rather than a gold. What was your reaction to the yarn? Why did it not merit a gold? (Despite Campbell’s personal promotion of that story it was never anthologized. Its scientific premise, that a complete change of the blood from a young man to that of an old man could renew youth was known to be false at the time the story was written, but possibly not to Campbell.) p. 81

The novelette was later expanded, in collaboration with Anna Hunger, to a 38,000 word novella that was half of Ace Double D-162 (the other half was Jerry Sohl’s The Mars Monopoly):

P. Schyuler Miller had this to say about it in Astounding (November 1956):

This is about the low point in the series of double novels that have been coming from Ace recently. “The Mars Monopoly” is a western transplanted to the future and to Mars, with villainous industrialists, heroic asteroid miners, misunderstood natives, and a least-suspected bad man. The Miller-Hunger effort is just another story about someone who keeps on living for the good of mankind, even though he has to slaughter a long series of young stalwarts to do it. I’m growing allergic to books in which the chief character is The Master. I’ll have to write one myself, to take the curse off and get a fresh point of view . . .

Anthony Boucher had this in F&SF (August 1955):

D-162 is easy to skip: THE MAN WHO LIVED FOREVER, by R. DeWitt Miller and Anna Hunger, is a mildly amusing romantic melodrama of 3097 with no relation to science fiction, and Jerry Sohl’s THE MARS MONOPOLY IS the ultimate example of labeling a routine western as s.f. because it is set on Mars. p. 108

The novella is available on Amazon. I’m not sure how many they are likely to have sold given the sample they send out has the complete text.

4. Letter from Campbell to Swisher dated 16th December 1937 (Fantasy Commentator #59/60):

“A week ago Friday, I gave Arthur Burks the idea of a duplicator machine to duplicate the enemy General and so cause confusion. Told him we needed a two-part serial. Monday morning—three days—or daze—later, he brought in ‘Jason Sows Again’, a very acceptable action story based on that, 30,000 words long. He hadn’t fixed it so it’d divide and hold interest, as I told him, in a letter sent Monday. Tuesday afternoon he showed up, said he’d rewrite parts. Wednesday, he brought it in. Thursday, we paid him $450 for the finished, nicely-done yarn. He sorta pounds ‘em out, kinda. But it’s a good enough yarn, with at least a different slant on the duplication idea. And—Arthur Burks’ name on the magazine means something to the regular readers—because they’ve praised him quite a bit—and it means a lot to people who never read Astounding. Furthermore, for those readers it (the story) will be satisfying, because it is almost wholly straight adventure, with a rather weird twist, and a logical solution to a problem raised at the end of the first half. p. 75

5. Letter from Campbell to Swisher dated 7th February 1938 (Fantasy Commentator #59/60):

“Personally, I’d give ‘Wings of the Storm’ a blue for being nicely handled, and considered as a pure fantasy.

6. Letter from Campbell to Swisher dated 7th February 1938 (Fantasy Commentator #59/60):

“‘Vibratory’ was, I agree, very pinkish (by Warner Van Lorne, March, 1938). But ye Gods, they just don’t send in enough blue stuff. It just makes me blue. We accept about one in 10 to 15—but we gotta fill the mag. I’d like to make the issues all outa stuff like ‘The Master Shall Not Die,’ ‘Flareback,’ etc., but there isn’t that much. If I culled the stuff submitted for six months, picking all the blues submitted for one issue. I’d have one super issue, and a bunch of tripe issues. I was lucky this time to get near half a point above average.

7. Letter from Campbell to Swisher dated 7th February 1938 (Fantasy Commentator #59/60):

“I hadn’t thought of the positron aspect for ‘Flareback’ and the [Nat Schachner] announcement. It (Kent Casey) is NOT Nat, however. The author is actually Capt. Kenneth Casey McIntosh, USN. retired of New Orleans. We have four yarns on hand—bought two—and they’re all blues. He’s got style, and his latest one, ‘Good Old Brig!’ shows definitely that Nat could never have been the author. He’s got a space-navy scene that could have been written only by a military man. McIntosh has been writing for Atlantic. North American Review, and similar mags, plus some for the Navy magazine. He’s got a son at Michigan who’s supplying the science background. Son slips sometimes; he did in ‘Flareback,’ wherefore I went over it with some changes and modifications. Agreed that other energy forms could have done the same. I still think positrons make it somewhat more interesting.”

. . . and more from a letter dated 28th February 1938 (Fantasy Commentator #59/60):

“You might be interested to know how the check chart (March, 1938 issue) stands. ‘Flashback’ by Kent Casey stands two points in the lead of ‘The Master Shall Not Die!’ which leads its nearest competitor, ‘Wings of the Storm’ by five checks. “But ‘Flashback’ fascinates me. That’s a first story of an absolute unknown, and everybody is piling on the bandwagon. ‘Duel in the Space Lanes’ (by William C. Beckett, March, 1938) which is almost the same plot, when you come to it, is getting as many goose-eggs as checks. But Casey’s yarn is going over stronger than any other first-time story we’ve published in 18 months.”
[. . .]
(The positron material, taken from Swisher’s article, was actually written in by Campbell, which probably influenced his enthusiasm for the story.) p. 82

I think the writer’s name is actually Kenneth Chafee McIntosh. There is a list of other (non-fiction) work at unz.com. His ISFDB page is here.

8. Letter from Campbell to Swisher dated 7th February 1938 (Fantasy Commentator #59/60):

“The letter department got shifted to the middle of the mag (March, 1938) because the advertising section was too darn long. I couldn’t get enough material to fill all those half-pages, and I had to run a story back
there. Thus, I had to put the letters in the middle. The front wouldn’t do— that’s much too valuable for display purposes (though Thrilling Wonder Stories used to break up the front of their book with reader’s columns).

9. Letter from Campbell to Swisher dated 14th January 1938 (Fantasy Commentator #59/60):

“Due to the impositions of the advertising department. I had a swell time making the March (1938) issue fit together. I had to do some trickiness, which may be noticeable to the practiced reader. Including the writing of a filler (“Heavy Elements are not Necessarily Inert’). Astounding hadn’t used fillers for a long time, but I had to this time. I may go so far as to reinstitute them. You know, brief paragraphs of supposed-to-be-interesting material.
[. . .]
The present example of the ‘genus fillersis’ concerns the non-inertness of heavy metals. Witnesses called: uranium, radium, tungsten, etc. Also iridium is much more inert than the familiarly inert platinum. These facts introduced in the hope that authors will cease from pulling the unnecessary type of boner indulged in by (Jack) Williamson in ‘Galactic Circle’, (Astounding Stories, August, 1935), where they ate off of U plates.” p. 76

Edited 15th March 2018 to add Analytical Laboratory results (footnote 2). ●

rssrss

Leave a Reply

This site uses Akismet to reduce spam. Learn how your comment data is processed.

The Magazine of Fantasy & Science Fiction #734, November-December 2017

ISFDB link

Other reviews:
Greg Hullender and Eric Wong, Rocket Stack Rank
C. D. Lewis, Tangent Online
John D. Loyd, There Ain’t No Such Thing As A Free Lunch
Patrick Mahon, SF Crowsnest
Sam Tomaino, SF Revu
Various, Goodreads

Editor, C. C. Finlay

Fiction:
Attachments • novelette by Kate Wilhelm ∗∗∗
Carbo • novelette by Nick Wolven
Big Girl • short story by Meg Elison +
Stillborne • novella by Marc Laidlaw
By the Red Giant’s Light • short story by Larry Niven
Marley and Marley • short story by J. R. Dawson
Water God’s Dog • novelette by R. S. Benedict
Racing the Rings of Saturn • novelette by Ingrid Garcia
Whatever Comes After Calcutta • novelette by David Erik Nelson

Non-fiction:
Attachments • cover by Kent Bash
Down at the Goblin Boutique • poem by John W. Sexton
Books to Look For • by Charles de Lint
Musing on Books • by Michelle West
Cartoons • by Danny Shanahan, Bill Long, Nick Downes, S. Harris, Arthur Masear
The Science of Invisibility • by Pat Murphy and Paul Doherty
It’s a Wrap • film review by David J. Skal
F&SF Competition #94: “Explain a Plot Badly”
F&SF Competition #95: “Titles the Rearrange”

Coming Attractions
Index to Volumes 132 & 133
Curiosities: A Christmas Garland by Max Beerbohm (1912)
• review by David Langford

Attachments by Kate Wilhelm is a traditional ghost story about an American woman visiting Britain. While she is visiting an old ruin with a friend, two ghosts attach themselves to her. Back in America one of them explains their different agendas:

He stood up, removed his hat, and bowed slightly to me. “Let me introduce us. I am Major Timothy S. Fitzpatrick. I succumbed to a heart attack on October eight, in nineteen aught one when I was seventy years of age. This person is Robert Moleno, who died in nineteen fifty-five when he was twenty-five years of age. And I repeat, we mean you no harm. But we do require your assistance.”
“I didn’t just die,” Robert said. “I was fucking murdered. Wade Orso killed me.”
“You started it,” the major said. “You pushed him; he pushed back and you fell down the stairs and struck your head. It was entirely your fault.”
Robert clenched his fists. I could see the knife under one of them. “Then he took Alice away. Making googly eyes at her, holding her hand up a little step, teaching her French, and she let him. She was my girl and she let him.” He looked murderous, glaring at the major, who ignored his malevolent gaze.
Robert turned to face me, a little more transparent than just a minute before, as if he were dissolving. “We were going to spend a couple of months riding our bikes, England, France, even Italy, and Wade butted in, invited himself along. Hot to trot with Alice. But she was my girl. You’re going to help me find her, teach her a lesson.”
“That’s all he can think of,” the major said. “Brutish revenge on a woman who is in her eighties if she’s alive.”
“She’s alive,” Robert muttered. “And she needs to be taught a lesson. Fucking bitch.” p. 14

Fitzpatrick, meanwhile, needs a fortune dug up, and her help in liberating the other ghosts from the ruin. The rest of the story plays out entertainingly, with a stalker ex-husband in the mix. If there is one weakness it is (spoiler) the ending, where the remaining ghosts easily attach themselves to the cows driven through the ruin, after which they disappear. Why wouldn’t they have done that with the visitors over the years?
Oh, and in nitpicker’s corner:

According to the dashboard information panel, it was seventy-six degrees outside. p. 10

Unlikely. I haven’t been in a car in the UK that has had a Fahrenheit rather than Celsius display in years.
Carbo by Nick Wolven concerns a different kind of haunting: Jim’s AI-controlled car is hacked by a friend and later starts acting like an automotive sleazeball, informed as it is by the owner’s internet porn history:

I sat in the passenger seat, waving at the mapping interface, which as usual had become a geography of obscenities. Two hundred strip clubs were within driving distance. It was almost lunchtime, and there were three Hooters knock-offs nearby, and unless I shouted my override, Carbo would take the liberty of swinging by. Lingerie stores, modeling pageants, art galleries…if there was a naked lady within fifty miles, or a chance of looking at a naked lady, or even a chance of standing near a scantily clad mannequin, my car wanted to drive to it.
I couldn’t stop it. I could hardly control it. If I didn’t exercise constant diligence, Carbo would have turned my entire day into a round of lubricious possibilities. It wasn’t just the route-finder. Sexy commercials played while I drove. Carbo slowed down for salacious billboards. He insisted on photosnapping titillating attractions and filing them away for later review. p. 51-52

After various incidents (including what seems like a completely random trip to Mexico, which ends up with Jim and his friend being offered a radio pulse cannon by some dodgy dudes) his mother helps him purge the cars programming.
I didn’t like anything about this story: the narrative is rambling and baggy; it is unconvincing; the narrator’s porn consuming behaviour is puerile; and, finally, the idea of getting your AI-expert mother to sort the problem made my skin crawl. I have no idea what this tone-deaf piece is doing in the magazine.
Big Girl by Meg Elison starts with a great hook:

The girl woke up with a sore neck and three seagulls perched on her eyelashes. As her eyes fluttered open, the startled gulls flapped away. They squawked in alarm, but continued on in the gray predawn light.
She shook her head a little, still not fully awake. She blinked a few times, and the men on the fishing boat saw a chunk of yellow sleep-crust the size of a bike tire fall from her eye and splash in the water beside them. As she stepped into the water, the boat rocked as if it were passing through the wake of a much larger ship. She blundered forward, slipping and falling to her knees. The impact registered as a 3.1 on a nearby seismograph, and the wave pushed the boat out to the end of its anchor chain. p. 67

The story continues with various print and social media commentary:

SFGate.com Reports are coming in that a huge inflatable sex doll has been spotted floating near the Richmond Bridge. Tweet sightings or pics to @SFGate. p. 67

@3librasalad: hey @USCG is approaching #baybe right now. Image: a U.S. Coast Guard vessel pulls in front of a light-brown calf, kneecap visible above ship’s antennas.
@USCG: All vessels and individuals steer clear of #baybe phenomenon until further notice. We are assessing the safety of the situation.
@SFExaminer: The #baybe is a real girl! Sources have identified Bianca Martinez of East Oakland, age 15. sfexnews/1gt5hjY p. 67

. . . and at one point there is even a piece of internet amateur porn fiction.
Her continuing growth and the oppressive media scrutiny cause her to wade out to sea and she eventually takes refuge on a deserted island. The (spoiler) tragic ending has her eventually shrink back to her normal size and then, ultimately, to nothing.
Apart from being a story about “women never being the right size,” it is equally an acid look at the response of the internet and media to these kind of phenomena, and her objectification by society and the establishment.
I imagine we’ll be seeing this one in the ‘Best of the Year’ anthologies.
Stillborne by Marc Laidlaw is the ninth entry in his ‘Gorlen Vizenfirthe’ series.1 One of Gorlen’s hand has been replaced with “the stone paw of a gargoyle named Spar, who is reciprocally afflicted,” and they are both searching for the mage who did the exchange.
The story opens with a desert caravan which has on it a new series character called Plenth. She is a bard like Gorlen, and is heading to a once in seven years pilgrimage to see the hatching of the Prophet Moths. En route the caravan comes upon Spar and Gorlen, who seem as if they are slowly being devoured by clouds of insects. Sister Quills is ordered into action by the Abbess, and she disperses the insects with fumigant. Later, as Sister Quills is attending to their wounds, she offers some unsolicited advice to Gorlen:

“You’re lucky you stepped on that gnaggot nest in daylight, when most of ’em are out gathering carrion. At dusk, you’d have had ’em in your mouth and throat. They taste all right, a few at a time, but in such numbers they make breathing difficult.”
“It never entered my mind to eat my way through the swarm!”
“Might give it a try next time,” she said with a shrug. p. 102

The stories in the series have occasional humour.
Gorlen and Spar join the caravan, and it becomes clear that Plenth is the young woman mentioned repeatedly in the earlier series stories, the one whose virginity Gorlen took years ago, thus stymieing the plans of priest who subsequently punished him by performing the exchange of hands. The rest of the story has two strands: the first is the pilgrimage to the Prophet Moths, and the second is Gorlen and Spar’s backstory.
After they arrive at the pilgrimage site Spar eventually realises that the Prophet Moths are slowly being wiped out by the massive numbers of people who are now flocking to see the moths hatch. The eggs the moths lay in the roots of giant cacti are used by the local businessmen to produce an alcoholic, euphoric drink for the pilgrims called shu’ulk-ilk; this aids the pilgrims’ desire for visions or physical healing during the moths’ flight. Spar manages to communicate the danger to the moths after the first night of their hatching: the latter is a lacklustre event that ends in the first few that fly failing to mate and dying.
The other strand will be of much interest to those that have been following the series as it consists of several flashbacks that focus on Spar’s role in Gorlen’s past, beginning with what happened the night where Gorlen and Spar’s fingers were exchanged. We also learn about the threat that Gorlen was dispatched to defeat:

Spar’s vigil through the second half of the night was held atop the temple’s highest tower. From here, he watched the whole of Nardath spread out sparkling like a rumpled quilt set with dark gems; but what always drew his eye in the small hours were the stars and constellations, which gyred all night about the central void known as the Crypt. That starless region was steady and unmoving; long had it offered steadfast guidance to sailors at sea, to wanderers of the plains. But this permanent fixture of the night had lately begun to expand, to creep. The stars at its edges had snuffed out as if a pall were spreading. None knew its cause. Few worried. Spar supposed that it, like most cosmic phenomena, had nothing to do with him. But on that night, it became central to his life…as did Plenth and Gorlen. p. 110

Goren learns of the menace later on:

The priest raised his own untouched, original finger to the heavens, pointing out the Crypt. “It spreads,” he says. “It is contagious. A Darkness from the deep of space comes nigh. He’s found a mistress here on Ique, and in order to claim her as his bride, he must extinguish every star, and finally our own sun. You must prevent this consummation. You must disappoint his bride. You must send that great lord back into the Crypt, or else our world will die in darkness, devoured by the spawn of their unhealthy union. They are filling black jars with their ilk already, like caviar that only await the wedding day to hatch.” p. 113

There are then a number of episodes where Spar watches Gorlen and Plenth together as the former goes about his task of vanquishing the Crypt but, exasperatingly, this is sketchily developed and perfunctorily resolved for such a major story arc (spoiler: Gorlen essentially sleeps with the Crypt’s would-be bride).
After both these story arcs have played out (spoiler) most of the pilgrims are dead, the moths are saved, and the three of them decide to go to the wood that is home to Spar’s dryad lover from Songwood (F&SF, January-February 2010). Plenth is pregnant (earlier in the story she reveals that she has been pregnant for over a decade with what appears to be both Gorlen’s and Spar’s child). It seems the quest for the wizard is, for the moment, over.
While I enjoyed this I don’t think the novella is a satisfying whole. The flashback episodes should have been a separate origin story, preferably one that provides a convincing narrative arc for those events. The pilgrimage story could stay the same, with possibly more of a subplot about Plenth’s pregnancy, perhaps tying it to the reproductive trials of the moths.
By the Red Giant’s Light by Larry Niven concerns a near-immortal human on Pluto in the far future. There is an asteroid heading towards the planet, so she tries to co-opt a robot that is on an observation mission to help her alter the course of an asteroid. However, the robot thinks its mission to watch Mercury flying through the photosphere of Earth’s now red-giant sun is more important.
This is a lucid and economical tale (and one I would have used to lead off the issue) and a welcome return from the well-known SF writer.
Marley and Marley by J. R. Dawson is an interesting addition to the ‘go back and meet yourself when you are younger’ time-travel sub-genre. In this case it involves a 28-year-old woman going back in time to foster her orphaned 12-year-old self. The woman is under strict instructions not to do or communicate anything that will change the course of history but under the onslaught of her 12-year-old self, and the aftermath of her husband’s recent death, she eventually begins to wonder about whether it is possible to influence events without the Time Law Department noticing.
All the above notwithstanding the story is not really plot driven, and is more of a slow-burn meditation (perhaps too much so) on what our younger selves would think of the lives of their elders, and how the latter should perhaps be as intolerant of the outcome as the former.
Water God’s Dog by R. S. Benedict is a fantastical tale of a priest who serves a water god called Ganba in a society that is starved of water. The only way to fill one’s cistern is to make offerings at the god’s altar. Ganba tells the priest to gather three items for him: the first two are a knife and a strip of ox hide; the third turns out, after some searching, to be a boy. The priest takes all three to the temple where they find a young woman making an offering:

Waterskin woman drapes a length of fine cloth across Ganba’s altar. Even at a bit of a distance, I can see her work is beautiful: threads of blue and gold woven together to depict Him blessing our fields with water and seeds in planting season.
But He is not impressed.
He accepts her offering. Stone splits, swallows her cloth. Water trickles down Etemenkigal’s slope, down through a maze of canals and pipes, down to her cistern. But it’s hardly more than a mouthful, barely enough to fill a drinking-jug.
Still, she kneels and thanks Our Lord, and waits until she’s a good distance away from His altar before she lets herself frown. Then she sees me.
“Ur-Ena!” she cries. “Can you tell me what was wrong with my offering? You saw it. It was good cloth, wasn’t it? Ganba used to love my weaving. I don’t understand it.”
God tells me nothing. Still I say, “Your design was beautiful, but it might come across as begging. You shouldn’t look desperate.”
“But I am desperate,” she replies. “My cistern is drying up. My children are thirsty.”
“Yet you still have a household, and a cistern, and children,” I remind her. “Many people don’t. Be grateful.”
Before she goes, waterskin woman bows, barely bending her waist. No wonder Ganba dislikes her. No respect. May her cistern fill with mud. p. 193

After this, the priest and the boy are taken by Ganba down into the depths of the temple and pass through a series of gates. Each chamber is different: the first holds all the offerings given at the altar above; the penultimate one has a huge lake. They eventually end up in front of Ganba and his two servants, and the boy undergoes a weird ritual.
The story has an ending that doesn’t really match up to what has gone before (spoiler)—the elderly priest goes back to the surface but no longer hears the voice of his god anymore; the boy reappears, and it initially appears as if he is the priest’s replacement. Instead, he gathers men to dig a shaft down to the lake, to free his people from Ganba. Probably best read for the journey and not the arrival.
Racing the Rings of Saturn by Ingrid Garcia is a debut story that is, for the greater part of its length, about a race round one of the rings of Saturn. It focuses on a racer called Tsarki and a rival called Smouck. The sub-plot is about a planned uprising against the rulers of Jupiter and their puppets on Titan. These strands come together at the end.
This one didn’t entirely grab me. In parts it attempts a Zelaznyesque swagger but comes over more like a brash comic book (at one point the hemaphrodite (?) resistance leader strips off and makes a victory speech in the nude—no particular reason is given); also, the detail about the race either doesn’t entirely convince (the ring-dwellers’ predictive software) or makes it sound rather boring (but then again, I have a dislike for Formula One racing). This all makes it sound much worse than it is; it isn’t, but this racer is only firing on three cylinders. Compare and contrast with the Niven story.
Whatever Comes After Calcutta by David Erik Nelson has an unusual beginning where the central character, a public defender called Lyle Morimoto, discovers his wife in bed with a police detective (“Good Cop”). At which point his wife shoots him in the head. Although this doesn’t kill him, he has a bullet crease in his cheek and an ear hanging off. As he lies on the floor, and before he passes out, he hears them planning to go to a cottage the couple own. Once he regains consciousness he superglues his ear to his head and decides to follow them. He is not particularly annoyed about any of this but thinks that events merit an explanation.
Things get weirder. While he is on the road he sees a woman in the process of being hanged from a tree. Morimoto stops his car and rushes to pull her down. He proceeds to slacken the network cable from around her neck:

He finally got the knot to budge a single gasping inch, and then another, and then they were yanking the cord freely. She immediately rolled over and crawled blindly away on elbow and knees, hacking and grinding like an engine full of sand, one arm still bound. Lyle had a single panting moment to notice how clean the soles of the woman’s feet were, soft and seashell pink as a toddler’s, before he heard a throat clearing behind him.
“Pardon me?” someone asked. “No offense or nothing, but what the heck do you think you’re doing?”
Lyle rose slowly, sliding his hand into his jacket pocket as he did so, finding his pistol and the “Good Cop’s” badge. The owner of the twang was clear-eyed and amiable. He wore a filthy mesh-backed Marlboro cap and a similarly grimy work jacket, the cuffs black and chewed up from long years spent elbow-deep in engines. EARL was embroidered over his heart in red floss.
There was a crowd of very surprised people behind Earl, standing or sitting in lawn chairs shaded by the collapsing barn. To Lyle’s eye, they were prototypical rural Ohio: white people, men and women, mostly dressed like they’d just got off from work, mechanics and Subway sandwich girls and schoolteachers and farmers. There were even a few kids, seated cross-legged on a wide, flat board to keep their pants clean.
The youngest looked confused by what had been — and was still — happening, but the older kids were keenly, sickeningly thrilled, both by the spectacle of the hanging of the woman and by the action-hero antics that had interrupted the show.
Lyle immediately understood how he’d managed to miss the spectators: He’d been focused on the woman fighting the strangling line in the blazing light of the sunset. They’d been sitting quietly in the barn’s deep shadow, as quiet and watchful and unobtrusive as birds on a wire. He glanced at his watch. Fewer than five minutes had passed since he’d looked up from his car radio. Behind Lyle, the woman hacked and retched, dragging her breath down her throat like a blade scraping a dry whetstone.
“You could have killed this woman,” he panted.
“Well, yeah,” Earl said. “Duh. If you hadn’t messed it up. Now we gotta start from scratch. She ain’t even a little dead.” p. 239-240

From this point on the story gets exponentially more surreal and loopy, and at points you are unsure whether this is going to turn out to be a crazed militia story (the group are heavily armed and insist they are “sovereign citizens”), a supernatural horror (they had subjected the hanging woman to a common law trial for witchcraft), or both. The last section impressively ties the Wife/“Good Cop” and Hanging Woman subplots together in an unexpected way.
I liked this as much as Nelson’s previous story here a few months ago, i.e., a lot. This is a piece of modern horror as good as anything Fritz Leiber did, and definitely one for the ‘Best of the Year’ anthologies.

The cover for Wilhelm’s story Attachments is a flat, amateurish-looking affair, not helped by the dull background. I was surprised to see it was by Kent Bash, an occasional contributor. If you lay this issue beside the last, which features Manzieri’s cover (also a portrait) the difference in quality is stark.
Down at the Goblin Boutique by John W. Sexton is quite a good poem about a coat of sand, and the potential perils of wearing it.
There are the usual Books to Look For and Musing on Books columns, and my usual moans: scattershot selection in the first, over-synopsising in the second.
The Cartoons are by Danny Shanahan, Bill Long, Nick Downes, S. Harris, and Arthur Masear. I cracked a smile at Long’s ‘Falling Rocks’ warning sign (stone gargoyles defecating from a high building), and at Danny Shanahan’s ‘Rip “Power Nap” Van Winkle’ one.
The Science of Invisibility by Pat Murphy and Paul Doherty is really an essay about human sight and not what the title suggests but, as usual, an interesting one. As ever it is full of interesting snippets:

The distribution of rods and cones in the retina explains a trick that night watchmen and astronomers use. To spot an intruder in a dark warehouse or a dim star in the night sky, they never stare directly at what they’re trying to see. Instead, they look slightly above or below the object of interest. Try this trick yourself when you are trying to see something in dim light.
When you stare at something, you are focusing its image on the fovea. In daylight, that’s great: The densely packed cones in the fovea give you a very detailed, colored view of the world. But when your cones aren’t functioning, staring directly at something you want to see is a rookie mistake. Since the fovea lacks rods, it’s virtually blind in the dark. When you look just above or below something, the image falls outside the fovea, on the periphery of the retina, where there are more rods than cones, giving you a much better view. p. 179

Sadly, the essay is followed by a short note reporting that, as the issue was being compiled, Paul Doherty passed away from complications due to cancer. A sad loss for the magazine as well as family and friends and colleagues.2
It’s a Wrap by David J. Skal reviews The Mummy movie, and gives an interesting account of Universal Studios involvement with horror over the decades.
F&SF Competition #94: “Explain a Plot Badly” has the results of that contest, and F&SF Competition #95: “Titles the Rearrange” starts the next one. I think they are beginning to struggle for competition ideas.
There is the usual Coming Attractions, and the annual Index to Volumes 132 & 133.3 The latter shows no prolific fiction contributors (I think Robert Reed sometimes had five or six entries in some years): a number have two stories this year, but none have three or more.
Curiosities: A Christmas Garland by Max Beerbohm (1912) by David Langford looks at what sounds like an interesting collection of Xmas parodies, including ones of Kipling, Hardy and Wells. These three at least are fantasy or sf.

There are a number of solid stories in this issue, and it is worth getting for the Nelson story alone. ●

____________________

1. I don’t normally read any previous series stories otherwise these reviews would take twice as long as they do (which is too long). However, in this case I didn’t particularly want to jump in at the last story in a cycle, and I’ve quite enjoyed a couple of recent Marc Laidlaw stories, so I made an exception and read the previous eight. I’m glad I did given the content of this issue’s story, but also because they are an entertaining bunch ranging in quality from good-but-minor to very good (the standout story is Quickstone (F&SF, March 2009) which, surprisingly, did not feature in any of the ‘Best Of’ anthologies or short lists for the year, according to ISFDB. My other favourites include Songwood (F&SF, January-February 2010); Rooksnight (F&SF, May-June 2014; and Bellweather, (Lightspeed #40, September 2013).

2. Paul and Pat’s article is here, with the obituary note at the end.

3. Seeing as it is the end of the F&SF publishing year here are my Hugo Award nomination choices from F&SF (I’ll probably only have read F&SF and Asimov’s SF in their entirety before the initial ballot so this is a bit unfair on the other magazines. That said, these two magazines were woefully under-represented last year, probably because their fiction is not online for free.)

My English Name • novelette by R. S. Benedict
There Was a Crooked Man, He Flipped a Crooked House • novella by David Erik Nelson
I Am Not I • novelette by G. V. Anderson
Whatever Comes After Calcutta • novelette by David Erik Nelson
C. C. Finlay for Best Editor (short-form).

This is just the tip of a quality iceberg, with about a dozen stories close behind. I may add more if I have any picks left after getting around to some of the other magazines. ●

This magazine is still being published! Subscribe: Kindle UKKindle USAWeightless Books or physical copies.

rssrss

Leave a Reply

This site uses Akismet to reduce spam. Learn how your comment data is processed.

Stirring Science Stories v02n01, March 1942

ISFDB link
Archive.org link

_____________________

Editor, Donald A. Wollheim

Fiction:
The Perfect Invasion • novelette by C. M. Kornbluth [as by S. D. Gottesman]
The Giant • short story by Basil Wells
Blind Flight • short story by Donald A. Wollheim [as by Millard Verne Gordon]
The Day Has Come • short story by Walter Kubilius
The Golden Road • novelette by C. M. Kornbluth [as by Cecil Corwin]
The Goblins Will Get You • short story by John B. Michel [as by Hugh Raymond]
Masquerade • short story by C. M. Kornbluth [as by Kenneth Falconer]
The Long Wall • short story by Robert A. W. Lowndes [as by Wilfred Owen Morley]
The Unfinished City • short story by Donald A. Wollheim [as by Martin Pearson]

Non-fiction:
Cover • by Hannes Bok
Interior artwork • by Boris Dolgov (2), Hannes Bok (10), Roy Hunt (2), Hall
Past, Present and Future • editorial
Fantasy and the War
The Vortex
• letters
Fear of Sleep • poem by Emil Petaja
The Fantasy World • essay by Donald A. Wollheim

_____________________

The reason I ended up reading this issue was that I thought it might be a good idea to try to review as many of the 1942 magazines as I could before the 1943 Retro-Hugo awards, which I thought were due in 2019. Then I discovered that they will be awarded this year (2018). D’oh. By the time I found this out I’d already started looking at this magazine and found my interest piqued by both Bok’s artwork and the large number of stories contributed by Cyril M. Kornbluth (three in this issue).
Stirring Science Fiction (and its companion magazine, Cosmic Science Fiction) had an interesting birth.1 The editor Donald Wollheim had pitched the magazines to Albing Publishing, whose Stirring Detective Stories and Stirring Western Stories he had seen on the newsstand. They agreed to hire him but gave him almost no budget for the magazine—Wollheim took the job for the experience, and initially relied on a number of free stories from his Futurian (a fan organisation of the time) friends and others. After three issues of each title the publisher went bust. This fourth issue of Stirring Science Fiction came from another company before being killed off by ‘wartime constraints’ (presumably the same paper rationing that would do for Unknown a year or so later).

The issue itself leads off with Past, Present and Future, a one column editorial/introduction next to the contents listing, which mentions the magazine’s change to a larger format, and that it is now monthly (as I said above, this was the last issue.)2

The fiction begins with the first of three Kornbluth stories, The Perfect Invasion. It starts off in super-science space opera mode:

Their ships were marvellous things. They were so big that they were built at special drydocks. When they took to the ether from these they would never touch land again until they were scrapped. There simply wasn’t anything firm enough to bear their weight. You could explore a line-ship like a city; wander through its halls for a year and never cross the same point. When the big guns were fired they generally tore a hole in space; when the gunshells exploded they smashed asteroids to powder. p. 6

The story itself is initially a proto-‘Berserker’ one: Earth’s colonies are attacked by an overwhelming but unidentified enemy who jam communications and kill everyone. They have weapons much more advanced than the Earth fleet. The bulk of the story concerns itself with Commander Bartok’s attempts to mount a defence against a background of a collapsing, disordered Earth empire (this part is quite well done and I was vaguely reminded of Asimov’s ‘Foundation series,’ the first story of which, Foundation, appeared in the May 1942 issue of Astounding). Meanwhile, his sidekick, Babe MacNeice (parts of this read like a hard-boiled detective story), goes off in a single seat ship to investigate.
The second half of the story has Bartok receive a message from Babe giving information about the type of spaceships the attackers have, and that she has been captured. He follows her, and ends up a captive of what turn out to be robots. Later they discover that (spoiler) the first of the attackers was built by a teenager, and when they learned about fanaticism it all got a bit out of hand.

Bartok later has the teenager’s brain installed in the protean robot (“He was a nice kid, but it was a flagrant piece of criminal negligence, monkeying with robots.”) and the rest of the robots perish in a civil war. Nonsense, but there are some flashes of talent in the first half.
The Giant by Basil Wells has Rolf experimenting with two primitive matter transmission devices when an accident flings him into the far future. A tiny man called Jek greets him, and explains humanity’s reduced size:

“Before the Great Change,” Jek [said], “all men were giants. Too many men crowded Earth. Even in the oceans they lived on artificial islands. There were many wars to capture land already overcrowded. Men and women starved.
“So the scientist reduced the size of men. By radiations, glandular treatment or some other means. The records are not clear and many of the books are destroyed. But when men were a foot tall Earth was big enough for all of them.” p. 16

He warns Rolf that the other villagers will kill him if they discover him. Shortly afterwards this happens, and they both escape to an area where larger humans are known to exist. Rolf and Jez find two sisters and there is a fight with the little people before they all escape in a spaceship.

I assume this awful story was one of the ones given to the editor for nothing.
Blind Flight by Donald A. Wollheim is the first of two stories by the magazine’s editor. This one begins with a convincing description of an astronaut getting into a spherical spaceship for a test flight:

The huge ball, towards whose exact center he so laboriously crawled, was about one hundred feet in diameter and perfectly spherical. Though the outer surface was honeycombed with vents and sensitive cells, there was no window or viewing porte of any description. Sedgwick was being interred alive in the middle of this globe of metal, yet, as the clicks of other metal partitions fell into place behind him, he was not afraid in the slightest.
He had wondered whether he would feel fear when the day for the real test came. Sometimes he had awakened at night with a cold sweat and a ghastly dream of burial alive in an iron coffin. Yet now, as he, neared the little bubble in the core, he realized in a detached objective sort of way that he was quite calm and collected. He knew that was the factor which had made him desirable for this job, nonetheless each time he realized it, it came as a sort of surprise. p. 21

The first half continues in the same vein:

The Sphere was brought to a halt at the proper time and hung in space slowly revolving on its own axis.
It was now about six million miles from Mars and there it would wait for ten hours or so until the red planet had been thoroughly photographed by the telescopic cameras and recorded in other ways by other instruments.
The man could detect where it was by the glow registering on the surface cell clusters. He could tell where it was by the gravitational directives functioning on the panels. He could tell exactly its mass and speed, his own speed, the Earth’s, the sun’s and every other major body’s. He knew what their orbits were and what was to be done to bring the ship back to Earth.
He laughed to himself briefly when the thought struck him that he had now been in space almost three days and yet had not set eyes on the stars. It struck him that that was probably the longest such period away from a sight of the stars that he had ever been in his life. And yet, actually, he was surrounded by them! p. 23

At this point I was beginning to wonder why this story hadn’t appeared in Astounding, but the answer comes in the second half, where another ship starts pursuing him: it turns into a run of the mill chase story. Unable to shake his pursuers the pilot finally resorts to an armed response. There is no reason given for why the ship is armed, and this isn’t convincing. There is a final grisly image when he successfully lands on Earth.

Previously I’ve only read a couple of Wollheim’s shorts in the early ’50s F&SF which (if I recall correctly) didn’t made much of an impression. This one, and his other contribution in this issue, strike me as more promising.
The Day Has Come by Walter Kubilius has three men survive a plane crash in the near future. They see smoke in the distance and walk towards it, finding a factory town. Inside they find uncommunicative, drone-like workers who are building bombers, and realise the factory is a relic from the Second and Third World Wars many years ago. This doesn’t really convince, but the idea of a perpetual war economy is interesting.

Dividing the SF in the first part of the magazine from the fantasy in the second is The Vortex, a good letter column which alternates between reader’s missives and Wollheim’s concise but detailed replies.

There a number of the letters which praise Dold’s artwork, and the illustrations generally: “Your artwork now surpasses that of any other stf mag on the stand”; “the best illustrated stf magazine of all, beating Campbell and the others too!” Corwin’s (Kornbluth) Mr Packer Goes to Hell (the sequel to Thirteen O’Clock) is also praised.
There are the usual pithy comments, such as this from Joseph Gilbert of Columbia, South Carolina:

Winterbotham has never written a decent story in his life, and will die never having written a decent story in his life. p. 32

The Golden Road by C. M. Kornbluth is his second contribution and is a rather precocious work from the young writer (19 or 20 at the time). A man in a bar listens to a storyteller begin a tale. The story tells of Colt, lost on a trek in the Central Asian desert when he stumbles upon a camel caravan. The tribesmen care for him until he recovers from his ordeal. He is then introduced to a Polish couple and a Glaswegian who are travelling with the caravan. Later Colt notices them eating in a strange way, tearing at their meat. He decides to go and look around, and comes upon an elderly Cantonese man, and his son and wife:

“Tell you what,” said the old man. “You can have some of my V.S.O. stock— stuff I won from a Spaniard month back.” He rummaged for a moment, in one of the tent-pockets, finally emerged with a slender bottle which caught the firelight like auriferous quartz. “Danziger Goldwasser — le veritable,” he gloated. “But I can’t drink the stuff. Doesn’t bite like this Nipponese hell-broth.” He up-ended the bottle of suntori again, passed the brandy to Colt.
The American took it, studied it curiously against the fire. It was a thin, amber liquor, at whose bottom settled little flakes. He shook them up into the neck of the bottle; it was like one of the little globular paperweights that hold a mimic snowstorm. But instead of snow there were bits of purest beaten gold to tickle the palate and fancy of the drinker. p. 37

Later, when Colt is on his own, he realises he can understand the Tajikistan tribesmen even though does not know their language. He then sees a far off storm, and notices that the thunder and lightning occur in reverse order. He finds an explanation for this strange occurrence when he wanders off from the caravan and meets a woman (spoiler):

She turned, She was young in her body and face, Mongoloid. Her eyes were blue-black and shining like metal. Her nose was short, Chinese, yet her skin was quite white. She did not have the eyefold of the yellow people.
Silently she extended one hand for the bottle, tilted it high. Colt saw a shudder run through her body as she swallowed and passed him the tall flask with its gold-flecked liquor.
“You must have been cold.”
“By choice. Do you think I’d warm myself at either fire?”
“Either?” he asked. “There are two caravans. Didn’t you know?”
“No. I’m just here— what’s the other caravan?”
“Just here, are you? Did you know that you’re dead?”
Colt thought the matter over slowly, finally declared: “I guess I did. And all these others — and you—?”
“All dead. We’re the detritus of High Pamir. You’ll find, if you look, men who fell to death from planes within the past few years walking by the side of Neanderthalers who somehow strayed very far from their tribes and died. The greatest part of the caravans come, of course, from older caravans of the living who carried their goods from Asia to Europe for thousands of years.” p. 88

The pair then observe the other, nearby caravan, and see its members build a hideous looking idol, which they worship while singing atonal songs. The woman is emotionally overcome when she describes the pressures of having to make a choice between the two caravans.
Colt decides to compare this other group to the one he has been with. He goes to them, and enters into a bond, which allows his consciousness to travel all over the world:

The viewpoint coalesced again and shrank microscopically, then smaller still. For an ecstatic moment it perceived a welter of crashing/ blundering molecules, beetling about in blindness.
It shifted again, swiftly, far away to a point in Hong Kong where a lady was entertaining a gentleman. The viewpoint let the two human’s love, hate, disgust, affection and lust slide beneath its gaze. There was a gorgeous magenta jealously from the man, overlaying the woman’s dull-brown, egg-shaped avarice, both swept away in a rushing tide of fluxing, thick textured, ductile crimson-black passion.
The viewpoint passed somewhere over a battlefield, dwelt lovingly on the nightmare scene below. There were dim flares of vitality radiating from every crawling figure below; a massing of infantry was like a beacon. From the machinery of war there came a steely radiance which waxed as it discharged its shell or tripped its bomb, then dimmed to a quiet glow of satisfaction.
A file of tanks crawled over a hill emitting a purplish radiance which sent out thin cobwebs of illumination. They swung into battle formation, crept down the slope at the infantry mass. Behind the infantry anti-tank guns were hurrying up — too late. The tanks, opened fire, their cobwebs whitening to a demon’s flare of death as soldiers, scurrying for cover, one by one, keeled over. As each fell there was a brittle little tingle, the snapping of a thread or a wire, and the light of vitality was extinguished, being replaced by a sallow, corpsey glow. p. 41

He ends up in front of a five-legged demon, and at this point breaks the communion. Colt thanks the caravan master and leaves. He goes back to the original group and joins in with their singing, but he keeps introducing a discordant note and eventually has to leave them too.

He and Valeska continue their conversation between the caravans, and it is during this that the two groups attack each other. During the violent and bloody battle, Colt and Valeska realise that the two sides are the same; it just depends on how you look at them.
The ending is a bit odd: Colt regains consciousness to find two Russian soldiers treating him. Then we are back in the short framing section to find that the storyteller is Colt.
This isn’t an entirely successful piece but the protagonist’s good/evil dichotomy makes it an interesting one. The writing and content are much more mature than his earlier story as well. One wonders what Kornbluth would have gone on to produce as a fantasy writer if Wollheim had supported this kind of work in a continuing magazine. (That, and the writer not being sent to the war in Germany, of course.)
The Goblins Will Get You by John B. Michel (another of the Futurian group) is a story about goblins who turn up in a man’s bedroom. They want to learn English, and soon become avid readers.

Later in the story they mention the ‘rules,’ and their plan to take over the Earth and its people. This leads up poker game with the highest of stakes. This is okay for the most part but the ending spoiled it for me; others may demur.3 There is one interesting (and promising) passage in the story, which is atypical pulp fare:

I was happy until they told me why they were going to all the trouble of acquainting themselves with the psychology of earth-men. I blew-up.
“You fools!” I cried, screaming with laughter. “What could you do with the planet? Enslave it? The rich have done that already. Dissect a billion bodies? Go to our hospitals. They do it every day. Dig for diamonds? Shall I make you some?” I roared on: “Perhaps you are hungry for green cheese. Go to the moon. I guarantee it to be fresh and untouched by the hand of man.”
A dozen heedless fingers turned over page 242 of Oswald Spengler’s “Decline of the West” and twenty-four eyes began reading the top of page 243.
“Come with me,” I urged, still rocking with mirth. “Let me take you into the homes of the people of the earth and show you life as they live it. You shall hear the screaming of women in labor, the ticking of the feet of roaches on the bare plaster of walls, the scrape of worn-out shoes on patched carpet, a thin gasp in darkness as love is fulfilled and the crest of the wave breaks on the rocks of poverty. Hover with me over the squares of this teeming metropolis and observe the scurrying lines emerging from nowhere and vanishing in obscurity. Feel with me the texture of the skins of a hundred thousand women of the night, listen for the breath in their whispered words which should be happiness but in reality is sandpaper on scalded tongues. My friends, listen. It is madness to want us, insanity to imagine that you harbor the notion. Preserve your reason. Go home. Go home. Surely the earth is but a footstool to heaven, a mere step on your ladder of success. My friends. . . .”
Calmly the busy fingers turned page 268. They were fast readers. p. 46

Masquerade by C. M. Kornbluth (his third story) has a man with a deformed foot give an account of a college friendship and subsequent correspondence. The narrator’s friend writes stating he has moved to a teaching job in Mexico and has gotten married; later, the college fire him for having an affair with one of the students. The friend and his wife turn up at the narrator’s apartment, and from this point onwards it becomes a rather incoherent ‘summoning of Satan’ story.

The Long Wall by Robert A. W. Lowndes (another Futurian) is an okay modern fantasy about a long wall in the middle of nowhere. The narrative describes two men’s attempts to either go around it or over it, but neither succeeds: the story is intriguing but remains enigmatic.

Editor Wollheim’s second story is The Unfinished City. This essentially slight story manages to punch above its weight with its descriptive writing:

For Oo is a most unusual city the like of which might never be seen again on the face of any of the globes of the sun. Not for nothing is it called the Unfinished City. For it is indeed unfinished. Every tower and every structure is incomplete. Each of the many stone towers that top every house of any importance ends in that half-complete chamber on top. Exactly as if the builders had suddenly been called away and never got time to come back and finish. And every wall and house has a corner or a section that is not complete. In everything there was some imperfection. In the clothes of the people there are parts that seem unfinished.
In the tables and three legged chairs there is some part that is not polished or colored or carved and that makes it imperfect. Even the very names of the people drawl off into hints of something left unsaid. If you go into a shop and buy something you will find it incomplete. For the things that are made in Oo are never perfect. p. 61

A thief enters the city and steals a precious stone from the statue of Noom the god . . . .

The Cover is by Hannes Bok.4 This isn’t his best contribution to the issue, and he has much better work inside. Overall, the internal illustrations seem to me better than those in Astounding. I didn’t check whether they are better than all the other magazines published in 1942 but I suspect this may be the case.5

The other Interior artwork is by Boris Dolgov, whose work is similar to Bok’s,6 Roy Hunt and Hall. There is a poem by Emil Petaja, Fear of Sleep;Fantasy and the War is a short and patriotic post-Pearl Harbour filler.

The Fantasy World by Donald A. Wollheim is a book column that reviews The Other Worlds by Phil Stong. Wollheim pans what sounds like one of the first science fiction and fantasy anthologies. His main criticism (after he gets past an obligatory moan about how book publishers do not provide them) is Stong’s selection of stories. Wollheim has clear views about the quality of some recent SF:

For his second section, Phil Stong draws heavily from the wilder and more elementary type of science-fiction magazine. Here are paraded as examples of outstanding fantasy such stories as “Adam Link’s Vengeance” by Eando Binder, “Truth is a Plague” by David Wright O’Brien, “A Comedy of Eras” by Kelvin Kent, “The Man Who Knew All the Answers” by Donald Bern. These stories have no business in a book and we think the original editors and writers would admit that. They are written for a certain type of reader—a reader catered to by an elementary plot and a deliberately hack written-down style of writing. (Our authority for this opinion is the actual statements of the editor of most of them). They were certainly not intended for the audience that can afford to pay $2.50 for a book. p. 66

In conclusion, I found this magazine quite interesting. There are a couple of decent fantasies, and a number of the other stories, if not entirely successful, make for an interesting read. At times the magazine feels like a financially constrained proto-Fantasy and Science Fiction, about a decade before its time. I’ll have to have a look at the other three issues of this title and Cosmic Science Fiction. ●

_____________________

1. For more on the origins of the two magazines, the Wikipedia article is here.
2. The editorial also plugs “one of the most unusual weird novelettes of the year, ‘The Enemy’ by Hugh Raymond and Mallory Kent,” planned for the next issue, as well as ‘The Millionth Year’ by Arthur Cooke. The first story is actually by John B. Michel (Hugh Raymond) and Robert A. W. Lowndes (Mallory Kent). The only collaboration I can find by them on ISFDB is The Inheritors (Future Fantasy and Science Fiction, October 1942, edited by Lowdnes), so I presume the title was changed.
Arthur Cooke is supposedly a pseudonym for Cyril M. Kornbluth, but ‘The Millionth Year’ does not appear on Kornbuth’s ISFDB page. Donald A. Wollheim did, however, have a story of that title published in the April 1943 issue of Science Fiction Stories (ISFDB).
3. Damon Knight liked Michel’s story more than me. He says this in his memoir, The Futurians (Amazon.co.uk):

Michel’s “The Goblins Will Get You” is a deft fantasy about a bunch of insubstantial balloon-headed goblin-creatures who appear at the foot of the narrator’s bed and enlist him in their project to take over the world.

There is also this about Michel earlier in the book:

John B. Michel, then eighteen [circa 1935], was slender and slight, well proportioned except for his bandy legs. (“I couldn’t catch a pig in an alley,” he once wrote.) His dimpled cheeks were pitted with acne scars. He had lost several molars on the upper left side, and his grin was gap-toothed. Michel was an only child, born in Brooklyn in 1917. His father, a Jew, had converted to Catholicism when he married; his mother was Irish. The father, a dapper little man, had been an actor before he turned to sign painting.
When Michel was nine, his mother contracted tuberculosis of the spine, a painful and crippling disease which destroys the vertebrae one by one, causing a progressive spinal curvature and leading eventually to paralysis and death. In the same year Michel himself fell ill with diphtheria, which left him paralyzed in the right arm and left leg until he was eleven.
Before he recovered from this, he contracted osteomyelitis, a staphylococcus infection which can cause painful ulcers both of soft tissue and bone; it was to keep him in and out of hospitals until penicillin cured him in the forties.
Michel fell behind in school, partly because of this grotesque series of illnesses and partly because of a painful stammer.

These kind of ghastly adverse circumstances aren’t atypical in Knight’s book, and they rather put into perspective the things we moan about today.
4. All the covers for Stirring and Cosmic are executed in this money-saving format (B&W illustration with coloured background).
5. I’d start comparing the artwork standards of contemporaneous magazines by looking at Virgil Finlay’s illustrations for Famous Fantastic Mysteries.
6. The artwork for The Perfect Invasion is credited to Dolgov, but ISFDB states that the second and third (unsigned) illustrations are by Bok. I’m not an expert but my gut says they look more like Dolgov’s work. Identification is more difficult due to the fact that the two artists sometimes collaborated on artwork (signed ‘Dolbokov’).
Boris Dolgov seems to be something of a mystery according to SFE. There is a good gallery of his Weird Tales artwork here. ●

Edited 23rd June 2018 to replace images.

rssrss

Leave a Reply

This site uses Akismet to reduce spam. Learn how your comment data is processed.

Astounding Stories v20n06, February 1938

ISFDB
Archive.org

_____________________

Editor, John W. Campbell Jr.

Fiction:
The Degenerates • novelette by John Russell Fearn [as by Polton Cross]
Anachronistic Optics • short story by Moses Schere ∗∗+
The Fatal Quadrant • novelette by Arthur J. Burks –
Galactic Patrol (Part 6 of 6) • serial by E. E. Smith, Ph.D.
Mercutian Adventure • short story by Raymond Z. Gallun
Wayward World • novelette by Otto Binder [as by Gordon A. Giles]
The Anti-Weapon • novelette by Otto Binder [as by Eando Binder]
Thunder Voice • short story by Raymond Z. Gallun [as by Dow Elstar]

Non-fiction:
Mercutian Adventure • cover by Howard V. Brown
Interior artwork • by H. W. Wesso (6), Charles Schneeman, Elliott Dold, Jr. (3), Jack Binder
In Times to Come
The Rainbow Bridge • essay by Herbert C. Mackay
Mercury • editorial by John W. Campbell, Jr.
Power Plants of Tomorrow: Harnessing Earth’s Heat • essay by Willy Ley
Science Discussions and Brass Tacks • letters

_____________________

The main event this issue1 is the cover, Mercutian Adventure, by Howard V. Brown. Although not that attractive an effort, it was an attempt at a more sober and scientific cover than that used on some of the other SF pulps of the time. Campbell discusses it in his editorial, Mercury:

The fiction leads off with The Degenerates by John Russell Fearn.2 It concerns Cambridge, a space pilot who is hired for an expedition to Jupiter’s moon Io, the purpose of which is to retrieve a type of tree that can produce a particularly tough form of iltuion, a material used for spacesuits.

The team includes the businessman funding the trip and his daughter Ada (businessmen in stories like this are always accompanied by their attractive daughters); Ludwig Reid, the expedition leader; Charteris, the co-pilot; Hu Ling, the Chinese cook (!); and, finally, the Ionian alien who made the discovery in the first place, Kiol. Cambridge takes an instant dislike to Reid and, sure enough, he turns out to be a rum ’un.
The ridiculous plot (so much so that I cannot be bothered going through its multiple idiocies) involves (spoiler) a lot of them getting killed on Io before a city full of degenerate Martians are wheeled out at the end.
I believe this was Fearn’s last story in Astounding, to which I can only say “good riddance” (although I should add there is evidence of this author’s inexplicable popularity in Campbell’s letters and in the letter column).
Anachronistic Optics by Moses Schere3 is about a town handyman who is digging a hole for a local builder when he comes upon a strange set of bones and an assortment of metal parts. The handyman takes the material home. Later, he and a retired college head put the metal parts together and realise they have a time-machine.
After they make a couple of short trips in it (which takes them four years into the future), the belligerent builder interrupts, demanding the return of the metal. The builder is a nasty piece of work, and manages to send himself into the future during an altercation—apart from his eyes that is, which stay in the present day, floating in mid-air. All the handyman and the college head can do is wait for his eyes to eventually catch up with his body.
The operation of the time machine is rather unconvincing but the story raises a smile or two, and its subtitle, ‘An unusually well-told light science fiction story,’ is an accurate description.4

The Fatal Quadrant by Arthur J. Burks5 is similar to the Fearn story in that the narrator (this time a newspaper editor) signs up for an expedition to the Antarctic with a millionaire inventor (this guy is younger so there is a sister that comes along and not a daughter). Once they arrive at the base, the inventor reveals his plans, which involve using robots to map the continent, but there is also talk about weather control, and melting the ice to reveal whatever is thousands of feet below.
The robots go off in due course on a radial survey, illuminating their path with eye headlights (a striking scene which Wesso chose to illustrate).

They send video back to the lab where two robots compile maps and charts. When the mapping robots get to a wide valley that looks like it was excavated by mechanical means, the sister suddenly gets the vapours :

Beside me Zora was breathing audibly. I glanced at her. Her eyes were wide. Her bosom was heaving. She couldn’t be afraid of what might happen to the robots, surely, for there were extras we hadn’t yet unpacked, and they were merely pieces of machinery, after all. No. it wasn’t that. I thought, and a moment later I knew I had been right.
For Zora whirled on her brother and screamed: “Bring them back, Sherm! Bring them back, for my sake. I can’t stand it any longer! I’m terribly afraid that—”
“Afraid?” said Geddes softly. “Of what? Nothing that might possibly trouble our robots can reach us here!”
“I’m afraid of— Please, Sherman, let’s call a halt. You can stop them, leave them right where they are! Do it for me. Let their eyes die, so that they can hide from—”
“Hide from what?” yelled Geddes. “Zora, you’re nuts! What can there possibly be to hide from? Rocks? Hills? Glaciers? Crevasses? I’ve never known you to be so childish, so imaginative.”
“I ought to be ashamed of myself, Sherm, I know. But I can’t help it. The feeling keeps growing on me that soon in those
—at least of the nine robots in the plain, maybe even in all the others—we’re going to see things that may be so tremendous—so maddening—”
“Nothing in this world can drive you mad.” said Geddes. “You’re my sister!”
“Jud! Jud!” said Zora, flinging herself into my arms. “Say something to him! You feel it, too; I can see it in your eyes—in the sweat on your cheeks and in your hair. Ask him to delay his investigations, even for an hour.”
“I agree with her, Sherm,” I said. “Let’s call a halt for a little while.”
“Nothing doing!” In his two words of refusal there was finality that I couldn’t gainsay. Well, there might be some other way. I put Zora aside, rose, stepped toward Sherman Geddes. “Sherman,” I said, “stop it, right now. Give the command, or so help me—”
“Sit down, Mr. Draper,” said a cold voice to my right rear, “or it will be my duty to force you to!”
I whirled, stared. Standing within two feet of me, radiating power against which I knew I’d be less than a babe in arms, was [Robot] Thirteen.
p. 52

Up until this point it wasn’t too bad—the remoteness and the then mystery of Antarctica is quite well done—but from this point on it all goes a bit megalomaniac super-scientist, and not in a good way.
The robots come to an ice wall and Geddes has the other machines join them. When they look down they see a perfectly ordered city buried deep in the ice. Geddes sees that the inhabitants are perfectly preserved, and uses some hand-wavey science to speculate that they are alive. The robots evaporate all the water and sink to the level of the city. Number twenty-one ignores an order to go into one of the buildings and his video relay screen goes white.
From this point on the story just becomes dafter and dafter: the ice that has melted starts causing floods and hailstones and worldwide climactic change; the three destroy the lab and head south to avert further catastrophe but, when they get to the city, it is even deeper in ice than before, an event that is unexplained (that, or I’d started skimming). Finally, Geddes kills himself on the ship home. The problem with all of this is that it isn’t a story, just an arbitrary succession of unlikely wonders.
I liked the last part of Doc Smith’s Galactic Patrol, even if it sometimes appears as if it is written in another language:

 “Um-m-m.” Crandall stared at Kinnison, new respect in his eyes. “I knew that unattached Lensmen were good, but I had no idea they were that good. No wonder Helmuth has been getting his wind up about you. I’ll string along with any one who can take a whole base, single-handed, and make such a bally ass to boot out of such a keen old bird as Helmuth is. But I’m in a bit of a dither, not to say a funk, about what is going to happen when we pop into Prime Base without you. Every man jack of us, you know, is slated for the lethal chamber without trial. Miss MacDougall will do her bit, of course, but what I mean is, has she enough jets to swing it?” p. 78

Not even the problems with child health and safety put me off:

In his hidden retreat so far from the galaxy’s crowded suns and worlds, Helmuth was in no enviable or easy frame of mind. Four times he had declared that that accursed Lensman, whoever he might be, must be destroyed, and had mustered his every available force to that end, only to have his intended prey slip from his grasp as effortlessly as a droplet of mercury eludes the clutching fingers of a child. p. 80

In this final instalment Kinnison goes to Helmuth’s base, only to discover that the latter has meanwhile worked out what Kinnison’s powers are, and has ordered thought shields for all personnel. Kinnison, stymied, goes back to Tellus and consults Admiral Haynes, who plans a huge attack to take place in ten weeks’ time. Meanwhile, Kinnison has an armoured suit constructed and has twenty thousand bullets fired at him to learn how to operate it under attack!

Kinnison then goes to Trenco, where he telepathically communicates with a ‘flat,’ a local turtle-like alien, and manages get them to agree to harvest and manufacture thionite, a powerful drug, in exchange for sugar.
Kinnison returns to the pirate base and hides in a cave. He gets a dog to disconnect a battery pack and takes control of an operative who lets him in. He releases the thionite into the air and then starts taking control of others, using them to disconnect others’ thought shields:

Thionite, as has been intimated, is perhaps the worst of all known habitforming drugs. In almost infinitesimal doses it gives rise to a State in which the victim seems actually to experience the gratification of his every desire, whatever that desire may be. The larger the dose, the more intense the sensation, until—and very quickly—the dosage is reached at which he passes into such an ecstatic stupor that not a single nerve can force a stimulus into his frenzied brain. In this stage he dies.
Thus there was no alarm, no outcry, no warning. Each observer sat or stood entranced, holding exactly the pose he had been in at the instant of opening his face plate. But now, instead of paying attention to his duty, he was plunging deeper and deeper into the paroxysmally ecstatic profundity of a thionite debauch from which there was to be no awakening.
p. 92

The Galactic Patrol attack the dome. Kinnison has a climactic superscience battle with Helmuth, who dies in the line of fire. This scene has a rather abrupt ending, but the instalment is a good end to an entertaining novel.

Raymond Z. Gallun has two stories in this issue. The first is Mercutian Adventure, this issue’s cover story. A newlywed couple buy a spaceship and head for Mercury, planning to run a business that sells photographs of the planet. While they are on the surface their fuel becomes unstable, but before it explodes they escape with oxygen bottles and a canvas sheet. They burrow into the topsoil and wait.
The science in this one is a mixture of (a) out of date (Mercury’s thin atmosphere) and (b) wonky (the canvas initially stops oxygen getting out but later allows it to diffuse in). At least the story is an honest attempt to put some science into science fiction and not the usual procession of unexplained pulp wonders.

The other Gallun story is Thunder Voice. This is a gimmick piece where a far-future Earth and Moon need to simultaneously activate their gravity beams to avoid collision, but cannot communicate due to etheric interference or some such. The chief scientist (spoiler) connects a telephone handset to one of the beams and points it at the moon, using variable gravity waves to vibrate their walls and send an audio message. Contrived, but it is a clever solution.
Otto Binder6 also has two stories in this issue. The first (under his Gordon A. Giles pseudonym) is Wayward World. This has a two-man spaceship whose drive malfunctions, causing a forced landing on a newly discovered planet between Saturn and Uranus. On the planet they discover metal based life, some of who attempt to drag their ship away. One of the crew enters a cataleptic trance to try and communicate with them, although that doesn’t work as expected.

The plot and the science are weak but it is written in an entertaining way, with some banter between the two pilots, Wade Welton and Archibald Quinsley Osgood, enlivening the story, such as when they first set foot on the planet and Welton exits the ship to do a recce:

Welton jumped the five feet to the ground and landed with enough of a jar to realize surface gravity was at least Earth’s equal. The gravity gauge in the ship had not been awry then. He swept his flash around. The ground was of a loamy texture, dark purple in color. He moved a few steps forward in his micro-mesh garment, to get out of the shadow of the Thunderbolt. He winced a little at the pain in his bruised hip. Then he glanced around. It looked much the same through his glassite helmet as it had from the ship’s ports—an endless, flat stretch of barrenness, without detail in the light of the somber stars.
Welton caught movement in the corner of his eye and turned swiftly. A tall figure loomed up in the dark. Welton limelighted it with his flash, then gasped and staggered back a step.
“Howdy, Columbus!” greeted Osgood cheerily. He was dressed in a Ganymedian parka, only the circle of his face exposed, but with his nose free to the atmosphere. He took a deep breath of air and thumped his chest while exhaling.
“Jumping Jupiter!” said Welton, gagging.
“Glorious to breathe fresh air for a change, Wade old stuff. Stuff is right, in that vac-suit. Why the devil are you wearing it?” Osgood doubled up in pantomime mirth.

It turns out that Osgood has spent the morning analysing the air, and it is breathable . . . .
The second of the two is The Anti-Weapon,7 which takes place during a future war on Earth. Elson is a pilot who has his plane damaged in a dogfight, but manages to land it behind enemy lines:

An hour later he felt better, though bruised and shaken. He looked around. The ruined city all about seemed utterly deserted; not a sound came from its battered environs. Alpha-charges, proton-blasts, neutron-beams, deuteron-flames and other agents of demolition had done a thorough job. Undoubtedly, electron-rays had swept the streets and byways to heap up the electrocuted dead.
Elson knew the city—knew where he was. This had been an enemy city, razed by His Side. But they had not succeeded in capturing this salient. He was about thirty miles back from the lines, in enemy territory. He would be shot on sight, when discovered. The Atom War was one stripped of all humaneness; a struggle to the finish between the world divided into two great camps, with fighting going on interminably on a dozen fronts.
Elson’s only chance of life was to get back to his own lines. A thirty-mile jaunt through the thickest of enemy forces was unthinkable. He must repair his ship.
p. 129

During his search for food he comes across a young woman called Lorna and, even though she is one of the enemy, he gives her some of the provisions he has found. He then accompanies her back to her father, Professor Davidson, who has perfected an anti-weapon in his basement laboratory.
Later, after some food and conversation, the Professor powers up the weapon, a wire globe that forms a sphere of ebony ultraspace which absorbs all forms of energy. After a demonstration showing the uselessness of Elson’s raygun, he agrees to fly the plans for the device to the Pacifist League in the north, before going to one of the conflict zones to demonstrate its power.

The science in this is rather fanciful, as is Elson’s readiness to commit treason, but it is an interesting story for its descriptions of the ravaged city and the resulting brutality, not to mention it contains what I suspect was then a widespread hope that another global conflict could be avoided.
The final scene (spoiler) has Elson attempting to land his plane while watched by the professor and his daughter, but he sinks below ground level before climbing up and away into the night: Elson has realised what the professor is explaining to his daughter—the anti-weapon has drained most of his substance, and he is now stranded in ultraspace.

The Interior artwork is mostly by Wesso and Jack Binder (Otto Binder’s brother) in this issue, although there are also illustrations from Charles Schneeman and Elliott Dold, Jr.
In Times to Come mentions that putting a magazine together is like working on a jig-saw puzzle—the reason why promised stories are sometimes left out of an issue after being promised. He then goes on to list the stories that will definitely appear in the next issue and those that may.

There are two short science articles: The Rainbow Bridge by Herbert C. Mackay is about the increasingly widespread use of spectroscopy, and Power Plants of Tomorrow: Harnessing Earth’s Heat by Willy Ley is about geothermal power.
I actually found parts of  Science Discussions quite interesting this time around. There is a letter on evolution from John D. Clark, Philadelphia, which has this at the end:

So here’s the final result of my cogitation—partly probabilities, partly wishful-thinking. In a million years or so Man will be larger, averaging perhaps six and a half or seven feet tall. He will be much more intelligent, making mental solutions of the three body problem. He will be able to see ultraviolet and infrared, and to see with much more detail than at present, due to an increased number of cells in the retina. His fingers will be perhaps twice as long as the present ones, with infinitely flexible joints. He will be quite capable physically, cleaned out as he will be. of the vestigial remains such as the appendix that clutter up our internal economy. And finally, he will be able to communicate telepathically with his fellows at will, and will be able to know the universe around him without the intervention of his other senses. But, he will still be a man, recognizable as one. Control over human heredity will very probably accelerate evolution to a considerable degree. As for the direction, as I said before—all bets are off.
If anybody has any ideas on the subject, let him bring them forth. Destructive criticism will be available in unlimited quantities.
p. 148

There are also interesting letters from John James Logue from New York, upbraiding Eando Binder for the science in The Time Contractor among other things, and D. C. Beere, a cadet at West Point, about nuclear particles and scientific theory in general.
Brass Tacks
has a letter from Sam Youd (the real name of the well-known writer John Christopher) from Eastleigh in Hampshire. He starts by criticising Wesso’s artwork, while praising Brown, Dold and Binder (Jack). After praising Smith’s serial and lambasting Schachner (‘Can’t you get rid of him, or is he under contract?’) he includes his top ten for the year:

1. “Forgetfulness”. [Campbell] Ranks with the superb “Twilight”. A grand plot.
2. “Galactic Patrol”. [Smith] Far and away better than ‘‘Valeron” or “Triplanetary”.
3. “Seeker of Tomorrow”. [Russell/Johnson] Entertaining, original and exceedingly well-written.
4. “Sands of Time”. P. S. Miller at his best.
5. “The Endless Chain”. [Macfadyen] An old plot, but I like the strain of mysticism.
6. “Fires of Genesis”. Gallun is now consistently good.
7. “Out of Night”. Stuart can do much better, nevertheless, good.
8. “Great Radio Peril”. [Russell] Good humorous satire.
9. “Saga of Pelican West”. [Russell] Blood and thunder, but reminiscent of Weinbaum.
10. “Frontier of the Unknown”. [Knight] Rather slow. Boring in places.
p. 155

The other letters includes plaudits for some stories and brickbats for others. Some of the comments are as blunt as Youd’s, such as the final one from Arthur B. Dawson from Plano, Illinois:

In closing let me repeat my appreciation of the improvement you have wrought, but you will be the first to admit that there is room for more. Please deliver us from the “one man whips the universe at the last minute” stuff. Williamson take notice for one. Get your authors to take a good course in English composition somewhere, and we will all be happier. p. 159

An interesting issue that illustrates the gulf between those writers who look likely to survive under Campbell’s editorship and those who won’t.8

_____________________

1. I intended for this review to appear on the 70th anniversary of publication but it took me longer than I expected to write. The copyright dates for this and other issues of Astounding are here.

2. In Fantasy Commentator #59/60 (Lulu.com), Moskowitz mentions the Polton Cross story:

On the same date [27th January 1938] Campbell sent out a letter which concerned ‘The Degenerates’ by Polton Cross (Astounding Stories, February, 1938). He did not appear to know at the time that Polton Cross was a pen name for John Russell Fearn.
[. . .]
Campbell receives a letter from a reader claiming that he had read the identical plot some years past. Campbell writes to Swisher the following description for possible identification: “Tribulations of ye Ed. Remember “The Degenerates” by Polton Cross? Somebody says Argosy published a yarn some years back—four or six parts about an amphibian plane expedition to upper Amazon for untearable rubber. Hero hated villain on sight. Expedition of hero, villain, backer, daughter, cook and native. Hero and girl shot at. villain locks up weapons, backer gets fever and daughter kidnapped. Degenerates here descendants of Atlantians. Science-secret was statue of Poseidon and chariot with horses which had anti-gravity secret. Daughter to be sacrificed under hooves of horses.
“You may remember it, you may have a tear sheet of that yarn. If you kept it. I’d like to see it. At any rate, can you remember anything about it, or did you miss it completely too?” Underneath the letter Swisher had jotted
The Lost Land of Atzlan by Fred Maclsaac, Argosy, six parts, beginning August 2, 1933.
Campbell responded February 2, 1938: “The research department [Swisher]—and the system—slipped a bit that time. I got hold of all six copies of the
Argosy containing the Maclsaac’s yarn. ‘The Lost Land of Atzlan’, and it wasn’t the one.
“That story’s about a gang, bound for a Mexican city. Fog comes in, they’re lost, and sit down where they can in a valley, where Aztecs have maintained a slight civilization. “But not our gang at all. I want one that takes place in the Amazon country. Any more suggestions? If it is what our informant in California claims, take an outline of the plot of ‘Degenerates’, transform it to the Amazon country and Atlantians instead of Martians, and you’ve got the exact same story.”
[. . .]
That Campbell’s informant was able to so precisely remember the plot and not the title of the story, its author or place of publication is indicative of an entirely false lead. There is no question that the plot of the story could easily have been transferred to South America. Campbell never discovered the alleged ‘original’ but he did not use the name of Polton Cross again. He continued to appear in a variety of science fiction magazines until 1948. It is also a fact that John Russell Fearn was not a copyist. He had an immensely fertile mind when it came to plots, writing and selling literally hundreds of works of science fiction without once being accused of plagiarism.
Campbell was still searching for that elusive story February 7, 1938, when in response to a query by Swisher asking if he had read Maclsaac’s story he responded: “No, I didn’t read ‘Atzlan’, just the synopsis. We called in Julius Schwartz, and he didn’t remember the story referred to, either. So it wouldn’t have been in his
Fantasy column. I read ‘Balata’ myself, and I do not believe that that was the story. Right now, it’s vague and I can’t remember the details. Just an action story in the jungles and about a guy that had found a whole grove of balata trees. I’m gonna try to find one issue of the yarn—preferably one of the last issues—and see what the synopsis has to say.” p. 78-79

3. Schere sold another few stories to Astounding before ending his short career in a number of minor, late 1950s SF magazines. His page at ISFDB.
4. In Fantasy Commentator #59/60, Campbell had this to say about Schere’s story in a letter to Robert D. Swisher dated 11th November 1937:

We got a real nice little yarn from one Moses Schere—and it was titled ‘A Hot Time in the Old Barn’! Despite that handicap we bought it rejoicing, because it was good. We’re retitleing it ‘Anachronistic Optics’ p. 68

5. There is evidence that Burks (and Hubbard) were foisted on Campbell by the management at Street & Smith. Sam Moskowitz says this in Fantasy Commentator #59/60:

Some months before he had been discharged, Tremaine had taken Campbell aside and told him he thought the fiction in the magazine was getting to heavy. He ordered him to buy some fiction from L. Ron Hubbard, an author who had contributed to several of his other magazines, because he had a light touch. Campbell gritted his teeth at the order, but when he met Hubbard he rather liked him. He purchased from him ‘The Dangerous Dimension’ which appeared in the July, 1938 issue. p. 89

Hubbard describes what happened in greater detail in the introduction to Battlefield Earth:

It will probably be best to return to the day in 1938 when I first entered this field, the day I met John W. Campbell, Jr., a day in the very dawn of what has come to be known as The Golden Age of science fiction. I was quite ignorant of the field and regarded it, in fact, a bit diffidently. I was not there of my own choice. I had been summoned to the vast old building on Seventh Avenue in dusty, dirty, old New York by the very top brass of Street and Smith publishing company—an executive named Black and another, F. Orlin Tremaine. Ordered there with me was another writer, Arthur J. Burks. In those days when the top brass of a publishing company—particularly one as old and prestigious as Street and Smith—”invited” a writer to visit, it was like being commanded to appear before the king or receiving a court summons. You arrived, you sat there obediently, and you spoke when you were spoken to.
We were both, Arthur J. Burks and I, top-line professionals in other writing fields. By the actual tabulation of A.B. Dick, which set advertising rates for publishing firms, either of our names appearing on a magazine cover would send the circulation rate skyrocketing, something like modern TV ratings.
The top brass came quickly to the point. They had recently started or acquired a magazine called Astounding Science Fiction. Other magazines were published by other houses, but Street and Smith was unhappy because its magazine was mainly publishing stories about machines and machinery. As publishers, its executives knew you had to have people in stories. They had called us in because, aside from our A.B. Dick rating as writers, we could write about real people. They knew we were busy and had other commitments. But would we be so kind as to write science fiction? We indicated we would.
They called in John W. Campbell, Jr., the editor of the magazine. He found himself looking at two adventure-story writers, and though adventure writers might be the aristocrats of the whole field and might have vast followings of their own, they were not science fiction writers. He resisted. In the first place, calling in topliners would ruin his story budget due to their word rates. And in the second place, he had his own ideas of what science fiction was.
Campbell, who dominated the whole field of sf as its virtual czar until his death in 1971, was a huge man who had majored in physics at Massachusetts Institute of Technology and graduated from Duke University with a Bachelor of Sciences degree. His idea of getting a story was to have some professor or scientist write it and then doctor it up and publish it. Perhaps that is a bit unkind, but it really was what he was doing. To fill his pages even he, who had considerable skill as a writer, was writing stories for the magazine.
The top brass had to directly order Campbell to buy and to publish what we wrote for him. He was going to get people into his stories and get something going besides machines.

Hubbard would become a prolific contributor to both Astounding and Unknown.
6. From ISFDB:

Eando Binder stood for “Earl and Otto Binder” until Earl stopped contributing in late 1935-early 1936. See Otto’s letter to Earl “on Earl’s decision to no longer participate in the “Eando” pseudonym”, 20 January 1936.

Otto Binder would only contribute another few stories to Astounding.
7. In Fantasy Commentator #59/60, Campbell had this to say about Binder’s The Anti-Weapon in a letter to Robert D. Swisher dated 30th October 1937:

Binder’s new story ‘The Anti-Weapon’ [. . .] happens to have an inconsistent, but actually unimportant explanation—as motivation for an interesting story [. . .] I think you’ll find [it] a pretty decent yarn. p. 65

8.  As previously mentioned, Fearn would contribute nothing more to Astounding. Burks would contribute another half-dozen stories, and Otto Binder three. All of these appeared before the end of 1939. Gallun survived the longest, albeit at a reduced rate, contributing seven more stories to the end of 1939, and four more from then until 1952 (and he even appeared in Analog three times between 1977 and 1983).

rssrss

2 thoughts on “Astounding Stories v20n06, February 1938

  1. Denny Lien

    Burks’ last work for JWC magazines was supposed to be a lead novel for UNKNOWN, but Campbell claimed the manuscript was so dreadfully unpublishable that he wound up extensively rewriting it and publishing it (as THE ELDER GODS, October 1939 issue) under his “Don A. Stuart” pen name. I recall seeing a Campbell letter (probably in that FANTASY COMMENTATOR collection) in which Campbell vowed never again to buy anything from Burks.

    http://www.isfdb.org/cgi-bin/title.cgi?52353

    And I see that Centipede Press is about to publish a massive (and expensive) “best of” collection of Burks stories in their hc line. Contents look to be all or almost all horror, which makes sense, as the memorable stuff I can recall reading by Burks was horror and not sf.

    Reply
  2. paul.fraser@sfmagazines.com Post author

    Thanks for the information about Burks. I should get to that story around the end of next year . . . . (The relevant pages for those that have Fantasy Commentator #59/60 are pp. 107, 110 and 112., but the short version is that Campbell rejected it, Burks threatened to sue for the $600, S&S paid him as it would cost less than possibly losing in court, and then got JWC to rewrite it for $100. Burks was subsequently blackballed.)
    I found a blog somewhere on the web which stated that Burks wrote/typed so quickly that his ms had parts of sentences missing between the bottom of one page and the top of the next. After reading the story above I can’t say I was surprised.

    Reply

Leave a Reply

This site uses Akismet to reduce spam. Learn how your comment data is processed.

The Magazine of Fantasy & Science Fiction #733, September-October 2017

ISFDB link
F&SF subs / Amazon UK, USA / Weightless Books

Other reviews:
Gardner Dozois, Locus
Steve Fahnestalk, Amazing Stories
Rich Horton, Locus
Greg Hullender and Eric Wong, Rocket Stack Rank
John D. Loyd, There Ain’t No Such Thing As A Free Lunch
Jason McGregor, Tangent Online
Patrick Mahon, SF Crowsnest
Sam Tomaino, SF Revu
Various, Goodreads

_____________________

Editor, C. C. Finlay

Evil Opposite • short story by Naomi Kritzer ∗∗
We Are Born • short story by Dare Segun Falowo ∗∗
Leash on a Man • novelette by Robert Reed ∗∗
Tasting Notes on the Varietals of the Southern Coast • short story by Gwendolyn Clare ∗∗
The Care of House Plants • short story by Jeremy Minton ∗∗
The Hermit of Houston • novelette by Samuel R. Delany ∗∗
On Highway 18 • short story by Rebecca Campbell ∗∗+
Hollywood Squid • short story by Oliver Buckram ∗∗+
Still Tomorrow’s Going to Be Another Working Day • short story by Amy Griswold ∗∗
Bodythoughts • short story by Rahul Kanakia ∗∗
Riddle • short story by Lisa Mason ∗∗+
Children of Xanadu • novelette by Juan Paulo Rafols ∗∗+
The Two-Choice Foxtrot of Chapham County • short story by Tina Connolly ∗∗
Starlight Express • short story by Michael Swanwick ∗∗

Non-fiction:
Starlight Express • cover by Maurizio Manzieri
Cartoons • by Danny Shanahan, Nick Downes, Arthur Masear, S. Harris
Books to Look For • by Charles de Lint
Books • by James Sallis
Vanishing Act • science essay by Pat Murphy and Paul Doherty
On Finding Her Inner Kaiju • film review by Kathi Maio
Curiosities: The Great Demonstration, by Katharine Metcalf Roof (1920) • review by Robert Eldridge

_____________________

This issue begins with three stories of average quality.
Evil Opposite by Naomi Kritzer actually gets off to an engrossing start with its tale of a post-graduate and his dislike for fellow research assistant Shane. The latter not only irritates the narrator constantly but has also managed to get a position working with their professor. While the narrator is trawling through the latter’s research papers he comes across an undeveloped paper on a ‘quantum viewer.’ He builds this, and it lets him observe other-world versions of himself to the point that his absorption in this process adversely affects his life. However, these observations, and the deductions he draws from them, eventually lead him to a better path in life and, in particular, he manages to avoid one particularly calamitous action involving Shane.
Unfortunately this promising piece rather peters out, and I also didn’t buy the narrator giving the machine to Shane at the end.
It would be unfairly reductionist to describe We Are Born by Dare Segun Falowo as a ‘golem’ story, but that label gives you an idea of what is happening at the start of this story.  A village sculptress in rural Nigeria, who has previously lost three babies, forms a child from the Earth:

The earth, softened by pattering raindrops, fell away beneath her fingertips as she pulled the entrails of the land to the surface. Red mud, soft and thick; brown mud, dour and fragile, no better than a leaf sucked dry by harmattan; pink mud, heavy like raw meat. These formed a discolored hill around her, and as she dug deeper and deeper, rain fell harder.
With a lunge that thrust her shoulder-deep into the hole she had dug, she hit it with aching fingers — clay, off-white and exuding a warmth like it had been waiting for centuries, holding sunlight in itself. She had never seen it in all her time sculpting the medium, but she knew it would be there and she knew it would give her what she needed as it pulsed in her fist with life.
She scooped it up and began to work. Rain fell harder but the mud did not run.  p. 21

Subsequently, however, the story unfolds its own myth of storm-borne spirit children.
I found this story a little overwritten and consequently slow-moving, but it has an effective last section.
Leash on a Man by Robert Reed is narrated by Porous Mirth, a genetically modified guard who works in a future Earth prison. They receive a young woman called Constance who has killed every person on an L4 habit called Crystals. It takes Reed about ten pages (of thirty odd) to get to this point in the story, and this is followed by a murky plot about the warden plotting to have Constance murdered.
I couldn’t work out the warden’s motivation for this, or fathom what happens during the sequence (spoiler) when she escapes. I also did not like the frequent passages where not much happens, nor that they are told in a stilted and telegraphic style. Take this passage about Porous encouraging one of the cons to greet the new inmate:

“When are you going?” I ask.
Russell looks at me. It takes him a few seconds to figure out my question, and that’s when he looks away.
“What are you talking about?” he asks the empty street.
“She’s been here a few days,” I say. “You should go to her front door, give her your warmest and best.”
“Yeah, well,” he says.
I’m having a little laugh.
He looks at me again, hard as he can. “You think I want to get some of that.”
“You’re our resident stallion,” I tease.
He would normally relish that description. Smile and kind of fling his head to the side. But not today. “I couldn’t get in the mood with that. You know?”
Russell is throwing out the impotence card.
I say, “You’re scared of her.”
“Yeah,” he says. No bravado, just blunt agreement.
So I say, “I’ll go with you.”
“You?”
“You need backbone and I’ve got enough back for three men. So you can be the residents’ official greeter and I’ll be your chaperone. How’s that?”
Russell licks his lips when he’s thinking hard. Which doesn’t happen often.
“Okay,” he says finally.  p. 43

My considered response was: ‘Get on with it.’
Reed used to be a reliable and prolific producer of short fiction, but I can’t recall anything recent of his that I particularly like. This one isn’t bad, but it is barely okay.
Tasting Notes on the Varietals of the Southern Coast by Gwendolyn Clare has an introduction from editor C. C. Finlay where he says “she writes a whole world into existence in just a few short pages.” He is not wrong: in short order the author conjures up what would seem to be an alternate Roman Empire that is waging a plague war on the Qati for their territory, vineyards and wine. The highlight is the narrator, a master vintner who only cares about the latter:

In Rambekh there is a body floating in the mashing vat — gray and bloated and utterly disgusting, though I could not say whether from the plague itself or the putrefaction after death. Such a waste, eighty or ninety gallons in total, all of it ruined. The whole harvest from the west-facing slopes above the city, if I had to guess.  p. 65

The Care of House Plants by Jeremy Minton is a tale about two enforcers from a future biotech company looking for an employee who has absconded with samples from the lab. They arrive at a house overrun with modified plant growth:

Beyond the door it was humid, dark, and dusty. It smelled of overripe life and moist decay. I rubbed my hand through my glove, praying the skin was unbroken. Something had slashed me while I groped for the door handle. NuGenera retune my B-cells once a week, so theoretically I was safe from anything here, but it was a theory I’d rather not put to the test.
Trails of foliage threaded the verdant wall. Some plants I recognized — honeysuckle and roses, briar and devil’s ivy promiscuously pressed together with no respect for season. More looked unfamiliar. Beneath the broken floor tiles I saw scurrying bugs.
Fat-leaved violets spread across surfaces, coiling fleshy heads around stove burners. Saucepans and spice racks almost disappeared beneath elephant’s ear and peacock plants. A book poked sadly from the window sill: The Care of House Plants.  p. 70

In the sitting room they find an old woman, the employee’s mother. An effective piece of SF horror.
I wasn’t particularly looking forward to The Hermit of Houston by Samuel R. Delany as I’ve never really liked (or understood) much of his work (probably because I read most of it too young) but I got on with this one okay. That said, this future slice-of life is not what you would call an easy read, especially the first few pages which has a rambling narrator give a garbled account of a future history.
After that it settles down to an account of a strange male-only society, although some of the characters are referred to as she (a product of the gender fluidity that seems to be either culturally or surgically available). The unfolding narrative (there is no particular ‘story’ here) centres on the narrator’s relationship with another man called Cellibrex and, alongside the account of their relationship, we learn about their world. This involves (another) data-dump later in the story when he visits the Hermit, where he is told a number of things, one of which is that the male society he inhabits is part of a population control plan. There are various other snippets of background information throughout the story, such as the mention of an (occasionally) brutal post-Facebook, post-Handbook society where the discussion of certain ideas will get you killed.
If you get the sense that I am struggling to synopsise the story then you are correct: it is one of those discursive and rambling pieces that would probably reward a second reading, although that rather begs the question of why the writer didn’t make it clearer than it is. Perhaps this is a deliberate choice to let the reader sieve out information one their own, or this may be an early draft of a longer work in progress. While it is more opaque than the kind of fiction I normally enjoy, I liked how Delaney creates a convincing world and some of the ideas touched upon. I think this short passage may illuminate what the story (or possible longer work) is at least partially about:

It works so much better now that we’ve separated the sexes and mixed up the genders — given them their proper dignity along with that of the ethnicities. All you have to do is dissociate them from where someone actually comes from and how they got here. Then you can do anything you want with them . . .  p. 124

Before I finish up with this one, there is this at the end of the introduction to the story:

As readers of “Aye, and Gomorrah…” or Stars In My Pockets Like Grains of Sand might expect, this new story would get an NC-17 rating at the movies and is not appropriate for younger readers.  p. 105

If you forensically examined each issue of the magazine I suspect you could find a lot that is not appropriate for younger readers: violence, immoral behaviour, drug use, etc. Why a couple of briefly described episodes of gay oral sex calls for a specific warning I am not sure, especially in what I assumed was a magazine with a sophisticated readership. I note in passing that there is no warning about the sex with an alien in the Kanakia story (see the quote below) or the sex with cat-like sphinx in the Mason story.
On Highway 18 by Rebecca Campbell is about the disintegrating relationship between two teenage girls:

This was how it used to be. You are both sixteen. You will be an actress. You will be a world traveler. You will direct great films, or write epic novels. You will fuck a million beautiful men. Just for now, though, you’re lying together on an air mattress in a backyard and listening to a mix tape you have listened to a thousand times already and which has been distorted by all those listenings and by the cheap cassette deck in the car, and by the heat of summer. For twenty years afterward you will keep the tape, and when you listen to it, and hear the familiar distortions that time and repetition make, it will break your heart a tiny little bit.  p. 138

They live in a town where a couple of dead girls have been found, and ghosts with knowledge of the future appear. This is an atmospheric tale with some convincing description.
If Campbell’s story reminded me a little of C. L. Grant, then Hollywood Squid by Oliver Buckram reminds me a lot of Ron Goulart. The story is about a washed up Hollywood director and an alien squid pitching a cop/squid buddy movie. Apart from the project’s unusual pairing, another script plot twist is that the Oscars are used to smuggle diamonds, which turns out to be dangerously close to the truth.
Still Tomorrow’s Going to Be Another Working Day by Amy Griswold is a short piece about a kid being repossessed as the mother hasn’t kept up the payments to the fertility clinic. It is a promising notion, and well enough done, but the writer doesn’t go anywhere with the idea.
Bodythoughts by Rahul Kanakia is about a young alien on Earth who becomes infatuated with a captain who was held prisoner during an interplanetary/interspecies war, During the latter’s captivity he had sexual experiences with the aliens:

And after those long talks, they embraced him, and he touched them in their deep-inside places until they spurted their smelly ink at him. And he wasn’t forced into doing this. No! Even now he could admit he’d done it because he liked it! Liked how it relieved him from feeling guilty over putting them in danger. Because if he could give them pleasure, then somehow the risk was squared and became even.  p. 171

The story is told from three points of view: the young alien George, his three progenitors, and the Captain. It is an offbeat story whose last image helps make it.
Riddle by Lisa Mason establishes its jilted artist protagonist in a gritty urban background quickly and effectively, before having him meet a strange creature in the alleyway where he lives. He initially thinks it is a woman needing shelter, and lets it in to his house:

The overhead light never shed much illumination on his studio or his life. But he sees the curve of her rump, her haunches with knees thrust forward, golden fur ruffling her rib cage. Her tail twitches, knocking over his pottery wheel.
Edwin could accept that — a puma downtown. Why not? With a lair on Telegraph Hill where the cliff falls too steeply to build condos and the weeds grow thick. A puma could account for lost pets and lost children.
She’s not a puma.
The furred rib cage sweeps up into smooth shoulders. The spine of a big cat arches into a woman’s spine. Her skin is pale as milk, her biceps like a body builder’s. The human arms, elbows flush on the tabletop, are nude-smooth. Each outstretched human finger is tipped with more of those long, glistening nails. Or claws.
She smiles at him. Golden hair springs out around her face in disheveled tufts. Black pupils expand in her silver eyes. Her nose slopes long, her mouth full and wide. She licks her lips, the pink flick of a tongue.
In a husky voice, she says, “It has legs, but never runs. What is it?”  p. 186-7

The story then details his sexual relationship with the creature, the constant riddles it poses him, and a later encounter with his ex-partner, Nikki, and her boyfriend. The story is a very good one till that point but I rather wish it had gone in a different direction thereafter. That said, it is still a strong piece.
Children of Xanadu by Juan Paulo Rafols is a resistance story set in a future Chinese hegemony. The latter aspect of the story is initially made clear by a striking passage at the beginning of the story, when the narrator is sailing to the offshore hi-tech city of Xanadu:

My presence was tolerated on the viewing deck where, fortuitously, I was left alone. The other passengers were bureaucratic functionaries, offduty military, and their related families. Those who did notice me assumed I was one of the serving staff.
While on the viewing deck, I noticed that the vessel was off-course. Instead of following the general contours of Palawan to the southwest, the ship cut into choppy sea. The afternoon sun was at our back and the green of distant slopes faded to blue. I tugged on the sleeve of a passing sailor and asked about our destination.
“Sightseeing.” The sailor’s teeth flashed. My stomach knotted in realization. Of course hydrofoils to Xanadu would be made to take this detour.
The other passengers anticipated this, too, or else they had already known. They streamed on deck from their compartments — a parade of dress uniforms, airy cotton shirts, summer dresses, and straw hats. Mothers unfolded umbrellas, protecting the hue of their pale children. Pairs and families populated the railing.
They did not have long to wait. The first ruin could have been mistaken for a squat mountain of rock, jutting from the sea at an angle. Crawling vines obscured its contours; layers of kelp accumulated at its base, giving it the appearance of something melted. It was only when the hydrofoil fell beneath its shadow that one could clearly make out the shattered windows, the bent antennas, the bridge, and the metal twisted by impact. Waves became uncertain eddies as they passed over the slanted, submerged flight deck.
The wreck of the CVN Gerald R. Ford had been driven by current into the tablemount of the Reed Bank. Mist receded; what had appeared to be islands and shoals revealed themselves to be the remains of the U.S. Seventh Fleet. A flock of gulls spiraled about a gutted flight tower. Beneath, silver fish schooled amidst broken hulls. It was a graveyard for more than just ships. Tens of thousands of men fought and died here. Their remains added to the bedrock, buried by coral.  p. 199-200

The narrator is a Filipino doctor who works on a eugenics program that uses children who are kept in virtual reality tanks and artificially aged before being disposed of. The results of the genetic research are used by wealthy Chinese to competitively equip their children to advance in the ruling meritocracy.
This is an impressive (and longer than normal) début which uses a variety of SFnal elements to produce a convincing setting, has a well-realised narrator, and a plot structure that works in conjunction with all these elements. l look forward to seeing more from this writer.
The Two-Choice Foxtrot of Chapham County by Tina Connolly is a short and original rural fantasy about an unmarried young woman who gets pregnant with a stone baby:

Suzie never was one for chasing the boys, that was the funny thing. She told me later she’d been sent to get a packet of tobacco for her da at the general store. And there was Tony, sorting out the threepenny nails from the fourpenny screws, and their eyes met over the hogshead fulla metal and that was that.
There’s only two choices if you’re gonna have a stone-baby, a course.
The first one, and best one, is you get the daddy to marry you, and if you’re quick enough, you can catch most of it in time. Sure, the baby’s born with a little flint toe, or a patcha marble back of her left elbow, but that ain’t too uncommon in this town. Mildred Percy’s got a whole swatch of granite on her skull, where the hair don’t grow. She combs it over and we pretend we don’t notice. Our fathers maybe give Mildred’s mother an extra wink in the grocery store, and we pretend we don’t notice that too.  p. 241-242

Starlight Express by Michael Swanwick, according to the introduction, appeared in both Esli magazine in Russian and Science Fiction World in Chinese before its first English language publication here. It is set in the Rome of a future, post-peak Earth. One of the creations left from earlier days is the Starlight Express:

His apartment overlooked the piazza dell’Astrovia, which daytimes was choked with tourists from four planets who came to admire the ruins and revenants of empire. They coursed through the ancient transmission station, its stone floor thrumming gently underfoot, the magma tap still powering the energy road, even though the stars had shifted in their positions centuries ago and anyone stepping into the projector would be translated into a complex wave front of neutrinos and shot away from the Earth to fall between the stars forever.
Human beings had built such things once. Now they didn’t even know how to turn it off.  p. 246

No one has arrived on the Starlight Express for generations, until one day Szetta steps off the platform and is taken in by Flaminio, the narrator.
The rest of the story details his infatuation with her and what is discovered about her origins. This story is on the slight side but works well enough; in particular (spoiler) the ending convincingly limns the ennui that can be caused by losing ‘the one.’

The cover, Starlight Express, is another superior piece by Maurizio Manzieri. There are Cartoons by Danny Shanahan, Nick Downes, Arthur Masear, and S. Harris, none of which did much if anything for me.
I got on with Books to Look For by Charles de Lint more than I normally do, probably because there is more contextualisation than normal, as well as a number of the titles which sound interesting (books by Seanan McGuire, A. G. Carpenter, and the Thorne Smith-ish Playing with Fire by R. J. Blain).
Books by James Sallis covers two titles, including The Night Ocean by Paul La Farge, a review whose synopsis just left me confused.
Vanishing Act by Pat Murphy and Paul Doherty is a short science essay about invisibility cloaks, which starts by examining the flounder (a fish that camouflages itself against the sea floor).
On Finding Her Inner Kaiju by Kathi Maio is an informative column about the movie Colossal and the work of its director Nacho Vigalondo.
Curiosities: The Great Demonstration, by Katharine Metcalf Roof (1920) by Robert Eldridge examines what sounds like an interesting piece of supernatural fiction.

A solid issue after a lacklustre start.  ●

_____________________

This magazine is still being published! Subscribe: F&SF subs / Amazon UK, USA / Weightless Books.

Edited 16th July 2019: formatting changes.

rssrss

Leave a Reply

This site uses Akismet to reduce spam. Learn how your comment data is processed.

Science Fiction Monthly v03n03, March 1976

ISFDB link

Executive Editor, Pat Hornsey; Editor, Julie Davis

Fiction:
Schwartz Between the Galaxies • reprint novelette by Robert Silverberg ∗∗∗+
Reaching Out • short fiction by Garry Kilworth
Compensating Factor • short fiction by Robert Wells

Non-fiction:
Cover • by Roger Dean
Interior artwork • by Chris Foss, John Higgins, Tony Roberts, Mark Lowden, Robert Burton, A. R. Lowe, Roger Dean (6), Adrian Arnott, Tony Masero
Introduction
The Metamorphosis of Robert Silverberg
• essay by Brian Stableford
News • by Julie Davis
A Boy and His Dog • film review by R. A. Ashford
Paperbacks on Trial • book reviews by Maxim Jakubowski and others
Review: Views by Roger Dean • by Jenny Jacobs
Letters
The Query Box
• essay by Walter Gillings [as by Thomas Sheridan]

The fiction in this issue starts off with Schwartz Between the Galaxies by Robert Silverberg (Stellar #1, 1974), which was published to mark Silverberg’s appearance as that year’s British Eastercon GOH.
Schwartz is an anthropologist who travels the lecture circuit in a homogenised future Earth:

Then a smiling JAL stewardess parts the curtain of his cubicle and peers at him, jolting him from one reality to another. She is blue-eyed, frizzy-haired, straight-nosed, thin-lipped, bronze-skinned — a genetic mishmash, your standard twenty first-century-model mongrel human, perhaps Melanesian-Swedish-Turkish-Bolivian, perhaps Polish-Berber-Tatar-Welsh. Cheap intercontinental transit has done its deadly work: all Earth is a crucible, all the gene pools have melted into one indistinguishable fluid. Schwartz wonders about the recessivity of those blue eyes and arrives at no satisfactory solution. She is beautiful, at any rate. Her name is Dawn — O sweet neutral non culture-bond cognomen! — and they have played at a flirtation, he and she, Dawn and Schwartz, at occasional moments of this short flight. p. 2

He laments that this homogenisation has effectively killed his profession, and in his lectures he proselytises for a diversity of subcultures, while unconvinced it will happen:

Clinging to the lectern, he outlines the programme he developed in The Mask Beneath the Skin. A rebirth of tribalism without a revival of ugly nationalism. The quest for a renewed sense of kinship with the past. A sharp reduction in nonessential travel, especially tourism. Heavy taxation of exported artefacts, including films and video shows. An attempt to create independent cultural units on Earth once again while maintaining present levels of economic and political interdependence. Relinquishment of materialistic technological-industrial values. New searches for fundamental meanings. An ethnic revival, before it is too late, among those cultures of mankind that have only recently shed their traditional folkways. (He repeats and embellishes this point particularly, for the benefit of the Papuans before him, the great-grandchildren of cannibals.)
The discomfort and confusion come and go as he unreels his themes. He builds and builds, crying out passionately for an end to the homogenisation of Earth, and gradually the physical symptoms leave him, all but a faint vertigo. But a different malaise seizes him as he nears his peroration. His voice becomes, to him, a far-off quacking, meaningless and foolish. He has said all this a thousand times, always to great ovations, but who listens? Who listens? Everything seems hollow tonight, mechanical, absurd. An ethnic revival? Shall these people before him revert to their loincloths and their pig-roasts? His starship is a fantasy; his dream of a diverse Earth is mere silliness. What is, will be.
p. 3

Throughout all this, Schwartz falls in and out of a reverie about a Golden Age spaceship, packed with different species:

With the Antarean not-male beside him, Schwartz peered through the viewport, staring in awe and fascination at the seductive vision of the Capellans coiling and recoiling outside the ship. Not all the passengers on this voyage had cosy staterooms like his. The Capellans were too big to come on board; and in any case they preferred never to let themselves be enclosed inside metal walls. They travelled just alongside the starship, basking like slippery whales in the piquant radiations of space. So long as they kept within twenty metres of the hull they would be inside the effective field of the Rabinowitz Drive, which swept ship and contents and associated fellow travellers toward Riegel, or the Lesser Magellanic, or was it one of the Pleiades toward which they were bound at a cool nine lights? He watched the Capellans moving beyond the shadow of the ship in tracks of shining white. Blue, glossy green, and velvet black, they coiled and swam, and every track was a flash of golden fire.

Even on the fantasy spaceship the question of his own identity, and his contribution to this proposed revival of ‘ethnic tribalism’ plagues him:

‘A Jew,’ the Antarean said. ‘You call yourself a Jew, but what is that exactly? A clan, a sept, a moiety, a tribe, a nation, what? Can you explain?’
‘You understand what a religion is?’
‘Of course.’
‘Judaism — Jewishness — it’s one of Earth’s major religions.’
‘You are therefore a priest?’
‘Not at all. I don’t even practise Judaism. But my ancestors did, and therefore I consider myself Jewish, even though . . .
‘It is an hereditary religion, then,’ the Antarean said, ‘that does not require its members to observe its rites?’
‘In a sense,’ said Schwartz desperately. ‘More an hereditary cultural subgroup, actually, evolving out of a common religious outlook no longer relevant.’
‘Ah. And the cultural traits of Jewishness that define it and separate you from the majority of humankind are . . . ?’
‘Well . . .’ Schwartz hesitated. ‘There’s a complicated dietary code, a rite of circumcision for newborn males, a rite of passage for male adolescents, a language of scripture, a vernacular language that Jews all around the world more or less understand and plenty more, including a certain intangible sense of clannishness and certain attitudes, such as a peculiar self-deprecating style of humour . . .’
‘You observe the dietary code? You understand the language of scripture?’
‘Not exactly,’ Schwartz admitted. ‘In fact I don’t do anything that’s specifically Jewish except think of myself as a Jew and adopt many of the characteristically Jewish personality modes, which, however, are not uniquely Jewish any longer — they can be traced among Italians, for example, and to some extent among Greeks. I’m speaking of Italians and Greeks of the late twentieth century, of course. Nowadays . . .’ It was all becoming a terrible muddle. ‘Nowadays . . .’
‘It would seem,’ said the Antarean, ‘that you are a Jew only because your maternal and paternal gene-givers were Jews, and they . . .’
‘No, not quite. Not my mother, just my father, and he was Jewish only on his father’s side, but even my grandfather never observed the customs, and . . .’
‘I think this has grown too confusing,’ said the Antarean. ‘I withdraw the entire inquiry. Let us speak instead of my own traditions. The Time of Openings, for example, may be understood as . . .’
p. 3

In the end (spoiler) it appears as if Schwartz undergoes a physical or mental breakdown, or both, and the story ends in the fantasy world with him, the Antarean, and all the passengers spilling out of the ship to joyously join the Capellans.
The first time I read this as a teenager I loved it (I got a real sense of wonder high off of it) but I didn’t feel the same way this time around, perhaps because I’m not entirely sure what the story is about. One unlikely theory I have is that, on one level, it may be a metaphor for SF fans escaping the mundanity of the ‘normal’ world for the diversity of fandom (the story did place third in that year’s Locus poll and was also a Hugo finalist). Or perhaps I should just take it at face value: Silverberg is known for his worldwide travel: perhaps this is just a genuine lament for the McDonaldisation of the world that was occurring in the mid-1970s.

The story is followed by an essay, The Metamorphosis of Robert Silverberg by Brian Stableford, which is a heavyweight but lucid examination of Silverberg’s work, as shown in this passage where Stableford shows how the writer progressed from the ironic endings of his earlier stories:

‘To See the Invisible Man’, was the best piece Silverberg had produced to date. Its protagonist is punished for repeated transgressions of the law by expulsion from society: he is declared ‘invisible’. The condition, he finds, has both advantages and disadvantages: he can steal or play the voyeur without interference, but he cannot get medical help and is cut off from all human intercourse. In a sense, he is godlike in his ability to interfere mischievously in the ordered lives of others, but he is also totally vulnerable — if he goes too far, ‘accidents’ may happen. In the end, it is the torment of being unable to communicate which triumphs over all other aspects of the situation, and his torture is complete when even another invisible man refuses to recognise him. When his sentence ends, he is approached by that same invisible man, who has by now learned what the other man had learned and pleads for recognition in his turn. After an agonised moment of decision he embraces the man, and goes to trial facing probable condemnation for a second time.
The situation at the end of ‘To See the Invisible Man’ permits the invocation of the same irony so characteristic of Silverberg’s early work, but it is rejected. The theme destroys the method, and the actual meaning of what is happening in the story forbids its trivialisation. The mousetrap is unsprung, the invisible man does not turn away to confirm the neatness of situation and system, and the implications of the central idea are left naked. Silverberg invites the reader to be more interested in the problems of the character than those of the storyteller.
p. 10

Reaching Out by Garry Kilworth has Captain Flashbender sent to recce a far-off alien planet. Two previous attempts have failed, the last explorer having gone mad and flown his ship into the sun on return from the mission. Captain Flashbender is an unusual choice for a pilot as he is blind; he does, however, have a probe that comes out of his head that gives him a crude, shadowy type of ‘sight.’
When he gets to the planet (after several years) he lands and starts surveying. During his EVA he is ‘attacked’ by a creature and his probe breaks. Although now he is totally blind, he continues to gather samples before returning home. En route he gets the computer to destroy the film taken of the planet.
The reveal at the end (spoiler) is that he has deduced that the creature on the planet was a dog-analogue—he has realised on the trip home that it did not attack him but licked his cheek. He erased the film as he does not want to be responsible for the invasion and destruction of the planet by humanity.
This early effort by Kilworth is overlong and is rather contrived.

Compensating Factor by Robert Wells has an indigenous alien delegation turn up at a mining company headquarters on the planet M19. They are represented by another species of alien that looks like a cat,1 and it files a complaint that stops work:

‘Clearly my clients have every justification for complaint. Look at the proximity of that waste to the river! Quite inexcusable! I can’t see any way such dumping could avoid polluting the flow and hence the sea, in due course.’
Ensor felt his mouth very dry. Some way he had to start talking to this cat about a deal. ‘Do they care?’ he said harshly. ‘And what about the waste from their mining? They don’t do anything pretty with it.’
‘They don’t use radioactive crackers or chemical solvents,’ said the cat icily. ‘And they’re mining the ore because you want it. It’s of no interest to them. You should be educating them, setting an example.’
‘So the scenery gets spoiled for a while,’ said Ensor irritably. ‘Listen, the Insosi draw a very good royalty on the pronucleon we take out. It’s not as if M19 was over-populated. So this area gets spoiled, polluted. Their crops don’t grow; the fish don’t breed. With the credit they draw it’s no problem to move some place else.’
‘Typical,’ Sinn murmured. ‘Typical. Quite a few species are like it. You find them around. Never mind
the pattern of the economy. Never mind evolution. Never mind ecology. If there’s something you want, go in and get it. Spoil! Pollute! Lay waste! Don’t worry, we’ll pay you not to notice!’
p. 27

One of the human managers later tries to bribe the cat and, when that doesn’t work, tries to bully him into submission. After that the humans fly in another of the natives from Sinn’s planet, Reror, and it turns out to be an even larger version of a ‘cat.’ When the two ‘cats’ first meet (spoiler) the larger chases the smaller and eats it.
Apart from this ridiculous ending, the story has unpleasant and crudely drawn characters, and, by the by, I don’t like that the amoral and rapacious humans win. I suspect this one came from Well’s reject pile, and had been everywhere else before appearing here.

The best of the Interior artwork is provided by the Cover (a striking piece) artist Roger Dean, who contributes several other works to illustrate Review: Views by Roger Dean, an article on his new book by Jenny Jacobs.2

The other artwork is a sometimes lacklustre selection by Chris Foss, John Higgins, Tony Roberts, Mark Lowden, Robert Burton, A. R. Lowe, Adrian Arnott, and Tony Masero. With the colour reprints you definitely get the feeling that they are beginning to scrape the bottom of the barrel.
News by Julie Davis starts with an explanation about the magazine’s price rise to 50p.3 This is followed by news of a poster offer which will be in the next issue (and which I didn’t take up at the time, alas). Various writer and book news follows.
A Boy and his Dog by R. A. Ashford is an interesting review of a movie I’ve never seen:

According to the author, surely the most critical judge, the film is a faithful version. In order to achieve this, though, mountains had to be moved. A mountain, 43,000,000 lbs to be precise, was actually moved 82 miles to the Coyote river bed. The set itself covered 4½ miles and was filled with 4,700 tons of building materials, to create the setting of a world devastated by a fourth world war. Impressive as these figures are, except for a single shot of a half-buried car and some sunken telephone poles, the extent of the effort put into creating the world is not apparent in the film. This is to the film’s advantage; the aura of desolation is relegated to the background, providing a setting for the story, yet not becoming the story itself. p. 12

Paperbacks on Trial by Maxim Jakubowski and others uses the grid-box method of multiple reviews I’ve commented on before:

As ever, it is interesting to not only see the average ‘score’ each book gets, but each reviewers’ likes and dislikes (why did John Clute not particularly rate Robert Silverberg’s Dying Inside for instance?)
The Letters column this month has Ian Butterworth miss the point of Paperbacks on Trial, and there are a couple of letters responding to John Bronsan’s savaging of Space: 1999: John X. Hind mostly agrees, while (inexplicably) C. Morris defends the program (probably the worst piece of TV SF I have ever seen).
The Query Box by Walter Gillings runs its usual reader questions and his expert answers.

An okay issue, with the Silverberg material improving the overall quality.

1. The Well’s story’s tenuous connection to cats gives me an excuse to post a photo of Layla (I’ve already posted a photo of the other cat I am a full-time butler to, Troy):

2. Roger Dean is an atypical example of an SF artist: you couldn’t miss his many album covers and posters in the 1970s, but I can’t remember him appearing on an SF paperback or magazine cover apart from this one.
3. There was a lot of inflation in the mid-1970s as a result of the OPEC oil price increase. The magazine had debuted at 25p at the beginning of 1974 and had then been 30p, 35p and 40p per issue before this rise.

rssrss

2 thoughts on “Science Fiction Monthly v03n03, March 1976

  1. Todd Mason

    Roger Dean did appear as the cover artist on THE WORLD FANTASY AWARDS Volume 2, edited by Fritz Leiber and Stuart David Schiff, published by Doubleday but perhaps not even seeing an SFBC reprint…and they make a point of stating that Dean took a Big pay cut to provide that cover. No paperback. No other reprint.

    Reply

Leave a Reply

This site uses Akismet to reduce spam. Learn how your comment data is processed.

Astounding Stories v20n05, January 1938

ISFDB
Archive.org

_____________________

Editor, John W. Campbell Jr.

Fiction:
Ormoly of Roonerion • novelette by Nelson Tremaine [as by Warner Van Lorne] –
The Voice out of Space • short story by Clifton B. Kruse –
Dead Knowledge • novelette by John W. Campbell, Jr. [as by Don A. Stuart] ∗∗∗
Pithecanthropus Rejectus • short story by Manly Wade Wellman ∗∗∗+
Red Heritage • novelette by John Russell Fearn ∗∗
Whispering Satellite • short story by John Russell Fearn [as by Thornton Ayre] –
Galactic Patrol (Part 5 of 6) • serial by Edward E. Smith ∗∗
The Mental Ultimate • short story by John Russell Fearn [as by Polton Cross] –

Non-fiction:
Cover • by H. W. Wesso
Interior artwork
• by Jack Binder (7), H. W. Wesso (4), Elliott Dold, Jr. (2)
In Times to Come
Power Plants of Tomorrow: Harnessing the Sun’s Rays
• essay by Willy Ley
Rocket Flight • essay by Leo Vernon
Mutation • editorial by John W. Campbell, Jr. [as by The Editor]
Science Discussions and Brass Tacks • letters

_____________________

When I recently wrote a review of the October 1937 Astounding, it was with a “70th anniversary of the beginning of John W. Campbell’s editorship” fanfare, only to discover that Alva Rogers’ claim that it was Campbell’s first issue was incorrect.1
With this issue, however, Campbell is a visible presence—one of the letters in Brass Tacks is addressed to him by name, and the writer, Louis Kuslan, mentions that he heard of the new editor’s appointment in The Science Fiction Fan.
On p. 4 there is also a new feature started by Campbell (and one that still runs in the magazine today), In Times to Come:

There is also an editorial by Campbell, Mutation:

Normally an editor’s first issue is described as the one that has their name on the masthead of the magazine (the part that lists the editors, publishers, etc.), regardless of whether they acquired the stories or prepared that issue for publication.2 However, at that time Street & Smith did not print a masthead on their magazines. My contention is that—given the above—Campbell’s name would also have been on the masthead of this issue if there was one. Your view may vary.3

The fiction leads off with Ormoly of Roonerion by Nelson Tremaine, who presumably used the Warner Van Lorne pseudonym as he was the brother of the previous editor, and the then new Editorial Director at Street & Smith, F. Orlin Tremaine.4 The story’s protagonist, Jack, sees a strange light in the sea and he is repeatedly drawn back to search for it over the next few days. When he eventually spots it again he realises that it is coming from a tiny cigar-shaped vessel:

Slowly the water receded until the bright spot lay on the sand — and it was growing larger! It expanded as the man watched until it was several inches long. It seemed to draw slowly away at the same time, and Jack took several hurried steps forward.
He almost fell and discovered he was standing on rocks larger than his feet! He could not understand; there was little room for anything in his mind, but that he must absorb as much of the strange light as he could.
When the object had grown in size, so that he looked straight ahead, he stepped forward again. It appeared to be metal now, and almost cigar-shaped. The light came from many small openings in the silvery material.
Once more Jack started forward, but now he had to climb over boulders so huge that the ship was almost out of sight when he dropped into the hollows between. A few feet from the ship he stopped on top of the highest. The strange hull was enormous now. It stood fully sixty feet high and several times that length.
Port holes, a foot in diameter, were visible, with rays coming from several. As the ship ceased to expand, the lights faded until they gave only a faint glow.  p. 9

What is really happening here is that Jack (spoiler) is shrinking. This is eventually revealed as a surprise twist at the end but is obvious from the detail here and further on in the story.
When Jack finally goes on board he meets two green-skinned, golden-haired people (an older man and attractive woman). There is then a long undersea journey where Jack learns their odd customs and language and, later, how to run the ship.

When the ship reaches its home port they find war has broken out with the neighbouring Salikans. Jack plays a pivotal role in defeating them before he is told that he is the Ormoly, the man chosen for the woman on board the ship (apparently their ‘vibrations’ match).
This is relatively clearly written but uninspired, formulaic stuff.5

The Voice out of Space by Clifton B. Kruse is another clunker, although it starts quite well with two scientists in a high-altitude balloon taking photographs of the stars. Then they hear an odd sound shortly before they are hit by a meteorite and lose one of their ‘helium-radiants’ (balloons).
The rest of the story is about their return to Earth and the discovery of an electrostatic alien life form in the recovered meteorite.

Dead Knowledge by John W. Campbell, Jr. is about three spacemen who come upon an abandoned city on an alien planet.6 When they start exploring they find that the humanoid inhabitants have committed suicide by poisoning themselves. They fly to another two cities and find a similar situation.

They retreat back into their spaceship and lift into orbit, where they discuss the situation, and agree that they should spend three months exploring and investigating the planet before returning to Earth. However, just as they are away to eat a long overdue meal, two of them find the third dead. He has used the same poison that the aliens used in the cities . . . . Later, another of the two also kills himself.
The climax comes when the last crew member realises (spoiler) he is being taken over by an alien intelligence. There is no poison left for him, but we find out at the end that (a) he had booby-trapped the ship to explode when the FTL drive shut down on arrival at Earth and (b) he has left a message about the alien menace in a heat proof container.
On the plus side this is an atmospheric and at times eerie story; the negatives are that it is a bit slow-moving to start, and the last couple of pages are a little unclear.
Note that this idea of an almost undetectable alien menace taking possession of humans would reappear a few months later in Campbell’s classic story Who Goes There? (Astounding Science-Fiction, August 1938).

Pithecanthropus Rejectus is by Manly Wade Wellman, whose work of this period was standard pulp fare, or at least that was what I thought from both the little I’ve read and what I’ve gleaned from Science Fiction Encyclopedia. This story belies that assumption with a work that is not only the stand out of the issue, but which is also an early example (possibly one of the earliest) of an ‘Uplift’ story (Science Fiction Encyclopaedia: “[Uplift] tends to denote an assisted leap of Evolution – specifically, the raising of nonsentient or otherwise handicapped beings to a level of Intelligence or technological capability comparable to or exceeding humanity’s.”)7
The narrator in this story is a surgically altered ape called Congo, who is raised in a human family by the doctor who performed the changes. The doctor is an unsympathetic character, but his wife isn’t:

Once or twice Doctor scowled, and once I overheard him talking to Mother just beyond the nursery door. I understood pretty well even then, and since that time I have filled in details of the conversation.
“I tell you, I don’t like it,” he snapped. “Showering attentions on that creature.”
She gave him a ready laugh. “Poor little Congo!”
“Congo’s an ape, for all my surgery,” he replied coldly. “Sidney is your son, and Sidney alone. The other is an experiment—like a shake-up of chemicals in a tube, or a grafting of twigs on a tree.”
“Let me remind you,” said Mother, still good-natured, “that when you brought him from the zoo, you said he must live here as a human child, on equal terms with Sidney. That, remember, was part of the experiment. And so are affection and companionship.”
“Ah, the little beast!” Doctor almost snarled. “Sometimes I wish I hadn’t begun these observations.”
“But you have. You increased his brain powers and made it possible for him to speak. He’s brighter than any human child his age.”
“Apes mature quickly. He’ll come to the peak of development and Sidney will forge ahead. That always happens in these experiments.”
“These experiments have always been performed with ordinary ape-children before,” said Mother. “With your operations you’ve given him something, at least, of human character. So give him something of human consideration as well.”
“I’m like Prospero, going out of my way to lift up Caliban from the brute.”
“Caliban meant well,” Mother responded, reminding him of something I knew nothing about. “Meanwhile, I don’t do things by halves, dear. As long as Congo remains in this house, he shall have kindness and help from me. And he shall look to me as his mother.”  p. 68-70

Nevertheless Congo is eventually sold to the world of show business and tours the world as an exhibit. At one point he escapes into the African bush and finds his own kind:

After more days, I found my people, the Kulakambas.
They were as they had been in the dream, swinging in treetops, playing and gathering food. Some of the younger ones scampered through the branches, shrilling joyfully over their game of tag. They talked, young and old—they had a language, with inflections and words and probably grammar, I could see a little village of nests, in the forks of the big trees; well-made shelters, with roofs over them. Those must have been quickly and easily made. Nothing troubled the Kulakambas. They lived without thought or worry for the next moment. When the next moment came they lived that, too.
I thought I would approach. I would make friends, learn their ways and their speech. Then I might teach them useful things, and in turn they would teach me games. Already the old dream was a reality and the civilization I had known was slipping away—like a garment that had fitted too loosely.
I approached and came into view. They saw, and began to chatter at me. I tried to imitate their sounds, and I failed.
Then they grew excited and climbed along in the trees above me. They began dropping branches and fruits and such things. I ran, and they followed, shrieking in a rage that had come upon them from nowhere and for no reason I could think of. They chased me all that day, until nightfall. A leopard frightened them then, and me as well.
I returned, after many days, to the town by the sea.  p. 73

The climactic scene occurs when Congo is playing the part of Caliban in Shakespeare’s The Tempest. Before one of the performances the Doctor visits, and he tells Congo of his plan to repeat his experiment with many more subjects. Congo (spoiler) kills the doctor and the police take him away. The fact that he is only an animal and not subject to, or protected by, human law leads to his tragic end.
This is an impressive piece, and holds up quite well. Apart from the mature treatment of the theme, and a repeated reference to Shakespeare’s The Tempest, the prose is a definite cut above the usual pulp product.

The second half of the magazine has no less than three stories by John Russell Fearn, two under pseudonyms. They are all pretty awful so I will try to be brief.8 The first, Red Heritage, is under his own name, and starts with two chapters where an alien scientist on Venus speaks to an assembled group about the environmental disaster they are experiencing. Rather than move to Mars (which may involve fighting the locals), the plan is to steal their water and air instead:

At length Kil-Dio spoke: “Gravity, as we well know, is as much a force as cosmic rays, light or heat. It has definable limits and its power can be increased or decreased at will—that we know from our levitators, which lift easily against the pull of gravitation. Also, we know it from our space machines which shield gravity and hurl us away from any gravitational field. We know that, even as ordinary radio waves can be heterodyned, so can a correct force operate to ‘heterodyne’ gravitational fields and render the part in question entirely free of gravitation. This, then, is our plan:
“Across space, directly to [Mars], we shall project a heterodyning beam, which, when it strikes [Mars], will encompass some one thousand miles of surface area. This heterodyning beam will be the exact center of what we might call a sudden uprushing vortex of water and funnel of force. That is to say, this funnel will be a beam having walls of vibration solid enough to withstand the sudden uprushing vortex of water and air. Obviously, with part of [Mars] degravitated and this force funnel immediately over that part, the air and oceans will be sucked up our force tunnel by the normal process of following the line of least resistance. But for our force tunnel they would spew Sunward, hence the presence of the tunnel to hold them in one fixed path, until they deluge down on the surface of this world.”  p. 80-82

Fortunately, this turgid data-dumping stops when the third chapter switches to the viewpoint of a Martian called Petlo, who is underground when the force tube strikes. He gets home to find his wife and son sheltering in the cellar.
After the attack ends, Petlo organises the survivors. In time he works out what has happened, and plots his revenge. A rocket is sent to Venus’s moon to blow it up, and send the spore infested debris to Venus. Meanwhile, Petlo puts huge anodes and cathodes into the poles of the planet and sends a pair of survivors to Earth with a racial memory that will enable them to trigger the device many generations later.
The last part of the story has one of the descendants recover those implanted memories. He watches Venus, and then, conveniently, sees the post-spore survivors of Venus head for Mars, where they aim to settle and this time hoover off the atmosphere of Earth. The Earthman sends a radio signal to turn on the polar battery: the remaining Venusian survivors fry.
The Martian section is more readable than the beginning and has a certain narrative verve, but the ridiculous plot has more holes than a colander.

Whispering Satellite is the second offering by Fearn and appears under his Thornton Ayre pseudonym. This actually has a good hook:

“Rocked in the cradle of the deep, I lay me down in peace to sleep—”
The flawless, basso-profundo voice ceased. Clark Mitchell stopped humming the tune that had prompted those notes and looked up across the crude table toward the great, heavy-stemmed flower standing in the Saturnshine streaming through the window.
Sometimes he rather regretted the time two earth-years before when he had taught this particular product of Titan’s Whispering Forest to sing. He knew it did it by air suction through its broad yellow face, vibrating in turn on hairlike vocal cords, but he’d never quite gotten over the uncanny effect of it.  p. 97-98

It then goes downhill with one of Fearn’s characteristic opening astronomical data-dumps (there is one in the previous story, too: “Venus, revolving once in 720 hours, was a world without clouds, without protection from a Sun only 63,000,000 miles away”):

Two years on Titan had done much to orient Clark into the strangeness of this little satellite flying round its primary in 15 days, 22 odd hours—a little desert island of a world, bathed in the torrid heat of Saturn 770,000 miles distant. Unlike Jupiter, the ringed world has cooled less swiftly and pours its warmth on its whole retinue of moons.  p. 98

The potboiler plot involves Clark’s crashed spaceship, his having been framed for murder on Earth by a woman he still loves, her appearance on the planet with her drunken father, and their perilous journey to the latter’s spaceship before the native ‘blue-biters’ nibble them to death.

The last Fearn story, this one as by Polton Cross, is The Mental Ultimate. This is another potboiler with a lot of makey-up super science, this time about a man with a massive intelligence who works his way through all the sciences, making various profound discoveries. Later, the narrator finds he can kill with a thought and manipulate matter. He then time-travels before eventually ending up in the far-future where he meets the last man on Earth, who proceeds to drone on about the narrator’s intelligence before telling him why he is shrinking—oh yes, I should have mentioned that daftness earlier.

This penultimate part of Galactic Patrol by Edward E. Smith has a mixture of good and bad parts, but mostly the latter. Kinnison passes out when he gets back to his ship after fighting the wheel-like aliens, but manages to contact the Admiral who organises a rescue. When Kinnison wakes up he finds himself in hospital, where he is a terrible patient (and, it would seem, a fourteen old one at that):

In a few days Kinnison was fully and alertly conscious. In a week most of the pain had left him, and he was beginning to chafe under restraint. In ten days he was “fit to be tied,” and his acquaintance with his head nurse, so inauspiciously begun, developed even more inauspiciously as time went on. For, as Haynes and Lacy had each more than anticipated, the Lensman was by no means an ideal patient. In fact, he was most decidedly the opposite.
Nothing that could be done would satisfy him. Ail doctors were fatheads, even Lacy, the man who had put him together. All nurses were dumb-bells, even—or specially?—Mac, who with almost superhuman skill, tact and patience had been holding him together. Why, even fatheads and dumb-bells, even highgrade morons, ought to know that a man needed food!
Accustomed to eating everything that he could reach, three or four or five times a day, he did not realize—nor did his stomach—that his now quiescent body could no longer use the five thousand or more calories that it had been wont to burn up, each twenty-four hours, in intense effort. He was always hungry, and he was forever demanding food. And food, to him, did not mean orange juice or grape juice or tomato juice or milk. Nor did it mean weak tea and hard, dry toast and an occasional softboiled egg. If he ate eggs at all he wanted them fried—three or four of them, accompanied by two or three thick slices of ham.
He wanted—and demanded in no uncertain terms, argumentatively and persistently—a big, thick, rare beefsteak. He wanted baked beans, with plenty of fat pork. He wanted bread in thick slices, piled high with butter, and not this quadruply-and-unmentionably-qualified toast. He wanted roast beef, rare, in great chunks. He wanted potatoes and thick brown gravy. He wanted corned beef and cabbage. He wanted pie—any kind of pie—in large, thick quarters. He wanted peas and corn and asparagus and cucumbers, and also various other worldly staples of diet which he often and insistently mentioned by name.
But above all, he wanted beefsteak. He thought about it days and dreamed about it nights. One night in particular he dreamed about it— an especially luscious porterhouse, fried in butter and smothered in mushrooms—only to wake up, mouth watering, literally starved, to face again the weak tea, dry toast, and, horror of horrors, this time a flabby, pallid, flaccid poached egg! It was the last straw.
“Take it away,” he said, weakly; then, when the nurse did not obey, he reached out and pushed the breakfast, tray and all, off the table. As it crashed to the floor, he turned away, and, in spite of all his efforts, two hot tears forced themselves between his eyelids.

It’s hard to know what to make of this ridiculous (but highly entertaining) passage, and I don’t know if I was more struck by (a) that hundreds of years in the future humans are still eating exactly what they did in the late 1930s, or (b) the image of a Lensman lying in a hospital bed blubbing because they bring him a poached egg on toast for breakfast and not something more to his taste. That said, I would wager this food fantasy passage read very differently to Astounding’s post-depression era audience.
After Kinnison recovers he goes to speak to Admiral Haynes:

“Well, sir, I am feeling a trifle low, but if you and the rest of them still think—”
“We do so think. Cheer up and get on with the story.”
“I’ve been doing a lot of thinking, and before I go around sticking out my neck again I’m going to—”
“You don’t need to tell me, you know.”
“No, sir, but I think I’d better. I’m going to Arisia to see if I can get me a few treatments for swelled head and lame brain. I still think that I know how to use the Lens to good advantage, but I simply haven’t got enough jets to do it. You see, I—” He stopped. He would not offer anything that might sound like an alibi; but his thoughts were plain as print to the old Lensman.
“Go ahead, son. We know you wouldn’t.”
“If I thought at all, I assumed that I was tackling men, since those on the ship were men, and men were the only known inhabitants of the Aldebaranian system. But when those Wheelmen took me so easily and so completely, it became very evident that I didn’t have enough stuff. I ran like a scared pup, and I was lucky to get home at all. It wouldn’t have happened if— “He paused.
“If what? Reason it out, son,” Haynes advised, pointedly. “You are wrong, dead wrong. You made no mistake, either in judgment or in execution. You have been blaming yourself for assuming that they were men. Let us suppose that you had assumed that they were the Arisians themselves. Then what? After close scrutiny, even in the light of after-knowledge, we do not see how you could have changed the outcome.”
It did not occur, even to the sagacious old admiral, that Kinnison need not have gone in. Lensmen always went in.
“Well, anyway, they licked me, and that hurts,” Kinnison admitted, frankly. “So I’m going back to Arisia for more training, if they’ll give it to me. I may be gone quite a while, as it may take even them a long time to increase the permeability of my skull enough so that an idea can filter through it in something under a century.”
“Um-m-m.” Haynes pondered. “It has never been done. They are a peculiar race, incomprehensible—but not vindictive. They may refuse you, but nothing worse—that is, if you do not cross the barrier without invitation. It’s a splendid idea, I think; but be very careful to strike that barrier free and at almost zero power—or else don’t strike it at all.”  p. 126-127

When Kinnison gets to the planet, the Arisians let him through the barrier and he then undergoes a period of mental gladiatorial training, until such time as he can block his Arisian sponsor’s mental attacks. This section is the best part of the instalment as we find out more about the enigmatic Arisians.
Kinnison then goes and tries out his expanded powers on a nearby pirate base, as well as back home, where he mind-wrestles four other Lensmen and wins. Later, he tries two other men for murder, reading their minds and executing the guilty one. This latter is another example of the almost casual brutality of the so-called good guys in this novel, a trait I’ve mentioned before in a review of an earlier instalment.

The last chapter has Kinnison back at the pirate base, where he overhears that a hospital ship has been captured. He discovers, by mentally taking over the comms guy, that Mac the head nurse is on it. He rescues her from the captain while letting Mac know it’s him. He then foments a fight between the base commander and the comms guy.
One of the weaker of the six instalments.

The crude Cover is by Wesso, who also contributes Interior artwork along with Jack Binder (brother of Eando Binder), and Elliott Dold, Jr. Wesso’s illustrations look the best to me but I also liked a couple of Binder’s.

Power Plants of Tomorrow: Harnessing the Sun’s Rays by Willy Ley is an interesting science article looking at, believe it or not, alternative power sources, and for the usual reasons:

Professor Bernard Dubos had studied the problem of harnessing solar energy for many years before he delivered his famous lecture. He had studied the steadily increasing energy demands of civilization. He knew that the natural resources were dwindling rapidly. At the World Congress of Geologists, in 1913, it had been estimated that there would be no coal left in about a thousand years. In England and in Germany the resources would last only for about 200 years; in America for a little over 1500 years; in other countries for even shorter periods of time. This statement had been called pessimistic by others, because there are certainly still large unknown coal deposits in Africa, Asia and possibly on the Antarctic Continent. On the other hand, the demand for power had increased much more rapidly than it had been thought. It appeared probable that the World Congress of Geologists had even been optimistic.  p. 64

An estimate which has to be called conservative says that 1,000,000,000 h.p. will yell for fuel in 1970. Another 1,000,000,000 h.p. in automobiles, airplanes and ships is to be added to this figure. In 1970 there will be hardly any natural oil left and the coal deposits will probably be reserved for the chemical industries that need them much more badly than anybody else. In short, the situation is serious. New sources of power will have to be found and exploited to the utmost.  p. 65

The article concentrates on two proposed solar power projects, one of which is a direct application:

His power plant utilizes the fact that air on a hot plain, say an African desert, is hotter and denser than that one or two miles above the plain.
Actual measurements show that there is a difference of pressure of not less than 6.5 inches of mercury between sea level and 6500 feet altitude. If it were possible to build a large chimney, 6000 feet high, on such a plain, the “compressed” air at set level would try to escape through it. It would rise upward in the chimney with a speed about three times as fast as that of the strongest natural cyclones.
Such a chimney is a technical impossibility, if one thinks of it as standing free. But Dubos does not propose a free-standing chimney, even though his demonstration before the French Academy of Sciences may suggest the thought. He thinks of a long tube leaning against a steep mountain slope. The wind tube is to have a diameter of about 35 feet. At its bottom it is to flare out into a glass roof like that of a large hothouse, so that additional heat is built up. Since it is essential that the air, while rushing upward in the tube, does not lose much of its heat, the tube should not be constructed of metal. Light concrete suggests itself, therefore, because it has all the features desired: heat insulating properties, low price, light weight and sufficient resistance.
Dubos’ invention is not only amazingly simple, it also has the advantage of being easy to construct. There are no technical difficulties at all involved in the construction of wind tube and glass roof. One might only say that wind turbines of the size and of the capacity needed have not been built before. Unfortunately, the invention is not generally applicable. It assumes a mountain of medium height in the immediate vicinity of a deep-lying hot plain.
But these conditions prevail on many parts of the Earth where electric power would be welcome; Dubos himself thought principally of the Atlas Mountains in North Africa.
The session of the French Academy of Sciences ended with unanimous approval of Dubos’ ideas and a recommendation of his plans as a feasible means to harness solar power.  p. 65-66

The other project involves pumping water from the Mediterranean over the mountains to the Sea of Galilee (208 meters lower) or the Dead Sea (394 metres lower), producing hydroelectric power on the way down, with the water finally evaporating from the Dead Sea, or being used for irrigation.

Rocket Flight by Leo Vernon is another interesting article, this time on the mathematics of space flight. I didn’t follow all the algebra (my differential calculus days are long behind me) but it is fascinating to see this pre-spaceflight number-crunching, and the practical conclusions the author manages to deduce from the math:

First we might try putting more fuel in the rocket, but probably everybody will agree that it would be unreasonable to have more than the original weight made up of fuel. The second is that it will be best to try to increase the exhaust velocity. The third is the observation that it is advisable to get up and away as quickly as possible. The slower the rocket starts, the better chance gravity has to act on it and pull it back—with the consequence that still more fuel will be needed to build up to a high velocity.
It really looks as if the vital factor is exhaust velocity. With the present experimental values given by Ley, it would be possible to get a rocket up at fair velocity. But it couldn’t go very far out and have enough fuel left to make a decent landing. That won’t prevent us, though, from using our imaginations. It is always possible that in the not-too-distant future experimenters will find that higher exhaust velocity.  p. 112

A practical conclusion drawn by the author is that for actual flight into space, with a chance of getting back safely to Earth, he would want to be guaranteed an exhaust velocity of at least 160,000 feet per second before entering the rocket. p. 114

I looked to see if I could find an exhaust velocity figure for Vostok 1, but the data provided uses different measures. In any event the author’s calculations are challenged in later letter columns.

In Science Discussions there is a letter about time-travel, followed by Campbell’s reply (as Arthur McCann) to his own article on atomic power plants. He discusses the economics of power supply before philosophically musing about the benefits of research:

Research is not wasted human effort, because it can never be truly called unsuccessful. Though the desired goal may not be attained, the knowledge that the attempted course is a blind alley is valuable wisdom; it may, for instance, prevent the building of that unsuccessful atomic power plant that would stand a useless monument to human effort honestly expended, and forever lost to Man’s advancement.
Capital is concentrated human effort: interest the measure of its return in lightened labor. That is the only way to determine whether a thing is an advancement or a retrogression in Man’s evolution.  p. 153

Brass Tacks has a number of letters welcoming the return of the column (which has not appeared recently), and there are comments about the fiction and artwork. Galactic Patrol, and Arthur Burke’s novella, The Golden Horseshoe (November 1937), draw praise; de Camp’s The Isolinguals (September 1937) gets a couple of pans.

In conclusion, not a particularly good issue but an interesting one.
P.S. The reason there is a seasonal advert below is that I had originally planned this post on the 21st of December, which I thought was the magazine’s 70th anniversary until I noticed that I’d looked up the copyright date for the January 1939 issue and not the January 1938 one (the 15th December 1937). There is nothing like a missed deadline to take the wind out of your sails. . . .

_____________________

1. Alva Rogers states in A Requiem for Astounding:

The September, 1937 issue of Astounding was to be Tremaine’s last as editor.
[. . .]
At first there was nothing to intimate to the average reader that a change in editors had taken place: the magazine in those days did not list the name of the editor on the contents page as it was to do later. The “flavour” of the magazine in the last three issues of 1937 was still that of Tremaine, and remained so, substantially, until Tremaine left Street & Smith in May of 1938 and his backlog of stories was used up.  p. 48-49

There is much more specific information about Campbell’s early editorship in Fantasy Commentator #59/60, Spring 2011, by Sam Moskowitz and A. Langley Searles (available at Lulu.com and highly recommended). It has one article, Inside John W. Campbell, which uses his letters to Searles between 1936 and 1952, ‘as interpreted and annotated by Sam Moskowitz’:

For the sake of history, Campbell establishes beyond rebuttal the date he became editor of Astounding Stories. On Astounding Stories stationary, labeled “Editorial Department”, dated October 5, 1937, a letter was received by Swisher which said simply: “Dear Mr. Swisher; Hiya, Bob!” and signed “Sincerely, John W. Campbell, Jr., Editor.”
Swisher, his closest friend, had no indication that Campbell had been negotiating for the position. Tremaine, promoted out of the editorial capacity, needed a replacement in a hurry. Campbell was always under foot, and having been tutored by Mort Weisinger in some of the technical aspects of editing, as well as known to be on an almost desperate search for a job, was a likely candidate. Later information indicated that his starting salary was $30 a week.  p. 60-61

2. Avram Davidson’s first issue as editor of F&SF (April 1962) used stories bought by the previous editor Robert P. Mills. See footnote 4 here.

3. Fantasy Commentator #59/60 has this on what Campbell was doing in his first weeks in the job:

[Oct. 24] “I’m working on the editorial for the January, 1938 issue (apparently the first that Campbell had any editorial involvement with) and I’m announcing that the next issue, February, 1938, will be a ‘mutant’ issue, and the first of others to come. Watch for it! Ballyhoo! Hey-hey! And so forth…The change in this case is going to be the cover: For some months, I’m going to try to run a series of covers that will be genuine art-work, first-class work with none of the lurid-color idea that mags have been using. The subject of the first cover will be, for instance, Saturn as seen from Mimas (a moon) in accurate, astronomically calculated representation. It will illustrate a story, too (That cover was actually the Sun as seen from Mercury illustrating ‘Mercutian Adventure’ by Raymond Z. Gallun).”  p. 61-62

[Oct. 24] “I have finished Galactic Patrol.
[. . .]
“You know, one of the problems of editing is correction of the author’s manuscript. Now, what should one do with ‘space ship’? Should it be spaceship, space ship, or space-ship? And rocket tube? And rocket ship? And should “Earth” be capitalized? And can you have an earthquake on Mars? And do Martian plants grow in rich, black earth? And is Kinnison Kimball a gray Lensman, or a Gray Lensman?
“For awhile, I’m tied down by editing policy used in Galactic Patrol, which must be consistent, and with which the mag has to be consistent. But after February (1938). I’m going to cut loose and do some high and mighty deciding.”  p. 62

[Oct. 24] “We’re running a Fearn novelette in the January (1938) Astounding (‘Red Heritage’). It isn’t perfect, we know— I’ve tried to eliminate most of the utterly cracked ideas—but remember, we have to fill the mag, and that a lot of birds who pay two solid silver dimes for it like Fearn’s stuff.”  p. 62-63

[Oct. 30] “Re Fearn: I delighted in bouncing one of his wilder maunderings, “Wanderers of Ray” in which he had a super-science race build the solar system as a matter of convenience, then gave them space-ships so weak they had a helluva time pulling out of the gravity of Saturn. I took one of his, ‘Red Heritage,’ (Astounding Stories, January 1938), that really wasn’t too bad.
[. . .]
“I’m going to pass some. I know now I’ll have to. For instance: Binder’s new story, ‘The Anti-Weapon’. Actually, I’m allowing his anti-weapon—which happens to have an inconsistent, but actually unimportant explanation—as motivation for an interesting story.”  p. 65

Moskowitz’s observation about the January issue being the first that Campbell had any editorial involvement with is contradicted earlier in the same letter:

[Oct 30] “That ‘Time Contractor’ thing was purchased, edited, and set in type before I came along (by Eando Binder, Astounding Stories, December, 1937). Tremaine didn’t realize that (Dr. Ernest Orlando) Lawrence was a genuine, living character (the inventor of the cyclotron, 1931). I went over the pages and did some drastic and expensive rearranging on that thing as it was. What came out was real mild to the little honey Binder originally had (the entire incredibly dull story read like one of Campbell’s scientific explanations in one of his super science epics). Binder had his character discovering radio-elements, positrons, and various other things several years before Lawrence, and beat the Englishman to the neutron (the Englishman was named— I’ve forgotten it) . . .”  p. 65

So there is also an argument for the December issue being Campbell’s ‘first’. Other people point to the March 1938 issue—when the magazine changes its name from Astounding Stories to Astounding Science-Fiction (see also Campbell’s comments from October 24th about his intention to ‘cut loose and do some high and mighty deciding’ after the February issue). You could also point to later in 1938:

[May 18] “Street & Smith got a new president. The new president tired Mr. Blackwell, ex-Editor-in-Chief and Mr. Tremaine, ex-assistant-Editor-in-Chief. Rearrangements and changes followed, naturally, with the result that I am now all of Astounding. There isn’t any more. No assistants, no readers, no nobody. For a week or so me and the cat with flypaper on all four paws were about equally busy.
“Anyhow, that began to simmer down and quiet, when I found it necessary to stir it up a little more and wish some work on the ‘staff.” (That meant that until October, 1938 the strong influence of Tremaine’s direction would continue to be felt, after that it would be predominantly Campbell. His letters confirm what I wrote in my article ‘The Face of Facts,’ in Redd Bogg’s magazine. Skyhook, for Summer, 1952. At the time it was believed that Tremaine had left Astounding when Campbell was brought aboard in October, 1937. Tremaine extended his stay until May, 1938. This was also supported by an interview included in the above-cited article. Until Tremaine left, Campbell was acting as first reader on the choice of stories, submitting those he thought best to Tremaine who made the final decision. Of course, if Campbell slipped up on a good story and rejected it without ever showing it to Tremaine, a competitor got it. Tremaine’s reasons for leaving were exactly those stated in Campbell’s letters.)  p. 87

4. According to ISFDB F. Orlin Tremaine also used the Warner Van Lorne pseudonym on one occasion.

5. Whether it was the quality of his work or other factors, Nelson Tremaine’s short career as an Astounding writer was coming to an end: he would appear once more in the magazine with The Blue-Men of Yrano in the January 1939 issue. There were a few appearances in other magazines and that was it.

6. Fantasy Commentator #59/60 has Campbell explaining to Swisher the genesis of his story in this issue:

[Oct 04] Tremaine, when I last called on him, suggested that he needed a 12,000 word story within six days—would I please oblige. Ye Gods! I hadn’t an idea on tap—having just finished ‘Cloak of Aesir’, and having it home waiting, I felt all caught up. Stewed for three of the six days trying to get an acceptable idea to start with. A Don A. Stuart story plot wanted—in a hurry. Try it sometime. The harder you want ideas, the blanker your mind gets. Finally I got one, and set to work. High pressure work, but working kinda latish. Of course, to add to the fun Dona rejected the first five starts, by which time we were both groggy with words.  p.59

7. The ‘Uplift’ page at SFE is here. Wellman’s story doesn’t get a mention but last issue’s Mana by Eric Frank Russell does, even though the Uplift theme only surfaces at the end of what is essentially a last-man-on Earth piece. I’d also reference Wellman’s story ahead of de Camp’s soon to appear (and also mentioned at SFE) ‘Johnny Black’ stories too.

8. Fearn has three stories in this issue and one in the next, then, as far as I can see, never appears in Astounding again. Initially, I thought this was Campbell dumping all the pulp writers he didn’t like (as mentioned before Van Lorne was another who would contribute only one more story) but Campbell’s comments above would seem to belie this idea.  ●

Edited 18th November 2019, added artwork and links, and changed formatting.

rssrss

Leave a Reply

This site uses Akismet to reduce spam. Learn how your comment data is processed.

Vortex v01n04, April 1977

ISFDB link

Editor, Keith Seddon

Fiction:
The End of All Songs (Part 4 of 4) • serial by Michael Moorcock
Act 1, Scene 3,000,000 and Counting . . . • novelette by J. K. Dixon
The Fall of Xierozogenes • short story by Jocelyn Almond [as by Carol Bewley]

Non-fiction:
Cover • by Eddie Jones
Interior artwork • Eddie Jones, Michelle Robson, Jocelyn Almond, Terry Brace, Richard Glynn Jones
Editorial • by Keith Seddon
And I Type Rather Fast . . . : An Interview with Michael Moorcock • by Mark Ambient
Book Reviews • by John Grubber, Jocelyn Almond
Stop Press . . . Next Issue

The final instalment of The End of All Songs by Michael Moorcock1 starts with two long chapters which are almost entirely taken up with Amelia’s continued attempts to accept her relationship with Jherek and  adjust to life at the End of Time. These matters have surfaced before, and her lack of success in coming to an accommodation becomes even more wearying and joyless here. This material is quite at odds with the rest of the novel, and at times reads like a deranged version of something out of Woman’s Romance (if there is such a magazine).

There is a brief respite from all this in the third chapter, where the Duke of Queens marries Sweet Orb Mace. The idea spreads like wildfire through the denizens of the End of Time and they all join in with enthusiasm, as Jherek finds out:.

Mistress Christia, the Everlasting Concubine, laughed a tinkling laugh, as was her wont. She was surrounded by Captain Mubbers and his men, all dressed in the same brilliant powder-blue she wore, save for strange balloon-like objects of dull red, on elbows and knees. “Lord Jagged rescued them, I gather, and I insisted that they be my special guests. We are to be married, too, today!”
“You — to them all!” said Amelia in astonishment. She blushed.
“They are teaching me their customs.” She displayed the elbow balloons. “These are proper to a married Lat female. The reason for their behaviour, where women were concerned, was the conviction that if we did not wear knee-and elbow-balloons we were — um?”
She looked enquiringly at her nearest spouse, who crossed his three pupils and stroked his whiskers in embarrassment. Jherek thought it was Rokfrug. “Dear?”
“Joint-sport,” said Rokfrug almost inaudibly.
[. . .]
“And we are to be Mr. and Mr. Mongrove-de Goethe!” It was Werther, midnight blue from head to toe. Midnight blue eyes stared from a midnight-blue face. It was rather difficult to recognize him, save for his voice. Beside him lounged in an attitude of dejected satisfaction the great bulk of Lord Mongrove, moody monarch of the weeping cliffs.
“What? You marry? Oh, it is perfect.”
“We think so,” said Werther.
“You considered no one else?”
“We have so little in common with anyone else,” droned Mongrove. “Besides, who would have me? Who would spend the rest of his life with this shapeless body, this colourless personality, this talentless brain . . . ?”
“It is a good match,” said Jherek hastily. Mongrove was inclined, once started, to gather momentum and spend an hour or more listing his own drawbacks.
“We decided, at Doctor Volospion’s fairground, when we fell off the carousel together, that we might as well share our disasters . . .”
“An excellent scheme.” A scent of dampness wafted from Mongrove’s robes as he moved; Jherek found it unpleasant. “I trust you will discover contentment . . .”
“Reconciliation, at least,” said Amelia.
The two moved on.
“So,” said Jherek, offering his arm. “We are to witness three weddings.”
“They are too ludicrous to be taken seriously,” she said, as if she gave her blessing to the proceedings.
“Yet they offer satisfaction to those taking part, I think.”
“It is so hard for me to believe that.”
They found Brannart Morphail, at last, in unusual finery, a mustard-coloured cloak hanging in pleats from his hump, tassels swinging from the most unlikely places on his person, his medical boot glittering with spangles. He seemed in an almost jolly mood as he limped beside My Lady Charlotina of Above-the-Ground (her new domicile).
“Aha!” cried Brannart, sighting the two. “My nemesis, young Jherek Carnelian!” The jocularity, if forced, was at least well-meant. “And the cause of all our problems, the beautiful Amelia Underwood.”
“Carnelian, now,” she said.
“Congratulations! You take the same step, then?”
“As the Duke of Queens,” agreed Jherek amicably, “and Mistress Christia. And Werther and Lord Mongrove…”
“No, no, no! As My Lady Charlotina and myself!” p. 27

Unfortunately, this reversion to the cheerier and more comic aspects of the novel does not endure. In the last chapter Jagged tells Jherek and Amelia that he can send them to the beginning of time so they can live a simpler life. However, they will not have access to Power Rings, and will only live for several generations before dying. They choose to go.

The story finishes with the couple going for a final stroll along a seaside promenade that Amelia creates, before heading for the beginning of time.
An exasperating finish, and a disappointing end to the trilogy.
Act 1, Scene 3,000,000 and Counting . . . by J. K. Dixon is yet another contribution to this magazine from a OSW (one-shot wonder, a writer who only ever published one story in the SF field).

This story has a group of so-called experts descending into a huge underground excavation in England called the Burrow, which is being built to house 20 million people, the residents only coming above ground for work or leisure. I say ‘so-called experts’ as I’m not exactly sure what it is they are meant to do on their survey: they seem to spend their time either data dumping or bickering with each other:

‘I have a theory,’ Dobson declared behind him. ‘I’ve noticed lately that life follows a definite pattern—’
‘Knit one, purl one,’ offered Wilkins from the front, shouting over his shoulder.
‘—which derives from the type of existence we lead.’
‘Tell me mo’, brother Moses!’ said Emma.
The van turned a corner and everyone lurched to one side, righted themselves, swore at Wilkins.
‘Because of the crush of population,’ Dobson continued, ‘none of us has any sense of external privacy. I know this to be true of myself. I never have the time to think clearly and extensively for any great period of time. If I was a research technician this would be fatal, of course. Where would I obtain the information and inspiration to continue my studies?’
‘The Reader’s Digest,’ someone suggested. There was general laughter.
‘What conclusions do you draw, Doctor Freud?’ asked Sarah. Tyce stole a glance at her eyes—they were slightly red in the sockets.
‘I maintain that each of us builds his own world of privacy inside his head, and the outside world becomes nothing more than an incidental affair, a world of scenes, of happenings, which affect our inner worlds only slightly. It feeds us information like computer-tape with which we populate our hallucinations. Experience becomes fragmented, arbitrary, each event a little nugget of fact from which we draw conclusions and add depth to our inner sanctums.’
‘You’re saying that each of us is only part here?’ asked Emma. Her hair fell in a curtain to one side as she cocked her head at the geologist.
‘That’s right. The weight of population, the closeness of our existence, conspire to make us withdraw into ourselves, to fragment our experience of the outside world into units of information to be digested and processed and altered to fit our concept of the world as it exists.’
‘What we have here,’ commented Emma, ‘is a basic lack of understanding.’
‘That’s right, that’s right!’ said Dobson. He was becoming excited. ‘A failure to transmit our basic logic-structures—’
‘What I mean,’ said Emma, ‘is that I don’t understand a word you’re rattling on about.’ p. 17

Running parallel to this is team leader Tyce’s infatuation with one of the woman on the team, Sarah, who is unhappily partnered to someone else but still unavailable.
The climax occurs when (spoiler) a vast re-echoed sound causes the team members to experience hallucinations. Predictably Tyce’s are fantasies, some sexual, about Sarah.

This is overlong, and the interpersonal relationships exhibited by the team are unbelievable due to their wild dysfunctionality. I’d give it some credit for ambition, though (it has a number of New Wave quirks, both stylistic and typographical).

The Fall of Xierozogenes by Jocelyn Almond2 is that rarest of things in this magazine: a story I actually liked. It tells of a nobleman called Morgbraith travelling through the mountains to kill the last dragon. He is accompanied by a barbarian aide who senses his reservations:

‘ ’Tis said,’ Norlan remarked presently, ‘that the Monstrous Thrawn was the deformed offspring of the Dragons: a degenerate, wingless creature, crawling upon the surface of the earth like a worm.’
‘So it is said,’ Morgbraith agreed.
‘And so the Dragons rejected it and disowned it as a child of their noble blood, and cast it out to live alone and wretched in the wilderness.’
‘So it is said,’ Morgbraith assented.
‘The Dragons felt no pity for the weak,’ Norlan observed. ‘Pity is the sentiment of weaklings for weaklings. Men and Dragons do not pity.’ He was silent for a while, then, turning to Morgbraith a face ash grey in the ghastly light, he said gravely: ‘Remember that, Boy.’
And Morgbraith raised his eyes to the grim, grey crags of the mountains and thought of the ancient, solitary creature that he knew to be lurking somewhere in the darkness of the mountains’ shadows: the Dragon which had dwelt there alone, years beyond numbering, the last of his noble race, brooding in the deep caverns of his forefathers. And Morgbraith knew that Norlan knew what he thought, and he said quietly: ‘I shall remember it.’ p. 43

When Morgbraith finally enters the dragon’s cave the encounter does not turn out as he expects. A minor piece, but I rather liked this poignant tale.

This issue’s cover is my favourite of Vortex’s short run, and it surely must be one of Eddie Jones’s best pieces. It makes this issue really look like an SF magazine. There is an unadorned copy of the painting on the rear cover.

The Interior artwork is by some expected names (Eddie Jones, Michelle Robson, and Jocelyn Almond) and some previously unseen here: Terry Brace produces some professional level work for Dixon’s story, and Richard Glynn Jones has a few decorating the interview with Michael Moorcock.
The Editorial by Keith Seddon is another one where he gets into categories and labels again, and he also mentions he is receiving a lot of speculative fiction submissions:

As an Editor I find myself in the position of Intermediary between the Writer and the Reader. The material which is submitted for publication in VORTEX might be divided into three categories; Science Fiction, Fantasy and Speculative Fiction. A large proportion of the material I receive would be placed in this last category, which new form of writing is now superseding the older forms of SF. Much of the new Speculative Fiction I refer to is poorly written. The exploratory nature of it naturally tends towards experimental efforts by amateurs. Nevertheless, there is much of this type of material of an acceptable standard that has been rejected by VORTEX because of our present policy of publishing a variety of types of that which has previously been grouped as SF. It seems that other terms such as ‘Gothic’ and “Surrealistic’ are now needed to apply to styles within the new category of Speculative Fiction which at present is extended to a wide range of literature. p. 1

And I Type Rather Fast . . . : An Interview with Michael Moorcock by Mark Ambient (my memory is that this was a pseudonym for the editor, but I can’t point to anything to confirm this) mostly has Moorcock talking about writing and Jerry Cornelius.

Keith Seddon follows the interview with a sidebar review of The Condition of Muzak, where he manages to say almost nothing about the book other than that it isn’t as good as The English Assassin. He recommends it nevertheless.
There are a couple of pages of Book Reviews by John Grubber and Jocelyn Almond. John Grubber spends most of his panning The Time of the Hawklords by Michael Moorcock & Michael Butterworth, before doing a volte face in the penultimate paragraph:

If you can stagger through the bad grammar, the weak vocabulary and the flagging dialogue of this review, you might be able to stand up to The Time Of The Hawklords.
Despite all its technical faults and its ridiculous plots (or, maybe, because of it) this book is fun to read, and a pleasant way to cure insomnia.
The book proves that The Day Of The Amateur is in no way over. p. 47

Jocelyn Almond is less than impressed with Spock Messiah:

To resurrect an old idea in a new form that lacks the original novelty and enthusiasm is about as satisfying as digging up your grandmother’s grave to see if she would look any fresher in a new dress. I am sure that there are many other Star Trek fans who would agree when I say that if we cannot have Star Trek as it was. we would rather not have it at all than make do with its bastard offspring of poor TV cartoons, stories adapted from the original scripts and uninspiring novels.
Nevertheless Star Trek was and will continue to be a standard. In its heyday its widespread appeal opened up the SF genre to a new and more diverse audience than had previously attempted to explore science fiction. Whilst the nostalgia that surrounds Star Trek remains, books like Spock Messiah will continue to sell, though I’m afraid that this last bandwagon trek through the wild west of Kyros, complete with Red (Kyrosian) Indians is more than enough for me.
There is one consolation: believe it or not, and you probably won’t. Captain Kirk does not get the girl. Is there some mistake, or can it be a genuine attempt to break with the old tradition? It could be that poor old Kirk is just worn out after all these years. p. 48

Stop Press . . . Next Issue promises a lurch towards very traditional SF with its line-up for issue #5. Leading off will be the first part of The Chaos Weapon by (Carnell) New Worlds and New Writings in SF stalwart Colin Kapp. Also appearing will be the known if new-ish writer Terry Greenhough3, and unknown writer Mark Ambient. Also promised is an interview with this month’s cover artist Eddie Jones.

Probably the best issue of the magazine so far.


1. Michael Moorcock provides a short but interesting introduction to the paperback edition of The Dancers at the End of Time, 2003, where he discusses the characteristics of Jherek Carnelian as compared to the other heroes in his multiverse. He goes on to briefly discuss and recommend The British Barbarians by Grant Allen, 1895, which has a time-traveller from the future confronting the social mores of the day.
Before Moorcock gets to all this, he starts with an amusing, self-deprecating anecdote:

This book, a particular favourite of mine, is my homage to the inspired dandyism of our fin-de-siecle, to The Savoy, The Yellow Book, Beardsley, Beerbohm, Dawson, Whistler, Harland and, of course, Oscar Wilde. I had a passion for Wilde and Firbank in my late teens. For a while I took to wearing oddly-cut jackets and trousers, dipping carnations in green ink and dusting my embarrassingly robust features with talc in the hope of looking paler and therefore more interesting.
As a result of this obsession I had the first pair or Edwardian flared trousers (made by Burton) as well as the first high-button frockcoat to be seen in London since 1910. I like to think I suffered a little for my passion and boldly wore my suit where none before dared pose, ignoring all commentary or expressions of amusement, until one day Keith Roberts, author of Pavane, remarked approvingly how in that suit I had the bluff domestic air of a Hamburg Zeppelin commander and irrevocably damaged my romantic self-image. When bell-bottom trousers became the general style, I packed away my suit, laid a symbolic green carnation on top and left it to be eaten by maggots in the same Ladbroke Grove basement which ultimately returned all my best-loved finery to nature and which is still occupied, I believe, by the ghost of Mrs Cornelius.

2. I found out that Carol Bewley was a pseudonym for Jocelyn Almond on Amazon:

There is a short introduction to the story in the book:

The Fall of Xeirozogenes was first published in April 1977 in the fourth issue of a British science fiction and fantasy magazine, Vortex. At the time, I was twenty years of age, and later that year I married the editor, Keith Seddon.
Over the years, many strange rumours about Vortex have spread abroad, most of them absurdly untrue. One of the rumours was that the editor wrote all the stories himself! This is ridiculous, but it is, however, true that there was a shortage of good work available — only about one in a hundred stories submitted to the magazine was of publishable standard, so that it was necessary to augment this slightly. For this reason I wrote The Fall of Xierozogenes and it was published in the magazine under the pseudonym of Carol Bewley, though the illustrations bore my real name. I chose ‘Carol’ because I was a great fan of Lewis Carroll, and still am. ‘Bewley’ was inspired by the stately home, Beaulieu in Hampshire, which I happened to have visited shortly before.

Almond died in 2014, having suffered from chronic rheumatoid arthritis from the age of 25, a condition that resulted in her husband becoming her long-term carer. If you want to know more about her life after this story, I suggest you read Dark Gifts from Black Isis, which is Appendix I in Keith Seddon’s book Another Grief Observed (you can read it through the ‘Look Now’ function on Amazon but, be warned, it is a very bleak account).

3. I recognised Greenhough’s name when I first got this magazine as I had read his previous stories in Science Fiction Monthly, November 1975 (Artist) and Andromeda #1, 1976 (Doll).

rssrss

2 thoughts on “Vortex v01n04, April 1977

  1. Keith Dixon

    Great to come across this 45 years after the story was published! Unfortunately, I was only a One Shot Wonder because Gerald Flood, my wonderful agent, couldn’t place any of my novels. But now I’m writing crime novels, the next one to be published by Spellbound Books next January; Killing the Invisible.

    Reply

Leave a Reply

This site uses Akismet to reduce spam. Learn how your comment data is processed.

Asimov’s Science Fiction #500/501, September/October 2017

ISFDB link

Other reviews:
Greg Hullender and Eric Wong, Rocket Stack Rank
Chuck Rothman, Tangent Online
Sam Tomaino, SF Revu
Various, Goodreads

Editor, Sheila Williams; Assistant Editor, Emily Hockaday

Fiction:
Wind Will Rove • novelette by Sarah Pinsker
Riding the Blue Line with Jack Kerouac • short story by Sandra McDonald
Universe Box • reprint novelette by Michael Swanwick +
First Contact • short story by Stuart Greenhouse
Dead Men in Central City • short story by Carrie Vaughn
Arriving at Terminal: XI’s Story • short story by James E. Gunn
The Ganymede Gambit: Jan’s Story • short story by James E. Gunn
Zigeuner • short story by Harry Turtledove
The Fourth Hill • short story by Dennis E. Staples
The Cabinet • short story by William Preston
An Incident in the Literary Life of Nathan Arkwright • short story by Allen Steele
Squamous and Eldritch Get a Yard Sale Bargain • short story by Tim McDaniel
Grand Theft Spacecraft • novelette by R. Garcia y Robertson
Disturbance in the Produce Aisle • short story by Kit Reed
Books of the Risen Sea • novelette by Suzanne Palmer

Non-fiction:
Cover • by Cynthia Sheppard
Thirty-First Annual Readers’ Awards’ Results • essay by Sheila Williams
Readers’ Award Winners
The Last Hittite
essay by Robert Silverberg
Remembering Bertie • essay by James Patrick Kelly
Poetry • by John Richard Trtek, Bethany Powell, Robert Frazier, Jane Yolen, Robert Borski, Leslie J. Anderson
Next Issue
On Books: Outside America
• by Norman Spinrad
SF Conventional Calendar • by Erwin S. Strauss

Wind Will Rove by Sarah Pinsker is about a history teacher on a generation spaceship who is a member of an old-time band (fiddles, guitars, etc.). There is one song, Wind Will Rove, that is particularly important to her, and an account of the song’s origins and its historical and current variants is used throughout the story as a metaphor, illustrating not only the fluidity of history but also the schism between those on the generation ship who think that Earth history is important and those who think it is no longer relevant. This latter conflict manifests itself in the story in two ways: one is is a disruptive pupil in the narrator’s history class; the other is repeated reference to a historical ‘Blackout’ on the ship, an event where all the ship’s media, literature, history, etc. data banks were wiped out.

This story is verifiable history. It begins, “There once was a man named Morne Brooks.” It’s used to scare children into doing their homework and paying attention in class. Nobody wants to be a cautionary tale.
There once was a man named Morne Brooks. In the fourth year on board, while performing a computer upgrade, he accidentally created a backdoor to the ship databases. Six years after that, an angry young programmer named Trevor Dube released a virus that ate several databases in their entirety. Destroyed the backups too. He didn’t touch the “important” systems—navigation, life support, medical, seed and gene banks—but he caused catastrophic damage to the libraries. Music gone. Literature, film, games, art, history: gone, gone, gone, gone. Virtual reality simulation banks, gone, along with the games and the trainings and the immersive recreations of places on Earth. He killed external communications too. We were alone, years earlier than we expected to be. Severed.
For some reason, it’s Brooks’ name attached to the disaster. Dube was locked up, but Brooks still walked around out in the community for people to point at and shame. Our slang term “brooked” came from his name. He spent years afterward listening to people say they had brooked exams and brooked relationships. I suppose it didn’t help that he had such a good name to lend. Old English, Dutch, German. A hard word for a lively stream of water. We have no use for it as a noun now; no brooks here. His shipmates still remembered brooks, though they’d never see one again. There was a verb form already, unrelated, but it had fallen from use. His contemporaries verbed him afresh.
p. 20-21

This is an engrossing story not only about how history is important, but why newer generations do not necessarily value certain ideas or information in the same way or at all and, in any event, how that information may change as it passes down through the generations.
Riding the Blue Line with Jack Kerouac by Sandra McDonald is an atmospheric, elegiac piece about a train driver in Boston and the writer ghosts who hitch a ride in his cab: Dickens, Plath, Poe, Kerouac, etc. The driver is a Vietnam vet whose Vietnamese wife died in the conflict. One small point: I was more than halfway through the piece before realising that ‘Lieu’ was his wife and not his platoon lieutenant in Vietnam.
Universe Box by Michael Swanwick (Dragonstairs Press, 2016, but see below1) is an original fantasy that tells of a cosmic thief who steals a very special box from an entity later identified as the Demiurge, who is effectively God’s assistant. After his escape the thief arrives on Earth in the persona of Uncle Paulie, and appears at the door of Howard, a nobody who is about to propose to his girlfriend Mimi. Paulie takes them to a top floor restaurant where he shows them the box he has stolen:

Uncle Paulie turned to Howard and Mimi and said, “I have something special to show you both.” He reached into an inner jacket pocket and pulled out an object that he solemnly placed on the table before him and patted with both hands. “There. What do you think?”
It was a cigar box.
Mimi clearly wasn’t about to say anything. So Howard cleared his throat. “I don’t want to hurt your feelings, Uncle Paulie, but I’m afraid I don’t smoke cigars.”
Uncle Paulie looked shocked. “This isn’t for you, child. No, no, no, I’m just going to let you see it.”
“Oh. Okay, I guess.”
Holding up a finger, Uncle Paulie made an owlish face and said, “Let me posit a question: What one thing does the world currently need most? Eh?”
“Um . . . love?” Howard ventured.
“World peace,” Mimi said firmly.
“Pah! I’m disappointed in you both. A good bottle of wine, of course!” Uncle Paulie flipped open the lid of the cigar box and reached within. “As you doubtless know, the very finest collection ever assembled was the legendary Wine Cellar of Alexandria. Destroyed in that dreadful fire, such a pity. But no matter. I’ll just have to dig deeper.” A puzzled look came over Uncle Paulie’s face as he reached within and further within and yet further indeed, until his arm had disappeared up to the shoulder. Then his expression cleared and, leaning back, he reeled in his arm, at the end of which was an unlabeled black glass bottle upon which were scratched archaic runes. “Ahh, Amarone della Lemuria! A ‘sea-dark wine, half as old as time,’ as that drunken sot Homer put it. There’s never been a plonk like it.”
Laughing, Mimi clapped her hands. Howard scowled and grumbled, “That’s quite a trick.”
p. 46

After Howard tastes the wine he experiences an almost transcendent effect, and asks:

“What’s in there?” he gasped.
Howard meant in the wine. But misunderstanding him (whether intentionally or not, who could say?), Uncle Paulie held up the cigar box as if it were a window and opened the lid. “Everything you could desire: castles in the air, mountains on a plate, treasury bills, wisdom . . . you name it. Voluptuous goddesses, glass moons, methane seas. Dinosaurs, if that’s to your taste.
“Look.”
Howard looked. And beheld:
Endless clouds of diamond dust glittering on the deep, black velvet of infinity. Stars exploding above the frozen husks of sunless worlds. A herd of Paras aurolophus trumpeting and feeding in a grove of dawn redwoods. Wise machines drifting between galaxies, carrying in their bellies clusters of civilizations, each written on a silver disk smaller than a dime. A drunken Elizabethan poet singing and urinating from a third-story window. Nanowars being fought endlessly on the surface of a single mote of dust. A stray dog in Milwaukee gulping down a hamburger foraged from a dumpster. Trillions of integers, deep in the heart of an irrational number, pledging their love and obeisance to . . . p. 47

Later, and just before a wild orgy begins in the restaurant, Uncle Paulie asks Howard to hide the cigar box and then forget where he has put it.
The rest of the story involves the kidnapping of Mimi by an assassin working for the Demiurge—an attempt at pressuring Howard into revealing where he has put the box—and a series of meetings Howard has with a number of characters as he attempts get her back. The way he reaches these is quite novel:

Uncle Paulie thrust a rubber-banded bundle of calling cards at Howard. “Draw one at random.” Howard did. It read:

[Name Withheld]
Underpaid Minion to the Stars
by appointment only

An icy knife of wind ripped through his clothing, skin, flesh, bones. Howard found himself before a turreted stone building completely surrounded by dark forest. The night was so cold that it drove all thought of Mimi from his mind. Desperately, he hammered on the door.
A sound that could only be the flapping of great wings came from inside. Then silence. Then the door opened. The hatcheck girl from the Top of the Tooz looked down at him. “Oh,” she said. “You. Sorry. I’m busy. Cutting my toenails.”
She shut the door in his face.
Howard threw himself against the door, drumming on it with fists and forearms. “Please! Help me! I can pay! Anything that you want!”
The door opened again. “Define ‘anything,’” the hatcheck girl said.
Howard shoved past her and made straight for a baronial stone hearth in which crackled and roared a fire as big as the Renaissance. Stretching out frozen hands toward its glorious heat, he began to talk. Turning a backside so cold that it stung to face the fire, he continued. Until at last he had explained all, his body had rotated a dozen times before the blaze, and that terrible cold had retreated bone-deep within his flesh, to become a memory he doubted would ever go away.
p. 53-54

For the most part, this comic and wildly fantastic story (the kind of thing you would find in a modern-day incarnation of Unknown) is of very good to excellent quality but, unfortunately,  the ending doesn’t match up to what has gone before. (Spoiler: Gloria the assassin lets Mimi go free without protest, which doesn’t make sense, and the reason that Paulie traps Shamkat in the box isn’t revealed either. Both these make for a sub-optimal ending.)
A flawed jewel.
First Contact by Stuart Greenhouse appears on the contents page as a poem, but it is really a half page vignette about an alien. It doesn’t make much sense.
Dead Men in Central City by Carrie Vaughn is about a vampire-like creature in the Wild West meeting Doc Holliday (the gambler/gunfighter/dentist friend of Wyatt Earp) and ultimately befriending him. Quite good until it peters out at the end.
There are two more sidebar stories from James Gunn’s Transcendental series in this issue: Arriving at Terminal: XI’s Story tells the story of Xi from his birth on Xifor, his perilous survival to adulthood, and his rise through the ranks to become an assistant to Xidan. He is finally selected as a representative to find the Transcendental machine. This one is rather condensed, open-ended, and overly similar to one of the stories from last issue, Weighty Matters: Tordor’s Story. Better is The Ganymede Gambit: Jan’s Story. This one is about a hollowed out asteroid that circles Ganymede, and the eight child clones that inhabit it. Their father has sent them there with a mission to terraform the planet, and the story is about how they try to do this. Along the way (spoiler) a number of them die, and the last three are later infected with an alien symbiote evolved from Ganymedean bacteria. Their father then tasks two of them to join the ship that is searching for the Transcendental machine. This an open-ended but interesting piece, and rather reads like a modern version of a super-science story from the 1930’s.
Zigeuner by Harry Turtledove is set in Hungary, and has an SS major and his men going to a gypsy encampment to round up the occupants for transportation. The alternate world twist comes at the end (spoiler) when the major talks to a German Army rabbi, and the latter comments that if history had unfolded differently they could be the ones being transported and not the gypsies. The story is persuasive, and you may be more convinced than I was by the twist.
The Fourth Hill by Dennis E. Staples is a bleak story about a fifteen year old boy on a Native American reservation whose drunken grandfather is dying of cancer, although the boy hasn’t been explicitly told this information. The boy’s estranged brother (he is gay and the grandfather does not approve) returns home after being injured in a work-related accident. He works for a company that cleans polluted land using new technology, one that leaves huge piles of soil behind. The process used by this company sounds vaguely SFnal, and it jars somewhat  with the story’s other thread, which is the boy’s dealings with a dwarf-like spirit creature called Little Loon that lives in the nearby stream.

A voice calls to me from across the stream. “Did you lose this, Callum?”
I look up and see a little man with wild white hair and saggy gray skin. He stares at me with a big, ugly smile and begins to cross the stream. He is holding a child’s shoe.
“Which one are you?” I ask.
“Maangoons nindizhinikaaz.” He passes the shoe to me.
I grab it even though it’s covered in dirt and say thank you in Ojibwe.
Miigwech. I’ve been learning it since I was in elementary school, but in ten years I’ve really only learned animal names and how to introduce myself. And a few immature phrases like nimazhiwemin ina dibikong?
“What’s it for, Little Loon?” I say. I think I heard him right.
Maangoons means little loon.
“It’s for your feet. Your grandfather will be so happy that you found it!” I’ve never told my Grandpa about the river dwarfs, but they have been watching me for a long time.
The shoe is white with blue stripes, both faded and smudged with dirt. On the bottom there are a few plastic bulbs that held multicolored lights when I was a kid. I don’t bother to check and see if they work.
“I lost these when I was eight,” I tell the dwarf. “I gave up looking for them long ago.”
“Oh, but your grandfather! He was so mad you lost them that he hit you and sent you to bed without supper! Remember? Remember?” He sits down on a nearby rock. It feels like I’m babysitting a toddler now.
p. 103

The spirit has given the boy random objects for small favours in the past; this time the boy asks a favour of it. Initially he wants the truth about his grandfather’s illness and, later, a cure for it.
I not sure these different threads of this story weave together, but it is an absorbing if bleak work, and a promising début.
The Cabinet by William Preston is a story about a junior clerk in a German office during what would seem to be the inter-war years. He goes to see a somnambulist act at the Jahrmarkt, and listens as the sleeping man answers questions from the crowd. Later the head clerk is murdered, and then another man. The doctor running the somnambulist act is implicated.
While he is with the police the clerk goes to visit the coffin like device the somnambulist sleeps in, and lies down in it and closes the two doors. While in the box he has an epiphany. Later, he barely escapes being burnt alive when the townsfolk set fire to the surrounding shed.
This is an engaging story to start with but it runs on for too long, and I had no idea what the point was.
An Incident in the Literary Life of Nathan Arkwright by Allen Steele is a story in his ‘Arkwright’ series2, none of which I’ve read, but that was not a problem even though it is essentially an outtake from a longer story or novel. It tells of a fictional SF writer, ‘one of the Big Four,’ who attends an SF convention in spite of himself:

At age fifty-four, he’d lately begun to feel a certain distance between himself and the younger generation of writers and fans. He belonged to a generation that had come of age during the Depression and World War II, and although he’d earned a revered position in the field, he was acutely aware that the New Wave writers who’d emerged during the sixties—Moorcock, Ellison, LeGuin, Spinrad, all the rest—had become the authors SF fans were most excited about. The cultural dissonance wasn’t quite as bad as what friends like Bob Heinlein and Sprague de Camp were experiencing, but still he was having trouble relating to the new breed of SF writer who didn’t know how to handle a slide rule, or to the fans who thought science fiction was invented by Gene Roddenberry. p. 127

After deciding to dodge the banquet (too many blue jokes in GOH Andy Offutt’s previous program appearance) he meets, and is later taken out to dinner by, two fans. Things turn weird as they drive to the restaurant when the fans (spoiler) say they are time-travellers. Arkwright thinks they are deranged and humours them until the car slows down, when he makes his escape.
I liked this for the SF insider detail.3
Squamous and Eldritch Get a Yard Sale Bargain by Tim McDaniel is a gently amusing story about two book collectors called Squamous and Eldritch who are attempting to buy an occult book from an awkward woman. They manage to convince her to sell it but then they make a discovery. A pleasant but minor piece.
I was a little way into Grand Theft Spacecraft by R. Garcia y Robertson before I realised that this was the promised sequel to last issue’s novella, The Girl Who Stole Herself. This provides an alternate view of some of that story’s events.
It gets off to a reasonable start with its story of Cole, who lives on Biforost Station, which is in orbit around Europa. He gets a message from an associate and they set off on a job. Unfortunately, I made the fatal mistake of putting the story down for a while and by the time I got back to it I just couldn’t get into it again. This was for the same reasons as the previous story, mostly endless waffle about Space Vikings, Mongols, the Jutes, Crown Princess Rylla, etc.
There is a story in there (I think) about buying some kids from outer solar system slavers and returning them to their mothers, who are all working as prostitutes. The one that Cole gets involved with sounds like the Happy Hooker, and I don’t mean that in a good way. Again, with the kids/slavers/prostitutes, it is tonally off, like a light comedy set in a concentration camp.
Towards the end of the story (spoiler) the Happy Hooker reveals herself to Cole as Crown Princess Rylla, or one of her many clones at least. It finishes with a space battle against the Vikings, with all the nastiness and dying off-stage.
All style, no substance; I’m not looking forward to the sequels.
Disturbance in the Produce Aisle by Kit Reed4 is about a married man who, after arguing with his wife, goes to cool off at a local store. There, and not for the first time, an entity that is probably the devil intermittently appears and tries to bargain with him. In between these episodes he sees the ghosts of various dead people.
Books of the Risen Sea by Suzanne Palmer gets off to a pretty good start with its protagonist, Caer, holed up in his flooded, ruined library in a post-Collapse, post-Wave America. When he is not doing the things he needs to do to survive, he tries to salvage fragments of books from the water-damaged library stock. The story improves even further after a storm which reveals a functioning robot in the flotsam washed up against the walls of the library. Caer manages to direct it to a place of safety, and later manages to help it climb up a ladder and into the library.

The robot lurched up another step, grabbing hold of the rung above more easily than before. The strain on Caer’s arms as the robot let go and tried to move up, and gravity tried to pull it back down, was something he knew he’d suffer for later, but Caer was not going to let go; he’d stubborned himself into worse hurt many times before this.
Finally, the robot could hook its saw arm over the railing to brace itself. Caer stepped in to free his rope, then backed up against the library wall as the robot managed to heave itself over the top of the ladder and railing to land on its side on the balcony. Water poured out between its metal and plastic plates and ran in thick streams down the slight decline of the roof back into the sea.
“Do you have a name?” he asked it.
“Yes. Orchid-Iridium-Zero-Hexagon,” it answered.
Caer barked a laugh. “Seriously?”
“It is a self-designation,” the robot said. “I chose it after my initialization. It was a privilege to be given that choice.”
“Oh.” Caer felt suddenly like an asshole. “I didn’t mean—”
“It is okay. There is understanding and not-understanding, always.”
Now
that was truth. p. 181

Later there is a rowboat that comes out from the nearby Old Town (also flooded) to salvage any useful material from the post-storm flotsam. There is something of a slanging match between the occupants of the boat and Caer, and it becomes apparent that (a) one of them is her brother-in-law Trevor and (b) Caer was originally a woman (Trevor and another man refer to Caer as ‘she’). Later on we discover that Caer has fallen out with her father over this matter, hence her solitary existence in the drowned library.
This second half of the story involves raiders attacking Old Town. Then, one of the men from the rowboat comes back to the library seeking help from Caer, specifically shelter for her pregnant sister and the other woman of the town. Later, when it looks like the library will be attacked by the raiders, there is an amusing line when Orchid goes into the library stacks and carves up the stuck-together and hopelessly damaged books for use as projectiles on an improvised trebuchet:

Once all the paper blocks had been stacked, the robot disappeared back down for more. Caer glanced at the blocks, considered, then after a quick glance toward oldtown—no boats heading into open water yet—went back inside and rummaged through his boxes of supplies. He didn’t doubt the blocks would hold together if thrown by hand, but the stresses of being flung at the end of a fast-moving chain were another matter, and raining loose fragments of old, moldy, torn science fiction down on the raiders was not likely to give them pause. p. 191

While this adventure/action section is well enough done it is more formulaic than I had hoped (I thought the arc of the story was going to be focussed on what the robot was going to bring to Caer’s life and the book recovery project). I concede that I don’t often complain that a story has too much action and too little reflection.

There is a good Cover this issue by Cynthia Sheppard—I don’t think it illustrates any of the stories.
Thirty-First Annual Readers’ Awards’ Results by Sheila Williams is an account of the winners and the award ceremony. Towards the end she adds:

Perhaps because she had so many stories competing against each other, none of Dominica’s tales finished in the top five novelettes. A couple of days before the Readers’ Award celebration, we learned that her story, “Project Empathy,” along with Ian R. MacLeod’s, “The Visitor From Taured,” are both finalists for the Theodore Sturgeon Award. p. 5

I was surprised not only at Dominica Phetteplace’s omission from the finalists but also MacLeod’s. They were robbed.5
The Last Hittite by Robert Silverberg is an essay that, for its first half, would be a better fit for History Today (it is about the Hittites). It finally segues into an account of a futuristic and deserted America in John Ames Mitchell’s 1889 novel, The Last American.
Remembering Bertie by James Patrick Kelly is a column about time travel that mainly concentrates on H. G. Wells and his work.
The Poetry in this issue is by John Richard Trtek, Bethany Powell, Robert Frazier, Jane Yolen, Robert Borski, and Leslie J. Anderson. There are a couple that are okay but, as per usual, none really grabbed me (well, maybe Anderson’s Sleeping Beauty variant).
Next Issue has this about Connie Willis’s forthcoming I met a Traveller in an Antique Land: ‘With all the twists and turns, you’ll soon be as lost as her hapless traveller.’ I hope not.
On Books: Outside America by Norman Spinrad reviews a number of promising sounding books including Pirate Utopia by Bruce Sterling, Binti by Nnedi Okorafor, Central Station by Lavie Tidhar, and The Devourers by Indra Das. He also mentions Nebula Awards Showcase 2017, which he seems less enamoured with:

I feel it my unpleasant duty as a former president of SFWA and current reviewer to warn potential readers that one third of this eighteen-dollar anthology is not complete stories but excerpts from novels, SFWA’s self-congratulation, the history of the Nebula, lists of past winners, pages and pages devoted to lesser awards. You pays your money and you takes yer choice, but as a critic I didn’t have to. But if I did, if what I was looking for was good fiction to read and nothing else, I wouldn’t. p. 204-205

For the most part though, and after a short introduction about the dominance of American SF, the column focuses on writers who are either physically or culturally located outside the United States.

This is a mixed issue, but worth getting for the better material.

    1. I’m not sure it is fair to call this a reprint as it appeared in an edition of thirteen copies, of which only ten were on sale. There is more information at ISFDB.
    2. The ‘Arkwight’ series consists of four earlier novelettes/novellas (that all did pretty well in Asimov’s SF’s annual readers’ polls). According to the author’s website they were revised and expanded as parts one through four of the eponymous 2016 Tor novel. The ‘Arkwright’ series at ISFDB.
    3. If I am allowed to nit-pick there is one line of Arkwright’s that appears rather inconsistent: “But Nathan barely knew the young new writers—George R.R.Martin, Joe Haldeman, and Thomas Burnett Swann . . .” Swann was born in 1928 compared with Martin and Haldeman’s 1948 and 1943, so he would have been 15-20 years older than the other two. As to ‘new,’ Swann first published in 1958 compared to 1971 and 1969 for the other two. Swann had been a Hugo finalist on three occasions before they had even broken into print (Where is the Bird of Fire?, 1963, Day of the Minotaur, The Manor of Roses, both 1967). I would suggest that Swann was another generation entirely.
    4. Kit Reed passed away on the 24th of September 2017, aged 85, shortly after this story appeared. According to Wikipedia her first story was published by Anthony Boucher almost sixty years ago (F&SF, April 1958). Her ISFDB page is here.
    5. I didn’t vote in this poll, but can’t remember why—looking at the results I wish I had (and will next year).

      I thought only the David Erik Nelson story was particularly noteworthy in the novella category, although I liked Jay O’Connell’s piece.
      In the novelette group, I thought both the Dale Bailey and Karl Bunker stories very good, but would have expected to see several other works keeping them company:  Atheism and Flight and Project Synergy by Dominica Phetteplace, The Bewilderness of Lions by Ted Kosmatka, Flight from the Ages by Derek Künsken, The Visitor from Taured by Ian R. MacLeod. There are another half-dozen novelettes I would have placed ahead of the Rusch and the second of the Palmer stories.
      In the short story category I thought the best two stories won, and would have added Webs by Mary Anne Mohanraj to the finalists.
      It was interesting looking back over Asimov’s SF’s 2016 stories: the magazine published many strong novelettes but, paradoxically, the novellas and short stories were weak by comparison. Is this because of Tor.com’s novella series, and the greater number of markets for shorter material?

This magazine is still being published! Subscribe: Kindle UK, Kindle USA or physical & digital copies.

rssrss

Leave a Reply

This site uses Akismet to reduce spam. Learn how your comment data is processed.

Vortex v01n03, March 1977

ISFDB link

Editor, Keith Seddon

Fiction:
The End of All Songs (Part 3 of 4) • serial by Michael Moorcock ∗∗
My Time, Your Time • short story by David Penny
The Agonies of Time • novelette by Ravan Christchild

Non-fiction:
Cover • by Rodney Matthews
Interior artwork • Eddie Jones, Michelle Robson, Richard Hopkinson, Jocelyn Almond
Editorial • by Keith Seddon

I mentioned when reviewing the last issue that there was a strong sense of déjà vu from the first issue—that is even more pronounced this time around. Once again we have Moorcock’s serial, another series novelette by Ravan Christchild, and an editorial by Keith Seddon. The only variation is a story by David Penny (there is no artist interview, not even a Next Issue section). I note in passing that this latter writer was the first to appear in Vortex, apart from Moorcock, who wasn’t a complete unknown. He had previously published a short story, The Durable Man, in Galaxy, March 1974.

His contribution to this issue, My Time, Your Time, has a narrator called Percy Bysshe (after Shelly) who is rebuilding an old house on the planet Tipit after a tour as a deep space pilot. The house was left to him by his parents hundreds of years ago—the long time-interval is a result of the time-dilation effects he was subject to while in space.
He meets a young woman called Sandi. She is an outcast from the village due to the fact that she spends her time with an alien krie, a dragonfly-like inhabitant of the planet that can teleport. The two become romantically involved, and they later use the krie to move a small space shuttle and explore the Galaxy. They think (spoiler) that the krie can teleport across vast distances  without any time dilatation effects but they are mistaken.

This, for the most part, has a pleasant rural/seaside feel, like of some of Michael Coney’s work, but the problem it has is that the world building is completely unconvincing. Although hundreds of years have gone by during his time in space, he returns to a society that has barely changed. There has been no linguistic drift, or much in the way of technological progress: he buys a typewriter to write his memoirs, drinks vodka and orange, and the only meal in the story is fried ham and eggs. This isn’t the future—it’s the 1970s on another planet.
A readable enough story for all that, just an amateur one.

The End of All Songs by Michael Moorcock gets off to a good start in the ancient city, where Jherek and company see the Lat arrive and unsuccessfully attempt to use their energy weapons:

Popping a translation pill into his mouth (he had taken to carrying them everywhere just recently) Jherek said: “What brings you to the city, Captain Mubbers?”
“Mind your own smelly business, sonny jim,” said the leader of the space-invaders. “All we armjoint want to do now is find a shirt-elastic way out!”
“I can’t understand why you wanted to come in, though…” He glanced apologetically at Mrs. Underwood, who could not understand anything that was being said. He offered her a pill. She refused. She folded her arms in an attitude of resignation.
“Spoils,” said another of the Lat.
“Shut it, Rokfrug,” Captain Mubbers ordered.
But Rokfrug continued: “The knicker-patch place seemed so rotten-well protected that we thought there was bound to be something worth having here. Just our shirt-elastic luck—”
“I said shut it, arse-brain!”
But Captain Mubbers’ men seemed to be losing faith in his authority. They crossed their three eyes in a most offensive manner and made rude gestures with their elbows.
“Weren’t you already sufficiently successful elsewhere?” Jherek asked Rokfrug. “I thought you were doing extremely well with the destruction, the rape and so on…”
“Pissing right we were, until…”
“Cork your hole, bum-face!” shouted his leader.
“Oh, elbow-off!” retorted Rokfrug, but seemed aware that he had gone too far. His voice became a self-pitying mumble as Captain Mubbers gazed disapprovingly back at him. Even his fellows plainly thought Rokfrug’s language had put him beyond the pale.
“We’re under a bit of a strain,” said one of them, by way of apology.
p. 3

During this conversation Inspector Underwood and his men arrive on an airship piloted by the Duke of Queens. The latter is now a special constable and sports a yellow truncheon.
The ancient city is malfunctioning, and a huge power drain causes a gaping pit open up on the plain beyond the city. Mongrove and Yusharip arrive and tell them that the End of the Universe is nigh. Mongrove is in his element, and Yusharip informs them that the only way to survive is to use their spaceship as a refuge and eke out a spartan existence. Neither the Duke of Queens or Jherek is interested in this kind of existence, and Jherek wanders off with Amelia, who has confessed that she loves him.

After this it all becomes a bit of a plod. Captain Bastable and Una Persson turn up but are not that concerned about the momentous events that are unfolding. Then Lord Jagged and the Iron Orchid arrive, and we then get an endless data dump: Jagged admits (spoiler) to being Jherek’s father, explains his origins, and reveals that he has discovered how to time travel without a machine. He then goes on to explain how he is going to create a time loop to save their society. All will be well.

Soon all would be as it had always been, before the winds of limbo had come to blow their world away. Flesh, blood and bone, grass and trees and stone would flourish beneath the fresh-born sun, and beauty of every sort, simple or bizarre, would bloom upon the face of that arid, ancient planet. It would be as if the universe had never died; and for that the world must thank its half-senile cities and the arrogant persistence of that obsessive temporal investigator from the twenty-first century, from the Dawn Age, who named himself for a small pet singing bird fashionable two hundred years before his birth, who displayed himself like an actor, yet disguised himself and his motives with all the consummate cunning of a Medici courtier; this fantastico in yellow, this languid meddler in destinies, Lord Jagged of Canaria. p. 29

While they are waiting for these changes to be completed Amelia suggests a party. She creates a ghoulish, disturbing spectacle for the venue. At the party she and Jherek seem estranged, and it appears that Amelia has become entirely like the other denizens of the End of Time.
This instalment drags quite badly, and I can think of at least one reason why, which is the length of the entire novel: the first two novels in this trilogy are around 160-170 pages long but this one runs to 300 pages, and it feels like it wasn’t edited for pace or concision.

The Agonies of Time by Ravan Christchild gives more of a clue about why this appeared under a pseudonym1: one of the main characters is a rock star called Sexton Cromlech who has a stage show (and a private life) that encompasses necrophilia, vampirism, and various other predilections:

Steve Mitchell averted his eyes as an expensive-looking black coffin was wheeled on stage. Sipping his lager, he felt suddenly tired and dizzy. He looked quizzically into the brew.
“May I join you?” Mitchell looked up and found that the owner of this voice was a pretty young blonde, wearing a short sleeved blouse with diamond necklace, and white lightweight trousers in washable Trevira.
He stood up and pulled out a seat for her.
“My name’s Ella,” she said, sitting down, “Ella Creem. What’s yours?”
“Er Steve. Steve M . . .”
“Say,” she said, looking up at his pale face, “you okay?”
Mitchell smiled weakly. “A bit drunk, I think.” He sat down.
“I don’t go too much on this show,” said Ella Creem, looking at the stage, where a lovely female ‘corpse’ was sitting up in her coffin and fellating Cromlech.
“Me neither. Would you like a drink, Ella?”
“Ohh, gin and lemonade, please.”
Mitchell signalled to the waiter. He had to shout his order, for the audience suddenly gasped aloud as Cromlech orgasmed, dark red blood spilling from the fellatrix’s mouth while the backing vocals (‘The Rites of Eternity’) chanted climatically:

We love the dead
We love the dead
We love the dead
We love the dead
Make us dead with you !

“Not quite my cup of tea at all,” Mitchell told Ella Creem. p. 37

This section occurs at the very start of the story, in a stage show that (vaguely, and probably only to me) recalls David Bowie’s Diamond Dogs album (I should really get the album out and see if you can fit the lyrics to the music).
For the first three chapters or so there is a loose story that involves Cromlech, Mitchell, Dorrell, and a new character called Electra Vanderpump. It isn’t long, however, before we get more parallel world German airship action, time-travelling, and Multiverse and Lord of Chaos chatter. Added to that mix, presumably because it isn’t rich enough, there is an Archbishop having messy sex with a woman.

According to a note at the end of these novelettes, they were ‘loosely based . . . on a forthcoming novel, The Englishman’s Lady.’ This appeared in the late-80s under a different title,2 and I’m curious about the extent to which the novel version is different.

The Cover is another eye-catching effort by Rodney Matthews and, once again, appears unadorned on the rear cover.

Inside there is more extensive artwork and a lot more use of colour, although a lot of this is only a grey or yellow background colour for the text (the grey is a stupid choice as it makes the text harder to read). The inner cover is a single colour wash of a picture by Eddie Jones, next issue’s cover artist.

The Interior artwork is provided this issue by Michelle Robson, whose illustrations for the serial are no match for James Cawthorn’s (the latter’s filler images from the last two issues appear again); Richard Hopkinson once more provides what I would describe as talented amateur work and, again, Jocelyn Almond demonstrates that her black and white work is better than her full-colour (that latter comment refers to p. 42, not reproduced here).
The only non-fiction this issue, as mentioned before, is the Editorial by Keith Seddon. In this one he discusses what readers, and more specifically SF readers, want and get from their fiction.
Geek’s Corner: the first two issues were copyright Cerebus Publishing, and published and printed by Shalmead Ltd; this one has the same copyright but is published by Container Publications Ltd. and printed by Shalmead Ltd.  More of this to come.
A poor issue, and the magazine’s lowest point.

  1. Since my speculations about the Christchild pseudonym in the last issue, I found another reference about a vicar on John Guy Collick’s blog (the passage after the Vortex #3 cover image—unfortunately, the Moorcock’s Miscellany link to the original post doesn’t work). There is more information at SFE, but it doesn’t say what the origin of this is.
  2. The Agonies of Time by Ravan Christchild at Amazon.uk and AbeBooks.co.uk.
rssrss

Leave a Reply

This site uses Akismet to reduce spam. Learn how your comment data is processed.

The Magazine of Fantasy & Science Fiction #732, July-August 2017

ISFDB link

Other reviews:
Steve Fahnestalk, Amazing Stories
Greg Hullender and Eric Wong, Rocket Stack Rank
John D. Loyd, There Ain’t No Such Thing As A Free Lunch
Patrick Mahon, SF Crowsnest
John Siebelink, Amazing Stories
Adrian Simmons, Black Gate
Victoria Silverwolf, Tangent Online
Sam Tomaino, SF Revu
Various, Goodreads

Editor, C. C. Finlay

Fiction:
In a Wide Sky, Hidden • short story by William Ledbetter ∗∗∗
The Masochist’s Assistant • novelette by Auston Habershaw
The Bride in Sea-Green Velvet • novelette by Robin Furth +
There Was a Crooked Man, He Flipped a Crooked House • novella by David Erik Nelson
A Dog’s Story • short story by Gardner Dozois
I Am Not I • novelette by G. V. Anderson
Afiya’s Song • novelette by Justin C. Key 
An Obstruction to Delivery • short story by Sean Adams +
An Unearned Death • short story by Marissa Lingen 

Non-fiction:
There Was a Crooked Man, He Flipped a Crooked House • cover by Nicholas Grunas
Books to Look For • by Charles de Lint
Musing on Books • by Michelle West
Cartoon • by Nick Downes
With the Best of Intentions • science essay by Pat Murphy and Paul Doherty
Ghoulies, Ghosties, Beasties • film review by David J. Skal
Northwest Cruise • poem by Sophie M. White
Coming Attractions
Curiosities
• review by Paul Di Filippo

The fiction leads off with In a Wide Sky, Hidden by William Ledbetter, which has the narrator arriving (via quantum transportation) on an alien planet where he is met by an eight foot high humanoid robot. He is on a quest to find his sister, a planetary artist who disappeared decades ago (there is life extension in this future as the transportation device can alter the traveller’s reconstructed body to a younger biological age). His last contact with his sister ended with her vanishing:

I spent the rest of that night getting drunk and slept in the next morning. When I woke up, I found a handwritten note waiting for me.
COME FIND ME. — Regina
I assumed she meant to find her for breakfast or lunch, but as I learned from the local news, she had taken advantage of the media focus on her show and staged a dramatic disappearance. Her statement, sent to the local press and soon spread across all settled space, was simple yet mysterious and teasing.
“I have found a world of my own. It will be my masterpiece.”
p. 14-15

He has been searching for her ever since.
As he recovers from the journey, the robot tells him that there is no natural life on the planet but that the probes have found something artificial. As the man and the robot investigate this there are a couple of scenes spliced in that limn the relationship between the narrator and his sister, including a disagreement they have about him giving up his ambition to be a planetary explorer for a young woman he is in love with at home.
Eventually (spoiler) they find his sister’s body and deduce she died forty years ago. She let herself to age naturally and die. He must now decide whether to continue exploring.
This is well enough done, but I wasn’t really convinced about the sister deliberately stranding herself on the planet just to motivate her brother to become an explorer.
The Masochist’s Assistant by Auston Habershaw, according to the introduction, takes place in the same world as his fantasy trilogy, The Saga of the Redeemed,1 although it is complete in itself.
Georges is the famulus (servant/assistant) to Magus Hugarth, and has unusual duties:

This particular morning, though, Georges found his master on his back and stabbed him in the front almost without thinking about it. As his master’s blood soaked through the linen, his mind was on the salon to be held in the Silver Room of Madame Grousand’s château that evening. He had responded to the invitation in the positive without his master’s knowledge, hoping that his master wouldn’t want to go and send him in his stead when Georges pointed out that the event was tonight. This happened often enough to be reasonably certain, despite his master priding himself on his unpredictability.
Georges pulled his ruffled sleeve up and away from the bloody linen with his free hand and considered what he ought to wear to the salon while gazing out the open window and over the rooftops of the village and into the vastness of the deep summer-blue sky. He indulged in a daydream — himself, the center of attention at the salon in his periwinkle doublet, telling riddles that amused an array of highborn ladies. In time, though, he heard his master cough roughly and Georges was pushed away by one meaty hand.
Master Hugarth sat up in bed, blinking in the morning light. His voice was hoarse. “How long?”
p. 23

This passage illuminates two of story’s threads: Magus Hugarth’s quest to reduce the amount of time he remains dead after being killed; and Georges’ desire to advance in the etiquette bound society in which he lives. Unfortunately, Hugarth’s disreputable behaviour (i.e. running naked in the street, saying exactly what he thinks in company, etc.) poisons Georges’ chances at advancement.
The last part draws all these elements together in a satisfying way.
The Bride in Sea-Green Velvet by Robin Furth begins with Sir Henry buying a woman’s skull from a member of thieves’ guild, then taking it to a man called DeMains. The latter will build up a face on the skull from clay and pins. While they are discussing the project, DeMains questions Sir Henry about his plans for his forty-ninth birthday—seven by seven, so a significant occasion—and the sacrifice he must make to the sea goddess. Using a local girl for this is problematical, so De Mains asks if Sir Henry intends to use the skull. Sir Henry is reluctant, but realises he may have no choice.
Later Sir Henry retires to the catacombs under his chateau. There he selects a favourite skull from his collection and takes it deeper into the caves to see the Abbot, who is long dead and appears as a shadow. Sir Henry asks him for his treatise on turning clay into flesh.
The highlight of the piece (spoiler) is when Sir Henry goes down to the shoreline on the evening of his birthday and starts creating a body for the restored head, with a view to using it as a sacrifice:

With the deference of a courting suitor, Sir Henry laid the head of his lady upon the sand. Then he set about building her a body.
Her spine — from neck to curved pelvis — he took from the remains of the amorous mermaid. The bones of legs and feet, arms and hands, lovely fingers and precious toes he built from driftwood and coral. Her lungs were sea sponges and her tendons long strands of kelp wrapped around the muscular innards scooped from great scallop shells. Womb and bladder were sea cucumbers, her ovaries starfish, and her liver a giant sea leach. Her gallbladder was a yellow snail and her innards a writhing sea worm pulled from below the sand, its circular mouthful of teeth snapping. For breasts, two more lovely rounded sea sponges, and for nipples, tiny pearls.
Almost finished, he sat back on his heels and gazed upon the body of his beloved, and at her head, which rested several feet away. She looked like a beautiful saint — beheaded and flayed — though the gods this lady served were no Christian ones. Sir Henry sighed. The only missing organ was a heart.
p. 56-57

This process becomes weirder and more visceral.
For the first half or so of the story I found this one a bit hard to get into, but the gripping resurrection scene provides a strong second half.
It was only after reading There Was a Crooked Man, He Flipped a Crooked House by David Erik Nelson that I realised I hadn’t recognised him as the author of Where There Is Nothing, There Is God, a ‘New Guys’ time-travel novella from last December’s Asimov’s SF. That one was a lively and entertaining story which I enjoyed, and I liked this one even more.
The obvious starting point for this one is Robert A. Heinlein’s novelette “—And He Built a Crooked House—” (Astounding, February 1941), the well-known story whose architect protagonist inadvertently builds a house that collapses during an earthquake to become a tesseract. (A tesseract is to a cube as a cube is to a square. Long story short, this leads to a lot of dimensional weirdness inside the house. From Wikipedia2: “—the stairs seem to form a closed loop. There appears to be no way to get back out, as all the doors and windows lead directly into other rooms. At one point, they look down a hallway and are shocked to see their own backs.”)
Nelson takes this basic idea and places his tesseract house in a grittily described Detroit, where the building is about to be cleared, repaired and flipped by a couple of house renovators called Glenn and Lennie. Glenn, who is the narrator, realises there is something wrong with the house while he and his assistant do their survey (during which they are hassled by two cops). The property is in a run-down area but it has an immaculate exterior, and there are many intact period features inside.
The pair discovers the building’s dimensional weirdness when Glenn manages to pick the lock of the door and opens it:

This joint was spotless. And scentless: no mildew or rot or garbage, but also none of the good smells of old wood oil or antique books or mellow, ancient fireplace smoke. No nothing.
I started through the doorway, then stumbled, even though the porch and entryway were flush, without so much as a thick threshold. I heard a door clap shut behind me and found myself on my knees in the backyard, nothing before me but dirt, rubble, and the distant Detroit skyline against a flat, gray sky. Somewhere Lennie was shouting his head off. I turned around and was looking at the back of the crooked house. There was a shallow screen porch with a wood-framed door tacked onto its back. Three wooden steps led down to the yard, where I crouched.
“I’m back here, Lennie!” I hollered, finding my feet. “Come join me!”
I heard Lennie’s workboots crunching through the rubble, and a second later he popped around the corner.
“Glenn!” he shouted. “How’d you get back here?”
p. 92-93

Further confusion follows when entering the back door results in Glenn exiting an upstairs window. When he climbs back into the attic room, he ends up on the front porch. They then contact Fleischermann, the owner, and show him what they have found. He is less than impressed:

“Well, fuck.” He sighed. “This went from dandy to dog shit in record time.”
“You had no clue this place was, um…,” I faltered, then came up with, “Special?”
Fleischermann turned and looked at me like I was an idiot. His face worked oddly as he processed through a string of emotions — wonder, annoyance, offense, shame, then something akin to grief — before settling on anger. Then he unloaded with both barrels.
“Yeah, Glenn, fucking shockingly, I had no fucking notion that I was paying cash money for the only red-stone French Revival in Detroit that’s also a fucking Möbius strip!” His voice quickly got shrill. “The buyer’s always the last to fucking know, right?”
“No, no,” I said, hands raised placatingly, “I just meant the condition, that it’s so well preserved, fully furnished!”
“Of course it’s fucking fully furnished, Glenn!” Fleischermann shouted. “No one can get in to loot the fucker!” Lennie had drawn back to Fleischermann’s Jag, hands covering his ears. “I’ve bought a beautiful house you can’t go into on a piece of land that’s less than worthless embedded in a fucking necrotic abscess on the diabetic ass of the most notoriously moribund city in North fucking America, Glenn! We can’t even fucking strip it for the copper and doorknobs!”
p. 96-97

Up until this point the story is essentially a contemporary version of Heinlein’s, but it then gets a lot stranger. Glenn gets a set of keys for the house from Fleischermann with orders to lock it up. The story then moves on a week or two: Glenn is at a bar and picks up a woman called Anja with a promise to show her something special. They go to the house where Glenn expects to show her the front door/back door trick, but he finds that when he unlocks the house using the keys they manage to enter the house normally.
They look around, and find books inside the house with strange titles: A Brief History of Time by Warren G. Harding, A Theory of Colour and Palettes: My Struggle by Adolf Hitler. There are also unusual views out of the windows which do not match the neighbourhood. And then (spoiler):

There was a pair of sneakers on the mantel, a pair of like-new LeBron 11s — the limited edition “What the LeBron?” ones, with their crazy blacklight-blender-puke rainbow scribbles and splashes. Ugly, ugly fucking shoes. Still, those shoes are coveted by teens and corner boys alike. They wait in line for hours and then pay hundreds for them, or get them from resellers online for a grand. But there was something off about these shoes: The left sneaker had a weird brown tiger-stripe motif cutting through the hot pinks and glowing teals. I took a couple steps closer and wasn’t shocked to see that the brown was old blood. There appeared to be a healthy portion of a foot still in that left shoe. The sock was neatly snipped off and singed, showing a little slice of dark skin. The exposed cut was blackened like a steak fresh off the grill. The neat end of the bone was glistening ivory sliced with laser precision. I sniffed the air without thinking, but it didn’t smell like a cookout. I was grateful for that.
“I think we better go,” I said.
p. 106

The rest of the tale involves (more spoilers) the house being sold another developer, the two cops reappearing and exhibiting a particular interest in the house, and, of course, the malevolent alien entity inside which is responsible for the severed human foot. I’ve probably over-quoted from this story already, but I can’t help but add the great description Nelson provides of the creature:

There was a thing in the room, and I couldn’t figure out what the hell it was. At first I took it to be a shadow, but that wasn’t right. Shadows are flat, cast onto a surface, and this darkness hung in the air. And it was grappling with the man. The thing moved in jagged fits, like a time-lapse film of germination, or video that’s dropping frames. It elongated and contracted, bulging like motor oil floating in zero G, extending and withdrawing appendages of some sort — arms, maybe? Or roots? Or tentacles? One of these extrusions was a broad, flat wing. Another was spiky, infinitely, infinitesimally branching like a fractal. p. 119

Part time-lapse photograph, part tentacle, part wing, and part fractal—isn’t that a great image?
This is a very entertaining and readable story, and what makes it even better is the sheer amount of incidental detail that Nelson includes. At the end, just when I thought it was coming off the boil a little, there is a neat little twist that pulls it back up again, as well as allowing for sequels. One for the ‘Best of the Year’ collections.
A Dog’s Story by Gardner Dozois is about a dog who finds a woman lying dead in an alleyway, raped and murdered. So the dog goes to see a cat called Talking Pete, and they discuss what is to be done.

Talking Pete was silent for an even longer time, and then, just as Blackie was wondering if he’d fallen asleep with his eye open, he made a sound as close to a sigh as a cat could make, and said, “All right.” And cat-sighed again. And a messenger was sent to the basement of an abandoned warehouse near the railroad tracks where the Rat-King dwelled, dozens of rats tied tail to tail to tail.
After a while, the rats arrived in a rustling tide, and were given their instructions.
Rats go everywhere, of course, and see everything, so it wasn’t long before one was found who had seen the killer leave the alley and seen where he went, or at least followed him long enough in the right direction that Blackie was able to go to that particular corner and pick up the killer’s scent even with his aging nose.
p. 145

This an is unusual and original piece that would shine more brightly if it wasn’t stuck between the very good Nelson and Anderson stories.
I Am Not I is by G. V. Anderson, who won a 2017 World Fantasy Award for her short story Das Steingeschöpf (Strange Horizons, 12 December 2016), and I think I can see why from this story. The narrator of this piece, Miss Strohm-Waxxog, is the daughter of a high-society Varian, and is a genetic throwback, or sap—human as they were once known. She has had surgery to change her appearance so she can pass as Varian, and hopes it will fool Madame Qlym, who is interviewing her for a job at her Emporium:

“You must be Miss Strohm-Waxxog! Oh, let me look at you!” and before I could protest she was inches away, jerking my chin this way and that to admire the glitter of her lamps in my six eyes, twirling me round to look, to pat — I flinched. My wings, stale as a new butterfly’s, rustled against my clothes as I moved.
“Ah,” she said, withdrawing her hands. “No true flight? It happens, it happens. What a pity. And your poor eye.…”
I knew I looked unspectacular. When I’d telephoned to arrange this interview I’d given her my real surname — a reckless move, but I needed her to employ me; few would turn away a member of the city’s most powerful family. She’d probably spent all morning imagining what beauteous manner of mutation would be walking through her door later. And here I was, with sore, brittle wings and a gammy eye.
“It’s the Strohm gene,” I gambled. “Infections in the third pair are common.” I needn’t have worried. She was so blinded by reverence for my family that she swallowed this without question.
p. 148

Madame Qylm is an acristologist, and her Emporium conducts a very specific trade:

I eased open the door to the emporium and slipped inside.
There was only one aisle, wide enough to spread out my arms and brush the shelves with my fingertips — not that I wanted to get too close. The shelves creaked under the weight of thousands of dusty jars containing hands tinted amber by formaldehyde; eyeballs trailing optic kelp; and butter bean fœtuses that watched me with milky, unformed eyes. Sap parts, all of them. Collected and sold for the pleasure of Varians.
p. 147

Strohm-Waxxog gets the job, and so begins her struggle to get enough money to pay for the surgical repair of her implanted eyes and wings.
In due course she meets the source of Madame Qylm’s sap specimens, the honey man:

He was more hive than flesh. He wore a loose shirt and pressed trousers, braces slung uselessly about his hips; and every available patch of skin was riddled with deep, black holes. Holes that went nowhere at all.
They obscured his face, his mouth; he had no hair, just tunnels boring into his head. As Madame ushered him through for refreshment, a bee emerged from the depths of a neck-hole and perched in the opening to watch me.
p. 153

The honey man soon realises what Strohm-Waxxog really is and, given her society connections, what she would be worth as a specimen. The rest of the story details their conspiracy to cheat Madame Qylm out of her business.
This is an original work, and one which creates a strange but entirely convincing world. The ending allows for sequels, and I hope we will see them. Another one for the ‘Best of the Year’ anthologies.
Afiya’s Song by Justin C. Key is a long novelette set on a slave plantation in 1821, and is mostly concerned with the dreadful treatment of the inhabitants. The two aspects that set this apart from a straight historical story are that it takes place in a parallel world where there was a slave rebellion, and the main character—the person who sets the rebellion in motion—has a magical song that has various properties, including the ability to heal.
Later on in the story she teaches one of the male slaves the song with the hope that he will be able to use it in a similar way, but that doesn’t happen. Nonetheless, the song seems to spread throughout the slave community as an anthem-cum-vision.
Although this is worthy and well enough done there are a couple of problems with it, and those are that both the parallel world and magical song aspects are not entirely convincing. The parallel world rebellion is presented as a given and there is little explanation of how this happened. As for the magical song, I couldn’t quite see the point of this as nothing much ultimately seems to come of it that wouldn’t be provided by a word of mouth rebellion. If you have seen the film Twelve Years a Slave, I don’t think you will get anything more out of this piece. Personally, I would have been more interested in a story that was about a parallel world slave rebellion and how it happened—with a view to illuminating why that wasn’t the case in this world.
An Obstruction to Delivery by Sean Adams is another original piece, a loopy and meandering story about a town where postal workers use underground tunnels to deliver the mail because of the behaviour of one of their operatives, Peter Ponducci:

Peter was known for a variety of troublemaking activities, such as:
• carrying with him at all times a small cloth dampened with sedative to be used on dogs he deemed a danger;
• climbing atop the statue of the city’s founder in the central park, sitting upon its stone shoulders, and delivering sermons on the importance of “absolute adherence to the postal code, with observance of both the written and unwritten mandates dispensed therein”;
• and enforcing mailbox cleanliness by removing all junk mail left for more than a day and setting fire to it on the recipient’s lawn, just long enough to ensure an appropriate area of charred grass remained to serve as a warning.
p. 224-225

Peter goes missing, and then piles of bones start appearing in the tunnels . . . .
This synopsis doesn’t even scratch the surface of this quirky, offbeat, multifaceted and very original tale. That latter comment notwithstanding, I was vaguely reminded of Richard Brautigan’s The Hawkline Monster. If you liked that, you’ll love this. Another one for the ‘Best of the Year’ collections. Oh, and a nice editorial touch to follow this story with F&SF’s moving notice:

An Unearned Death by Marissa Lingen is a tale about a woman who is a Messenger for the Gods. She goes from village to village with her magic cloak telling the dying which god, if any, will take their souls. If a god accepts their soul their bodies go to the cemetery—otherwise they go to the bone yard, and what would seem to be a living death. . . . When the Messenger comes upon a grandmother who appears destined for the bone yard she attempts to intercede with one of the Gods, and summons Lora the Just.
The idea of the Messenger and her cloak is a good one, but this story didn’t really grab me and I thought it the weakest piece in the issue.

I rather liked the cover, There Was a Crooked Man, He Flipped a Crooked House by Nicholas Grunas3, surprising perhaps given that it is just a picture of a house with a police car in front.4 I’d like to see the original as the cover blots out the front of the car with a barcode. I also wondered if the cover designer had overly cropped the left and right hand sides of the work.
Books to Look For by Charles de Lint covers a number of writers unknown to me (P. L. Winn, Nathan Van Coops, Patricia Briggs, James E. Coplin), and nothing came up when I searched SFE so I may not be the only one. That said, the Coplin book, Creaking Staircases, sounded interesting, and the Kindle edition was cheap enough to make it an impulse buy for me. Musing on Books by Michelle West has one name I recognise, Peter S. Beagle.
There is a Cartoon by Nick Downes, which I didn’t get the point of.
With the Best of Intentions by Pat Murphy and Paul Doherty is a science article on honey– and bumblebee decline. This one didn’t grab me like their articles normally do.
Ghoulies, Ghosties, Beasties by David J. Skal is a positive review of The Beauty and the Beast remake, a film that would have otherwise slid under my radar. (It is Sky TV’s Xmas Day movie, so I’ll probably have a look.)
Northwest Cruise by Sophie M. White is a poem about a future when the North-West passage is open, and the view future travellers have of the past.
Coming Attractions trails next month’s anniversary issue with, drum-roll, Samuel R. Delaney’s first story for the magazine in four decades (the last was Prismatica, F&SF, October 1977—even though I can’t remember reading David Erik Nelson’s novella last December, I managed to dredge this one up from memory ).
Curiosities
by Paul Di Filippo considers a reasonably modern novel (1972), A Report From Group 17 by Robert C. O’Brien.

This is perhaps the strongest issue that editor C. C. Finlay has put together so far, and one of the best I’ve read since I started this blog. If he does not make the Hugo finals next year then there is no justice.

  1. Auston Habershaw at ISFDB.
  2. “—And He Built a Crooked House—” at Wikipedia.
  3. It looks like Nicholas Grunas is a mainstream artist. A number of his works can be seen at this site. If David Erik Nelson has any sense he’ll buy this cover painting to go with next year’s Hugo 🙂
  4. Another F&SF cover with a house (and one which I also liked) is Ron Walotsky’s, which illustrates Fritz Leiber’s serial, The Pale Brown Thing, from January 1977:

This magazine is still being published! Subscribe: Kindle UKKindle USAWeightless Books or physical copies.

rssrss

Leave a Reply

This site uses Akismet to reduce spam. Learn how your comment data is processed.

Vortex v01n02, February 1977

ISFDB link

Editor, Keith Seddon

Fiction:
The End of All Songs (Part 2 of 4) • serial by Michael Moorcock ∗∗∗
The Machine at Cheviot House H.Q. • novelette by Ravan Christchild
Mutant! • short story by James Corley

Non-fiction:
Cover • by Rodney Matthews
Interior artwork • by James Cawthorn, Jocelyn Almond, Rodney Matthews, Richard Hopkinson
Editorial • by Keith Seddon
Landscapes of the Mind • interview of Rodney Matthews by Steve Axtell
Next Issue

The second part of The End of All Songs by Michael Moorcock picks up pace at the end of this instalment but still meanders somewhat at the start.
Jherek and Amelia go to a party that the Duke of Queens has organised. After the latter’s visit to the 19th century he has created a strange, huge version of Scotland Yard for this event, where people float around on various platforms in the cavernous interior.

At the party there are a number of conversations, including an extended (and rather dull) one where Jherek talks to two versions of his mother, the Iron Orchid, who has split into multiple ‘selves’ for the party. She appears to be jealous of Amelia, and the latter recognises this when she joins them at the end of their chat. After the Iron Orchid leaves Amelia cuts Jherek off just as he begins to propose to her.
At this point it occurred to me that as the denizens of the End of Time adopt more of the attitudes and customs of the nineteenth century, the less happy everyone is, and the less fun the novel is.
After this Jherek and Amelia discuss time-travel with a disgruntled Brannart Morphail (whose hump is now as big as the rest of him, and who has a larger club foot to keep his balance), and then go with the Duke of Queens to see five space travellers held in his menagerie:

“These are from Yusharisp’s planet,” explained the Duke of Queens,”but they are not him. They are five fresh ones! I believe they came to look for him. In the meantime, of course, he has been home and returned here.”
“He is not aware of the presence of his friends on our planet?”
“Not yet.”
“You’ll tell him tonight?”
“I think so. At an appropriate moment.”
“Can they communicate?”
“They refuse to accept translation pills, but they have their own mechanical translators, which are, as you know, rather erratic.”
Jherek pressed his face against the force-bubble. He grinned at the inmates. He smiled. “Hello! Welcome to the End of Time!”
China-blue eyes glared vacantly back at him.
“I am Jherek Carnelian. A friend of Yusharisp’s,” he told them agreeably.
“The leader, the one in the middle, is known as Chief Public Servant Shashurup,” the Duke of Queens informed him.
Jherek made another effort. He waved his fingers. “Good afternoon, Chief Public Servant Shashurup!”
“Why-ee (skree) do you continue-oo too-too-to tor(roar)-ment us?” asked the CPS. “All we (kaaar)sk(skree) is (hiss) that-tat-tat you dooo-oo us(ushush) the cour(kur-kur-kur) tesy-ee of com-comcommunicat(tate-tate)ing our requests to your representat(tattat)ives!” He spoke wearily, without expectation of answer.
“We have no ‘representatives’, save ourselves,” said Jherek. “Is there anything wrong with your environment? I’m sure that the Duke of Queens would be only too pleased to make any adjustments you saw fit…”
“Skree-ee-ee,” said CPS Shashurup desperately. “It is not(ot-ot) in our nat(tate-tate)ure to (skree) ake(cake-cake) threat(et-et-et)s, but we must warn you (skree) that unless we are re(skree)lea(skree)sed our peo(pee-pee)ple will be forced to take steps to pro(pro-pro)tect us and secure(ure-ure) our release. You are behaving childishly! It is imposs(oss-oss)ible to believe(eve-eve-eve) that a race grown so old can still(ill-ill) skree-skree yowl eek yaaaarrrrk!”

Amusing stuff.
They cut short this exchange when Mongrove arrives at the party with news of his space travels. Once everyone assembles he tells them that their energy rings are consuming the universe, but the denizens of the End of Time are not much interested, and become bored.

Jherek and Amelia return home and build a castle for themselves. Bishop Castle visits, and lets them know the Iron Orchid has gone time travelling. Then Inspector Springer, several policemen, and Ameila’s husband Harold arrive at the front door.

“I ’ave, sir,” said Inspector Springer with heavy satisfaction, “been invested with Special Powers. The ’Ome Secretary ’imself ’as ordered me to look into this case.”
“The new machine — my, um, Chronomnibus — was requisitioned,” said the time-traveller apologetically from the background. “As a patriot, though strictly speaking not from this universe…”
“Under conditions of utmost secrecy,” continued the Inspector, “we embarked upon our Mission…”
Jherek and Mrs. Underwood stood on their threshold and contemplated their visitors.
“Which is?” Mrs. Underwood was frowning pensively at her husband.
“To place the ringleaders of this plot under arrest and return forthwith to our own century so that they — that’s you, of course, among ’em — may be questioned as to their motives and intentions.”
Inspector Springer was evidently quoting specifically from his orders. “And Mr. Underwood?” Jherek asked politely. “Why is he here?”
“’E’s one o’ the few ’oo can identify the people we’re after. Anyway, ’e volunteered.”
She said, bemusedly: “Have you come to take me back, Harold?”
“Ha!” said her husband.

And so begins a livelier chapter where the inspector and his men search the castle. During this, an energy ray takes off the top of the castle, and Bishop Castle arrives to tell them that the Lat are laying waste to everything. Amelia, Jherek, and Harold leave in the locomotive and escape to one of the ancient cities, where energy weapons will not function as the ancient machines prohibit their use.

While they are hiding in the city a memory bank starts a philosophical conversation with Harold, and Jherek tells Amelia this is where he was conceived, and then proposes to her. Just at that point Captain Mubbers and the rest of the Lat arrive.
The pacing of the first two parts of this novel is not as steady as that of the first two; there are too many longeurs. Hopefully, the next two parts will pick up speed.

The Machine at Cheviot House H.Q. by Ravan Christchild is the second story adapted from his novel The Englishman’s Lady (see the quote at the end of this section), and so it uses characters, locations, etc. from last issue’s story. This rather makes it feel like a second serial and, as such, gives this issue a distinct Groundhog Day feel.
The main characters that reappear in this one are Steve Mitchell, Karen Black and Johnny Terrier (although there are others). They feature in a very loose tale that starts with an invasion of an alternate world Britain by German airships (although this happens when the characters are watching Survivors1 in a Bonanza2-themed room):

They watched in silence as the TV cameras panned over a part of Southern England, showing columns of men marching across the fields, meeting little resistance. Great black and silver airships hovered in the sky above, occasionally releasing a biplane or two after refuelling. More zeppelins lay on the ground amidst billowing clouds of mustard gas, disgorging tanks and soldiers. Briefly, the viewers saw one of the airships explode silently intoflame, before the screen went blank.
“This,” said Steve Mitchell seriously, looking at Johnny Terrier, “will complicate matters somewhat.”
Terrier nodded, thinking of the red and gold uniform in his suitcase, and the Smith & Wesson .38 in his drawer. p. 13

The rest of the story involves the appearance of a huge metallic structure that destroys the village of Portmeirion (presumably another oblique media reference, this time to The Prisoner3). This phenomena leads to discussion of the Multiverse, a Conjunction, and the Lords of Chaos.
I wouldn’t want all this to give the impression that there is much of a story here because there isn’t; most of the writer’s energies are focused on an arch, contemporary and (although not in the following passage) mildly transgressive delivery:

“Mr. John Lennon, of the ‘Beatles’ jazz-band, has been found dead at his Kensington home. Mr. Lennon’s apartment on the Bayswater Road was broken in to by police after his friend, the American Negro tap-dancer, Mr. Robert Dylan, became disturbed at not having seen him for several days. Mr. Lennon’s death is unexplained at the moment; police say that no dangerous drugs were found in the apartment.
“A letter bomb was delivered to Alastair Burnet, television personality and former editor of the Daily Express, yesterday. He called the police when he saw Indian stamps on the envelope. The letter was sent last week to his address in Glasgow and was forwarded to his Kensington, London, home. Experts defused the package.
“A raid by police on a council house in Bushey, Hertfordshire, early this morning, resulted in the arrest of a young woman. A police spokesman said later that the raid had not yielded satisfactory results. A quantity of literature was taken away, as well as a large amount of scientific and laboratory equipment.
“Sport, and rain has stopped play at Lords. The West Indies, in their first innings, are 206 for two. In Mexico, the Chinese have beaten Team America by four goals to one.
“That’s the news at eleven, we’ll be back at midday with the latest car crash results from Los Angeles. Now, over to Kenneth Everett in the music studio.” p. 15

I liked this one slightly more than the last (the scenes are moderately interesting—they just don’t amount to anything) but maybe I am just becoming acclimatised.
There is an interesting note about Jocelyn Almond’s involvement (the editor Keith Seddon’s future wife) at the end of the piece, which perhaps gave rise to the rumours that Christchild was a pseudonym for Seddon (denied at the time and a few years ago):

This story is very loosely based on Ravan Christchild’s forthcoming novel, THE ENGLISHMAN’S LADY. Certain themes and plots in this story will be investigated in the next story, THE AGONIES OF TIME. Two characters in this story, Sebastian Dorrell and Electra Vanderpump, were created by Jocelyn Almond. Their original adventures and exploits are related in the novels THE DEATHS AND TIMES OF SEBASTIAN DORRELL, THE SICILIAN DRAGON, and THE RETICENCE OF PEACOCKS. p. 24

Mutant! by James Corley is either heavily influenced by, or a pastiche of, J. G. Ballard’s work.
In this story the world is subject to a vast increase in solar activity, and there is an increase in number of mutations. Various scenes play out against this backdrop, all centred on a research scientist called Stoddard, who is at a marine research facility in the Indian Ocean.

The story opens with him visiting Pamela, a female colleague who he has been in a relationship with. They argue, and she eventually pulls a knife on him so he leaves. After this Stoddard collapses outside the facility. As he later recovers he talks to one of his Indian colleagues, and we get some background information about what is happening in the world.
Once he is up and about again he goes walking and sees evidence of mutant sea birds. He also sees Penelope sunbathing in the fierce sunlight, oblivious to the radiation:

Stoddard had been kept awake most of the night thinking of the figure on the beach, pulling at the desperate problem she posed. He had decided against the theory that this was a macabre form of suicide. Her body had flared in to a vivid redness but there was no blistering of the smooth, perfect skin. Obviously Pamela had been coming here for days. She had not abandoned herself to the sun but had gradually accepted it, exposing herself at first only momentarily while building up tolerance to the rays.
But was it insanity? Could she perhaps believe she lay sunbathing on some Mediterranean beach? Was she on holiday somewhere inside her skull? Had she forgotten the world was lurching under the impact of shattered genes? Did her mind pretend to itself that nothing had changed? He could have borne a realisation of her insanity but something told him that the girl was as sane or saner than Stoddard himself.
Her actions as she turned over were deliberate and calm, they showed none of the emphatic motility of madness. She was dressed modestly now in the fine, pale sand which clung to her sweating body. Once it seemed she looked straight at him but her eyes passed on, unseeing or uncaring that there was a watcher on the cliff-top. p. 47

Years pass and, long after they stop receiving any radio broadcasts, they see a silver sphere flying over the island. This is attributed to something that has mutated beyond humankind. The story ends.
The parts of this are well enough done, but (again) they don’t cohere into a whole.

While I don’t dislike this issue’s Cover by Rodney Matthews, I’m not sure it is a particular favourite of mine—but it certainly hold the eye. Matthews is also the subject of an interesting interview by Steve Axtell, Landscapes of the Mind. I am always interested to hear about the jobs writers and artists have in their early life:

When I left school, the art mistress and everyone were all saying, “You must become an artist or something.” So I went around to the local print factory, where they offered me a job as a retoucher. Then I thought, “Christ, I can’t sit and do this all day.” So I went on to do some metal working, taking the surface off a thumb, slitting the odd finger here and there, so I thought, “Christ, I can’t do this.” And I ended up at the West of England Art College, which I left prematurely after one and a half years because a job came up. Although I didn’t like it, the period which then followed at the ad agency was important because there I learned the basic disciplines — creative lettering, layout, presentation, visualizing, typography and something of printing.
After leaving the ad agency, I went to work as a freelancer, in an outfit called PLASTIC DOG GRAPHICS. Here were laid the foundations on which I have built my style and direction. To start with I had to do a lot of mediocre stuff in order to make a living, but every now and then a job (usually a college poster or a record sleeve) would present me with an outlet for my fantasies. My partner and me were currently playing in bands, so it wasn’t surprising that much of our graphic work came from the musical business. Notably United Artists and Sonet of Sweden. Sonet together with its several small subsidiaries, and headed in London by Rod Buckle, produced mainly Jazz, Blues and Folky albums. I was invited to design the covers for many of these. In fact, a lot of my stuff has come about by being rejected by record companies or bands or what have you. p. 40

The Interior artwork this issue is by James Cawthorn, who provides three B&W illustrations, Jocelyn Almond contributes the same for the Christchild story, and Richard Hopkinson provides a B&W illustration for the Corely. I’m not entirely sure that the three colour title illustrations4 are produced by the same artists as who do the B&W pages (with the exception of the one for the Christchild story which looks like Almond’s work): all the colour work is uncredited, where the B&W work by Almond and Hopkinson is signed.

A new feature this issue is that the cover art is reproduced without type on the back cover, and the inner front and inner rear cover have a monotone reproduction of one of the works by Rodney Matthews printed along with his the interview.

The Editorial by Keith Seddon is one of those pigeon-holing pieces that discusses the various types of fantasy and SF. This kind of thing has always seemed a bit of a waste of time to me: where does describing Frank Herbert’s Dune as ‘Science Fantasy’ get you?
Next Issue is a new feature and a self-explanatory one:

In conclusion, and given I’ve already mentioned the feeling of déjà vu above, this issue is like the first: an average effort at best. There are, though, glimmers of improvement.

  1. The Survivors was a 1970’s TV series set in a post-apocalypse UK. More at SFE and Wikipedia.
  2. Bonanza was a long running TV Western. The Wikipedia page.
  3. The Prisoner was an excellent SF TV series that ran during 1967. Even though I’m pretty sure that Rover gave me nightmares I have the boxset to watch again one day (Rover was a terrifying creature or machine that looked like a huge bubble of chewing gum, as wide as a man is tall, and which pursued escaped prisoners from the Village. When it caught them it pressed itself over their face till they lost consciousness and, I think, sometimes killed them.) More at SFE and Wikipedia.
  4. The title pages for the Moorcock and Corley stories (the Christchild is above):

 

rssrss

Leave a Reply

This site uses Akismet to reduce spam. Learn how your comment data is processed.

Analog Science Fiction and Fact v137n5&6, May-June 2017

ISFDB link

Other reviews:
Greg Hullender and Eric Wong, Rocket Stack Rank
Lähettänyt Tpi Klo, Tpi’s Reading Diary
John Loyd, There ain’t no such thing as a free lunch
Victoria Silverwolf, Tangent Online
Sam Tomaino, SFRevu
Various, Goodreads

_____________________

Editor, Trevor Quachri; Associate Editor, Emily Hockaday

Fiction:
The Girls with Kaleidoscope Eyes • novella by Howard V. Hendrix ∗∗∗∗
To See the Elephant • novelette by Julie Novakova
The Chatter of Monkeys • short story by Bond Elam
A Grand Gesture • short story by Dave Creek
Decrypted • short story by Eric Choi
Seven Ways to Fall in Love with an Astronaut • short story by Dominica Phetteplace
Focus • short fiction by Gord Sellar
Ténéré • short story by Manny Frishberg and Edd Vick
The Final Nail • novelette by Stanley Schmidt
The Speed of Faith in Vacuum • short story by Igor Teper
Facebook Screamed and Screamed, Then I Ate It • short story by Sam Schreiber
Vulture’s Nest • short story by Marissa Lingen
In the Mists • short story by Bill Pronzini and Barry N. Malzberg
The Return • short story by Bud Sparhawk
Lips Together • short story by Ken Brady
The Banffs • short story by Lavie Tidhar
Where the Flock Wanders • short story by Andrew Barton
Proteus • short story by Joe Pitkin +
Kepler’s Law • novelette by Jay Werkeiser

Non-fiction:
Region NGC 6357 • cover by NASA
Interior artwork • by Kevin Speidell, Vincent Di Fate, Kurt Huggins
Science Fiction and the Virtue of Simplicity • editorial by Richard A. Lovett
Alien Archaeology: Searching for the Fingerprint of Advanced Extraterrestrial Civilizations • essay by Michael Carroll
Strangers • poem by Allina Nunley
Our Leaking Universe • Alternate View essay by John G. Cramer
In Times to Come
Our Religious Conversion • poem by Ken Poyner
The Reference Library • book reviews by Don Sakers
Brass Tacks • letters
Upcoming Events • by Anthony R. Lewis

_____________________

The Girls with Kaleidoscope Eyes by Howard V. Hendrix starts with a female FBI agent tasked to investigate the attempted mass-murder of a group of ten-year old girls by one of their teachers. Over the first half or so of the story Agent Onilongo interviews several people and learns of some perplexing events. Most notable is that all the girls were all conceived on the night of the Big Nodoff, an occurrence which involved everyone in the town falling asleep for an hour early in the morning. After this event a number of the pregnant women reported seeing an angel or other visitation, and this was subsequently interpreted as a divine event by the polygamous Mormon sect that constitutes most of the local population. Also, the nearby NSA base has a secret project that involves an autonomous quantum AI called Sifter, whose role is to analyse all the agency’s information and make predictions.
Apart from these plot elements the story touches on a number of other issues along the way, some significantly, and some fleetingly and perhaps satirically: how humanity’s pervasive use of technology may be transformative, gender, post-humanism and machine evolution, childhood bullying, inclusivity and diversity, etc., etc. I can’t recall reading anything by Hendrix before so if I had to give a one-line pitch for the story it would be (spoiler) ‘Greg Egan vs. The Midwich Cuckoos’, although that may undersell this dense and, at times, fascinating story (it has a slow beginning but a great second half). One for the ‘Best of the Year’ collections.

To See the Elephant Julie Novakova grabbed my interest straight away with its clearly drawn characters and setting: an aloof animal psychologist called Adina Ipolla has flown in to a future Kenya to investigate a behavioural problem with a male elephant. The rest of the story concerns her investigation, during which she uses an implant that lets her experience what the elephant is feeling. Unfortunately, the story is too often written (later in the story, at least) in the language of a Biology Ph.D. thesis (the writer’s profession):

Ipolla started explaining: “His amygdala, especially in the right hemisphere, shows quite high activity. The whole HPA axis is firing a lot. The right prefrontal lobe and left inferior frontal gyrus also. I can’t get sufficient spatial resolution from EEG data but I’d say the left insular cortex is also above the norm—though one cannot derive much from these data without context and reliable reference.”
“But—what does it mean for Mgeni?” Robert ventured as he saw the blank faces around him.
“It likely means that he’s experiencing a lot of emotion, especially of the negative kind. Yesterday’s results from the fecal sample showed elevated androgens and glucocorticoids. That is in accord with the HPA axis activity. Basically, these data indicate stress and anxiety. I’ll be able to provide a less obvious insight after I have observed and felt his activity for at least twenty-four hours. “
Kimaiyo stood up. “Alright. Do just that.”
Ipolla shot him a sharp glance. “I intend to, I assure you.”   p. 60-61

She eventually solves an esoteric biological problem, which involves (spoiler) the discovery of an intersex condition.
The Chatter of Monkeys by Bond Elam is initially quite a good story about a young woman who meets an alien robot on a future, poisoned Earth. The Alliance forces in orbit want the robot and pursue her and it into an underground tunnel complex.
This has quite good world building but the ending is a little weak and not entirely convincing (spoiler: the robot has a cure for Earth’s problems but is sent as a bomb to the Alliance craft. I was unsure if it was the real robot she sent or a dummy.)
This story is the first of no less than fifteen short stories included in this issue. I think that this number of short stories in a single issue is a mistake for a couple of reasons. First, when you only have one novella and three novelettes it makes the entire issue feel unbalanced. It is also quite hard to get into the issue: no sooner have you started one story you are on to the next. Second, the sweet spot for short SF is the novelette—good short stories are more difficult to write.
To that latter point, nearly all the short work in this issue is deficient to a greater or lesser extent; some are little more than notions that go nowhere, others don’t develop the idea properly. Some are unconvincing, partly because they don’t hang around long enough to suspend one’s disbelief. You’ll hopefully see what I mean as we go on.
A Grand Gesture by Dave Creek is about two explorers on an alien planet. My eyes tripped over the second sentence:

He and his shipmate, Amaia Moreau, trudged across a planetary surface covered with a tar-like substance.  p. 78

It took me a moment to realise what was covered in tar. Half a page later we get this:

Kayonga felt they should’ve brought a third crewmember with them to stay aboard the shuttle in case of an emergency, but the Belyanka’s commander, Gina Marianthal, overruled that decision, saying they’d never had a problem with two-person exploratory teams before.  p. 78

‘Ah,’ I thought, ‘idiots on an alien planet’ (a common plot device: the movie Promethus, the Werkeiser novelette later in the issue, etc.). Straight away you know the pair are going to get into trouble and, sure enough, en route to a diamond crater on this carbon based planet, they find three small alien creatures in a cave . . . which turn out to be the offspring of the angry adult heading towards them. They end up in the cave with the young aliens, holding off the adult with their stunners (these, by the way, and the scanners they also have, make it read like a defrocked Star Trek story). While all this peril plays out we get a back story full of emotional and interpersonal angst, as if that’s what people would be talking about while menaced by an alien creature.
The planet and aliens are not badly done, but the rest of it reads like something from a poor 1950’s Amazing.
Decrypted by Eric Choi is an interesting piece about quantum computers ending the use of classical encryption techniques, and the resultant change in society (cash and signed credit card clips, long queues at banks, the unmasking of online trolls, etc.). These events are seen through the eyes of a bank teller who ends up at the receiving end of a beating when an online comment he made years ago (and mistranslated from his then native Russian) is traced to him. I liked this but it ends rather abruptly, and so it falls into the ‘not fully developed’ category above.
I thought, before I started it, that Seven Ways to Fall in Love with an Astronaut by Dominica Phetteplace would be one of the highlights of the issue (I loved her recent series in Asimov’s as well as other work I’ve seen). Unfortunately, this is a low-key and rather glum work about a woman biologist on a Mars colony who can’t get her plants to survive. Paralleling this is an account of her feelings for one of the astronauts. Relationship angst, basically.
Focus by Gord Sellar is about riots triggered by two teenage school kids in a world where the workforce is dosed with a drug called Focus. One of the teenager’s fathers gets caught up in the riots (spoiler) and later dies. This is has some interesting ideas but it didn’t work for me as I wasn’t entirely sure what was going on nor was I convinced by what I did understand.

Ténéré by Manny Frishberg and Edd Vick has a camel caravan in the relatively near future arrive at a wadi to find no water and the surrounding plants burnt. This is not the first time this has happened to the travellers, and they are running short of water. That night, the Arabs in the caravan, who are idealists recreating/re-enacting a lapsed way of life, see the light of a local industrial complex and decide it may be causing the destruction of the wadis. So they go to the plant.
Once there they take over the plant and eventually find that the plant’s process—atmospheric carbon capture for graphene manufacture—is releasing an excess of oxygen, causing not only plants at the local wadis to catch fire, but other problems (increased corrosion at the plant, etc.). After a tense stand-off both sides manage to agree on a solution. This is an interesting story, and certainly better than most of the others, but the ending is a little unconvincing in its idealism.
Breaking up the (seemingly endless) run of short stories is The Final Nail by Stanley Schmidt. This is about a rural doctor who starts seeing a number of ‘alpha-gal’ cases. These are normally caused by tick bites and result in the victim having an anaphylactic reaction to mammal meat, which they can therefore no longer eat. The doctor later develops this condition after meeting another of his colleagues at a restaurant to discuss the clusters of cases that have started appearing all over the world.
After a lot of research (which comprises most of the story) and with the help of a geneticist, he discovers (spoiler) that this condition is spread by genetically engineered mosquitoes. Along the way he gets a number of emails that attempt to warn him off his investigation. There are also a number of mentions of an old patient of his, the daughter of a wealthy man, and her decision to become a vegetarian at age six. She later became a geneticist and, predictably, is eventually linked to the emails. The doctor cannot convince her to stop her militant vegetarianism so he calls in the Feds, who arrest her.
For the most part this is a readable and interesting, if predictable, story. Until, that is, the ending, when the doctor meets Darlene and explains that he stopped her because she hadn’t considered the consequences of her plan:

“I sympathize with what you were trying to do, Darlene. I really do. I admire your empathy for your fellow creatures, and the fact that you can extend it beyond your own kind. A lot of people can’t do that.” He paused and she said nothing. “But you were so intent on protecting them from being eaten that you didn’t think beyond that. You didn’t think about what would happen if you succeeded in getting everybody to stop eating them. “Let me ask you a question, Darlene. Why do cows and pigs and sheep and chickens exist?”
Her frown deepened. Finally she said, “What do you mean?”
“Domesticated food animals are only alive because people raise them to eat, Darlene. If nobody eats them any more, nobody will raise them any more.
“So they’ll go extinct. And the final nail in their coffin will be your attempt at kindness. “
She had gone positively pale. Evidently she really hadn’t thought about it. Or maybe she had, but had deluded herself that it wasn’t a real concern. Fanaticism can do that to a person. But she was too smart to deny it when he said it out loud, and it was hitting her hard.
“Furthermore,” he went on, “there will be rippling side effects. If nobody can eat beef or pork or lamb any more, they’ll turn to other things like poultry and seafood. That’s already starting to happen. The economy’s getting shaky—and it will get worse—because ranchers can’t sell their livestock the way they used to, and chicken and fish farmers can’t keep up with demand. Vegetable growers will have the same problem. If you’d been allowed to keep working and got people to stop eating chicken and fish, those would go, too. And then—”
“Okay, okay, stop!” she said suddenly. Tears were streaming down her cheeks. “How could I not have seen . . . That’s not what I wanted, Dr. Strassman! I only wanted to help. …” Her voice trailed off in sobs.
“I know,” he said gently. He wished he could reach through the glass and pat her consolingly. He never wanted to hurt her, either. “But good intentions aren’t enough. You have to think about all the consequences of what you do.”  p. 124-125

The ridiculousness of this passage probably speaks for itself but, if it doesn’t, let me suggest that most vegans or vegetarians would rather have a massive reduction in the number of cows, sheep, pigs, etc. in the world than having them born to a ghastly existence in the meat industry. Even to the point of extinction (although, no doubt, some would be kept in zoos, as pets, etc.). As to vegetable growers not being able to keep up with demand, it takes less land, water, etc. to produce vegetables than meat. Chicken and fish farmers not being able to keep up with demand is only a problem of consumer choice and nothing else.
The thing that really grips me about this story is that it fails to understand that all industries are eventually disrupted. If, in the future, you can grow protein that is indistinguishable from the real thing, the moral issues around killing animals for food will become much starker; if you can do it more cheaply, then the economic forces will be unstoppable (do you think McDonalds is going to use real meat in their hamburgers when they can get an indistinguishable synthetic alternative for half the price? Even if they do, how long do you think they will stay in business when their competitors switch?) The other factor affecting this industry will be future population growth and prosperity, both of which may massively increase the demand for meat. As this happens the amount of land and resources required will eventually become unsustainable (not to mention the methane related greenhouse gas effects). It’s a pity Schmidt didn’t write that story rather than one that panders to the current status quo.
In The Speed of Faith in Vacuum by Igor Teper, a spaceship full of ‘immortals’—humans using cryogenic-sleep on long journeys—returns to a colony after three hundred years. Since their last visit the colony has struggled to survive against the ‘Red Mold,’ a lethal organism. Grigorily, the protagonist, tries to force the returning crew to give them the help they need, rather than that which they are prepared to provide. During this (spoiler) he finds that the ‘Immortals’ are not that well positioned themselves, but they maintain a pretence to keep hope alive on the handful of surviving colonies. I just didn’t find this convincing but, apart from that, it is competently enough done save for an awkward first line that I had to read three times to get its meaning:

The white arc of their trail slicing the ever-flawless lavender sky into before and after, the Immortals descended.  p. 128

I don’t think this is Yodish1 (the variant of English that Yoda from the movie Star Wars uses) but it’s close. Why not ‘The Immortals descended, the white arc of their trail slicing the ever-flawless lavender sky into before and after’?
Facebook Screamed and Screamed, Then I Ate It by Sam Schreiber is an okay piece about an online AI that eventually does what the title says.
Vulture’s Nest by Marissa Lingen starts with the Yaw family decontaminating and salvaging a ship in the Oort. When they get back to port they find there is a surviving family member who owns the ship and he is not happy about what they have done. The rest of the story is about the fallout, and that the narrator’s family are regarded as ‘vultures’ and accordingly harassed. There is a lot of data dumping going on for a short story, and the events that occur don’t justify the amount of world building done. It should have been a longer piece with a better plot or arc, and I suspect it is a chunk of a novel in progress.
In the Mists by Bill Pronzini and Barry N. Malzberg has a man stranded on an alien planet. Initially we learn that the other two crew members died on arrival but, after various diarised delusions, nightmares and recovered memories, we find out what really happened. Unlikely, unconvincing, and too straightforward.
The Return by Bud Sparhawk and Lips Together by Ken Brady are notions and not much else. In the first, an early and now very elderly astronaut (Buzz Aldrin I think) moans about how easy space travel is in the future. The second has a Japanese woman travel to the USA to transmit a bacterium that will eradicate tooth decay.
The Banffs by Lavie Tidhar is about a writer (I guess Tidhar himself) who starts circulating in the company of ultra-rich and (spoiler) alien beings. He eventually becomes a house-sitter for their many homes and sees a lot of strange things:

He took me down to the basement the one time and showed me the antique, steam-powered computational devices he kept there, in carefully controlled temperature and humidity. I could not guess at the nature of the brass rings and cogs that I saw there, but was overwhelmed by their complexity.
“The Antikythera Mechanism,” he said, referring to the two thousand year old device found off the coast of Greece, “was merely the tip of the iceberg, you know. The Greeks had an advanced culture of analog computing they inherited from Atlantis, before it sank under the waves. “
I nodded, because I didn’t know what to say.
“Babbage was merely reconstructing the technology,” he told me. “From the technical writings of the Arab scholars who studied the remnants of the technology centuries later. “
They talked like this, sometimes. They’d make references to hunting Yetis in the Himalayas (“Disgraceful sport,’’ Helene once said), or talk about an abandoned colony under the South Pole (“Only Elvis lives there now, the poor creature,” Victor Victor said) or how the Ark of the Covenant was really a communication device (“But I don’t know how the Hebrews got hold of it in the first place,” Felipe said, “considering it was lost in the crash, at least we thought it was”).  p. 158

This is moderately entertaining but the story just fizzles out (and so it is little more than an extended idea).
Where the Flock Wanders by Andrew Barton has two explorers in the rings of Saturn looking for ‘Precursor’ artefacts when they discover a wrecked Earth warship. On board they find a safe and, inside, a sealed letter. They disagree about whether to open the letter (they may cause further tension between Earth and the outer planets if it contains what they think it does). One of them, Rho, later does so anyway, and finds out that it is a love letter left for one of the crew. The other crewmember, Static, finds Rho opening the letter and relations between them deteriorate. Okay, but another one that doesn’t amount to much.
Proteus by Joe Pitkin is the second of his ‘John Demetrius’2 stories. In this one a woman called Epic Khorasani and a man called Linus Pauling Moody sign up as crew for a shuttle that will run supplies to Proteus, a gigantic airship that flies the skies of Venus, and which is involved in terraforming the planet. Epic and Moody are really spies, and they are travelling to Proteus to gather evidence of breaches of the Human Transgenic Act.
During her long stay (the launch window for the return trip to Earth is five hundred days after their arrival) she learns that altered Proteans, the lilith, are being hidden away on the lower decks while they are there. A chameleon like human—a clear violation of the Transgenic Act—presents himself to Epic, and takes her below to see them:

They came into what seemed a long workroom. Computer workstations, monitors as broad as landscapes in a museum, stood at intervals along the walls. Natural light streamed in via tubes in the floor, the Sun’s reflection on the luminous acid clouds of Venus.
As if in ignorance of the station’s artificial night, two dozen creatures sat or stood or perched at the workstations. “These are shedim,” Glass said, and though he said it softly, every one of them turned to look at her: leopard skinned people and owl-faced ones, a woman with hands of articulated spindles like slim winter branches of oak, a towering hairless figure as muscular as a Canaanite idol. Epic scratched her bare shoulder in the innocuous way that activated her black widow camera.
“Why are you showing me this?” she asked Glass. Glass seemed just a pair of eyes and a dark mouth where he opened it. “We’re not monsters, Epic. We’re people.”  p. 172

This is head and shoulders above the rest of the short fiction in the issue, not least for its concise and lucid prose.
The issue’s fiction ends with Kepler’s Law by Jay Werkeiser. This one is about a mission from a doomed Earth to a planet called Kepler. I didn’t much like this for a variety of reasons. First off, a few of the characters seem entirely unsuited to the mission (one makes a reckless descent in her shuttle and causes a hard landing which damages it and the radio, thus rendering them conveniently incommunicado; another two crewmembers wander off to explore even though it is against the rules, etc.). Secondly, there is too much chatter between the crew about their personal and cultural differences (the pair above include an introvert Japanese and an extrovert American, the latter with an unlikely personality (reckless) and accent. Finally, the maguffin (spoiler) is an obscure biochemical one involving RNA or enzymes in the rain eating away human flesh like acid.

One of Analog’s strengths are its covers, and Region NGC 6357, an astronomical photograph from NASA does not disappoint. There are a few postage stamp-size pieces of Interior artwork by Kevin Speidell, Vincent Di Fate, and Kurt Huggins. If you are going to pay for artist’s work (this page is from the Kindle version of the magazine):

. . . why not use a larger version of the illustration?

Science Fiction and the Virtue of Simplicity by Richard A. Lovett is an editorial that starts with a discussion of the primacy of special effects in SF movies/drama over story telling. This is probably best summarised by this passage:

We simply don’t need all the fancy high-tech eye candy we’ve become so accustomed to seeing.
It’s something we knew long ago as children. How many parents have been startled to discover that their kids would rather play with the boxes their fancy toys came in than with the toys themselves? But when you think about it, it’s not so surprising. The toy is constrained to be whatever its manufacturer created it to be. A box can become anything: rocket ship, racecar, sailboat, time machine—children’s imaginations know no bounds.
Science fiction has long been called the literature of ideas, not the literature of special effects. Could it be that all the high-tech details are too often nothing more than over-engineered toys that strangle our imaginations and stop us from flying to the moons of Procyon IV in cardboard boxes of our own imagination?  p. 6

The last page talks about the continual presence of electronic devices making it difficult to take the time to just sit and observe. I didn’t see the connection between the two parts.
Alien Archaeology: Searching for the Fingerprint of Advanced Extraterrestrial Civilizations by Michael Carroll is a science article that starts with the Fermi Paradox (if there are aliens why haven’t they contacted us yet?) and covers a number of other topics, including observational methods of detecting inhabited planets and systems, robot sentinels, travel to other stars, etc. Some of the latter was already familiar to me (e.g. the nuclear bomb powered Orion project), and I started skimming.
There are two poems in this issue. I thought Strangers by Allina Nunley was fairly good (a man’s ancestors lived their lives within five miles of home, but he meets his soul mate in another part of the Universe). Our Religious Conversion by Ken Poyner is about aliens and religion.
Our Leaking Universe is an ‘Alternate View’ essay by John G. Cramer about the Hubble constant, dark matter and unimodular gravity that was way over my head.
The Reference Library by Don Sakers starts off with a potted history of post-apocalyptic SF before the reviews. There are two or three of the reviewed books that sound interesting (and an inexpensive one I bought straightaway, the ‘lost’ novel by Gordon Eklund). I like the useful prefatory information that heads up the reviews, which includes the number of pages and the sub-genre(s) he thinks the book belongs to.
Brass Tacks is only three pages long this issue and has letters commenting on issues of the magazine from the middle to the end of 2016. There is one that mentions a ‘principle/principal’ typo: I spotted a few in this issue myself, many more than I notice in Asimov’s or F&SF (but fewer than here . . . .)

So, overall, and with the obvious exception of the Hendrix and Pitkin pieces, I found this quite a poor issue of Analog. There are far too many short stories. They slowed down my reading rate as, after one of two of these average or mediocre pieces, I was not motivated to keep going. One other thing: considering that Analog readers are (I presume) intelligent, science-orientated people, I would suggest a reduction in the number of idiots in the stories.

_____________________

1. A link to a page on Yodish, here is.

2. This information comes from Pitkin’s blog post about the story.

This magazine is still being published! Subscribe: Kindle UK, Kindle USA or physical & digital copies.

Edited 9th August 2018: formatting changes.

rssrss

Leave a Reply

This site uses Akismet to reduce spam. Learn how your comment data is processed.

Vortex v01n01, January 1977

ISFDB link

Editor, Keith Seddon

Fiction:
First Entry • short story by Steve Axtell
The End of All Songs (Part 1 of 4) • serial by Michael Moorcock
The Englishman’s Lady • novelette by Ravan Christchild
The Touch of a Vanished Hand • short story by Robert Holdstock

Non-fiction:
Cover • by Rodney Matthews
Interior artwork • by Michelle Robson, James Cawthorn (5 for story, 5 in article), Jocelyn Almond (4), Stephanie Little
Editorial • by Keith Seddon
“Sci-Fi, Sword-and-Sorcery” • interview of James Cawthorn by Eric Sutton

The first I knew of this large size SF magazine (quarto1 according to ISFDB) was when I stumbled upon the second issue in W. H. Smith’s in Union Street, Aberdeen, in early 1977, while wandering down to the bus stop after school. I bought the second issue and pored over it until, a week or so later, this back issue arrived at my newsagent.
It opens with a standard post-New Worlds Editorial by Keith Seddon (Moorcock’s large format New Worlds cast a long shadow, one that would reach even beyond Interzone’s first issues in the early 1980s) and has the seemingly obligatory experimental/speculative fiction pitch:

Vortex has come into being for the simple reason that there is no other monthly magazine of its type. Perhaps most like Vortex was Michael Moorcock’s large format New Worlds which has not been published for over seven years.
Until now, readers have had to satisfy themselves with paperback SF, which has maintained a strong conservatism; not many experimental books have appeared. Not that publishers are to blame for this state of affairs—with the economic recession we are still living through, publishers understandably wanted to stick with sure bets. And even with a straight SF novel, there is still an element of risk.
With the emergence of Vortex, such risks become almost nonsensical, in that each issue will contain several items of fiction, only one of which will be in any way experimental.
Experimental fiction is usually labelled Speculative Fiction, which is reasonable, because not many authors attempt to experiment within the ‘rules’ of Fantasy or Horror or SF. Besides which, the purpose of experimenting is usually to see what happens when certain of these rules are adjusted.
We all know what straight SF, and Fantasy consists of, because we have had the paperbacks to rely upon.
What then is Speculative Fiction? Firstly, it is the hardest of all the forms of fiction to actually write. Because it explores alternatives, challenges established mores, and tends to be more philosophical than scientific, it becomes more difficult to convince the reader of the validity of the changed rules that have been used in any particular item of fiction.
In a way, Speculative Fiction is the most down to earth of all the forms of fiction that are shrouded under the umbrella of Science Fiction; because Speculative Fiction reflects the times. It is often used as a commentary on Social History.
Such fiction is the richest in possibilities. p. 1

If speculative fiction is ‘the richest in possibilities,’ it rather makes you wonder why only one of the stories each issue ‘will be in any way experimental.’ In some respects the promise of fiction-type diversity is remarkably similar to Moorcock’s early ‘don’t frighten the horses’ editorials in the first of his paperback format issues of New Worlds.

First Entry by Steve Axtell2 is a relatively short piece of fiction that gets matters off to a solipsistic start. A man sets up camp near a mansion that is not shown on any maps. This activity is interspersed with several flashbacks to his post-war childhood.
In the morning he climbs the surrounding wall and goes to the mansion. There he is greeted by a beautiful woman who takes him upstairs and makes love to him.
The surreal ending (spoiler) has him wake up to find he has become an old man, andbeside him, the woman is a pile bones. He flees outside, and then finds himself floating in a body of water that he can’t escape. Meanwhile, on the hill above, the mansion burns.
This reads like a transcribed dream, and not a particularly coherent one at that.
The End of All Songs by Michael Moorcock was the start of a four-part serialisation of the final novel in his ‘The Dancers at the End of Time’ trilogy.3 Previous to this there had been two shorter novels published (An Alien Heat and The Hollow Lands) as well as four novellas in New Worlds anthology series (volumes #7 through to #10). I had really enjoyed the first two of these latter novellas, Pale Roses and White Stars, and had then obtained the two novels (which were in paperback by then, having been published in 1972 and 1974).
I thought at the time that this serialisation would save me waiting for the usual year or eighteen months for the paperback version, but I see it was soon published in July of the same year. That said, I’m not sure it is that clever an idea to launch your magazine with the third novel in a trilogy: God knows what new readers made of it.
The first two novels in the trilogy introduce the exotic inhabitants at the End of Time, a dissolute and amoral but innocent and amusing group of characters who use their power rings to satisfy any whim. One of them, Jherek Carnelian, falls in love with a 19th century woman called Amelia Underwood and then pursues her. Their problematical relationship (Underwood is an uptight married woman of her time wrenched into the future, and Carnelian has no concept of ‘virtue’ or ‘sin’) involves two time-travel trips back to the late 19th century. The first trip ends up with Jherek being hanged but surviving as he is spat back to the future. Meanwhile, alien space travellers have visited Earth warning of the end of the Universe. At the end of the second book Jherek and Amelia are stranded in the Silurian era. (There is a longer synopsis of these amusing books below.4)
This instalment starts with the pair trying to make the best of their situation, trying to work out what of the local flora and fauna is edible, etc. They are not left on their own for long before another (unidentified) time-traveller turns up and, after a brief conversation, departs, leaving them a picnic hamper. The idea of a multiverse is either introduced (or restated, I forget) as he mentions he has gone past the End of Time into another universe.
In short order they are joined by Inspector Springer and the Lat (who essentially play the role of rude comic dwarves in the piece) and return with the Jherek and Amelia to their camp for tea. The Lat wander off, build a raft and are attacked by sea scorpions.

Captain Bastable and Una Persson turn up to rescue the survivors and take them all to the Time Centre. Over coffee ‘Sergeant Glouager’ (presumably Karl Gloauger from Behold the Man) tells them about the fluctuations in the Multiverse, and Una Persson tells them about the Conjuction of a Million Spheres, when the multiverse repairs itself. I wondered at this point if this novel was when Moorcock starting tying all his work together.

Jherek and Amelia are sent back to the End of Time in a sequence that has a nice time travel passage:

Jherek watched them retreat. The thrumming grew louder and louder. His back pressed against Mrs. Underwood’s. He turned to ask her if she were comfortable but before he could speak a stillness fell and there was complete silence. His head felt suddenly light. He looked to Mrs. Persson and Captain Bastable for an answer, but they were gone and only a shadowy, flickering ghost of the black wall could be seen. Finally this, too, disappeared and foliage replaced it. Something huge and heavy and alive moved towards them, passed through them, it seemed, and was gone. Heat and cold became extreme, seemed one. Hundreds of colours came and went, but were pale, washed out, rainy. There was dampness in the air he breathed; little tremors of pain ran through him but were past almost before his brain could signal their presence. Booming, echoing sounds — slow sounds, deep and sluggish — blossomed in his ears. He swung up and down, he swung sideways, always as if the capsule were suspended from a wire, like a pendulum. He could feel her warm body pressed to his shoulders, but he could not hear her voice and he could not turn to see her, for every movement took infinity to consider and perform, and he appeared to weigh tons, as though his mass spread through miles of space and years of time. The capsule tilted forward, but he did not fall from his seat; something pressed him in, securing him: grey waves washed him; red rays rolled from toe to head. The chair began to spin. He heard his own name, or something very like it, being called by a high, mocking voice. Words piped at him; all the words of his life.
He breathed in and it was as if Niagara engulfed him. He breathed out; Vesuvius gave voice.
Scales slipped by against his check and fur filled his nostrils and flesh throbbed close to his lips, and fine wings fluttered, great winds blew; he was drenched by a salty rain (he became the History of Man, he became a thousand warm-blooded beasts, he knew unbearable tranquillity). He became pure pain and was the universe, the big slow-dancing stars. His body began to sing. p. 44-45

After they arrive they return to Jherek’s ranch, and they are invited to a party where Mongrove, returned from space, will reveal his news about the state of the Universe.
This is a pleasant enough instalment, but you get the distinct impression of the deck chairs being rearranged for the final section of the novel.

The Englishman’s Lady by Ravan Christchild5 appears to be a coherent piece at first but then degenerates into an almost arbitrary collage of various events and scenes. In among this there are a few threads of narrative, which take place in different times and possibly universes. One concerns Lady Caroline being tasked by Prime Minister Gladstone to go to India on an airship and warn her husband about an imminent uprising. She later meets Captain Terrier on board and they start an affair (there are several instances of casual sex throughout the story).

They later go to see a whole list of rock bands at a three-day concert:

Captain John Terrier escorted the Countess Caroline Giles of Warwick into the Playroom, the best known night-club of French-occupied Cologne. Coloured lights (lashed at them from all angles as they entered the Bastille Bar, where electric guitar music was playing at a volume just below the threshhold of pain.
The service in the Bastille Bar was by waitress, and so Captain Terrier and the Countess sat at a table of smooth green onyx.
Terrier ordered the drinks; two martinis, one (his own) with a measure of Scotch whisky added.
They sat and watched the guitarist, an ambitious young man called Erik (The Red) Klapton, who was backed by a group called the Dominoes. He struck Captain Terrier as being extremely good with a guitar; the Countess thought him rather ugly. P. 21

(The illustration above isn’t of Clapton but an earlier incident on the airship involving Ziggy and the The Spiders from Mars . . . .)
Another thread involves Terrier fighting in Iceland, and there is also an account of war in Kiev tacked on at the end (there is a lot of random violence to go with the sex).
Initially this anarchic, tongue-in-cheek stuff (part Captain Bastable, part Jerry Corneilius and part Oh, What a Lovely War!) is relatively absorbing, but it goes on far too long (it is about 10,000 words) and, ultimately, it makes no narrative sense. And this is the first of a three-story series . . . .
The last story is The Touch of a Vanished Hand by Robert Holdstock. The narrator starts with a short account of psychological problems he had in the past, stemming from when a man held his hands. He then describes a relationship with another man called Gable on the planet Sirius-7. When they use a mechanism to jump to another planet, Gable vanishes and the narrator is left with the permanent feeling of Gable holding his hands. The rest of this short story describes his subsequent travels, including a visit to the vanished man’s son:

“I was not greatly endeared to my father. Nor he to me.”
His voice was Gable’s voice. I wanted to listen to him talk for hours, but he fell silent.
“Why did your father leave? Why did he become so depressed?”
“Why?” He laughed. He kicked at some mechanism hidden in the reeds and his lake erupted into turbulence. He stripped off his clothes and walked to the water’s edge. Gable in every way. I felt my stomach knot and suppressed the desire I felt. He stepped into the waves and shouted, “I was greater than him. In every way.” He began to swim and he turned on his back and there was a smile of horrifying coldness upon his face. “I took his soul. I drained him. I became Him . . . and more.”
The pressure on my hands increased. Was Gable listening? I squeezed the unseen hands and felt the despair of the trapped man. I wondered in what hell Gable was existing. Was his son interested in knowing his father’s fate? Should I tell him? p. 40

The narrator then experiences hallucinations, and the feeling of a woman’s body under Gable’s hands, before he realises (spoiler) that he is the one who has been lost in transit.
This one didn’t entirely work for me, and the gloomy tone (typical of this period) doesn’t help, but it is okay, I suppose, for all that.

The Cover for this issue, and for the next two, is provided by Rodney Matthews. It was certainly an eye-catching magazine on the newsstands, and I still like it (and the other issues) now. The cover artwork would be reproduced without the titling on the back cover of future issues, but this one is blank, as are the inside front and rear cover. The Interior artwork is mostly good amateur level work (by Michelle Robson, Jocelyn Almond and Stephanie Little), and some of it is in colour6, but the real event is a number of large size illustrations by James Cawthorn. He also contributed to the second part of the serial7 and they are even better.
“Sci-Fi, Sword-and-Sorcery” is an interesting interview of that artist, by Eric Sutton. Cawthorn is an interesting subject and there are chunks of it that are quite quoteworthy. This is on SF for escapist readers, for example:

Maybe I read science fiction as an escape, but to me all literature is escapist, for it takes you away from your everyday life. It could be the most morbid fiction you could imagine, but it’s still taking you away. I think that when people say SF is escapist, what they mean is that it’s fantastic. Of course, some SF readers are obviously in retreat from life. In America you had whole hordes of people who literally wished they ‘could find a good book to live in‘, specifically Tolkien’s The Lord of the Rings. They took to it in droves, its history, customs, languages; it was so much nicer than living in the real world. They wanted to stay inside it. Also Frank Herbert’s Dune. That became a cult, and I’m sure the reason is this: it created an entire, fictional world in which you could submerge yourself you didn’t have to come out unless you were forced to. Most of these cultists are of an age when they should be exploring what’s actually going on in the world, building up their own futures, and it makes you wonder what pressures they’re under. Maybe the real world over there is so off-putting that they can’t stand it. That’s real escapism and sounds like a case for a psychoanalyst. I agree that escapism does have a specialised meaning in that case, because these people really are trying to get away; they’re not reading just for amusement, but because they don’t like their lives. They want something else. p. 31

At the time of making this comment, American had just lost the Vietnam war (and endured tumultuous protests about this conflict at home) and President Nixon had only avoided impeachment by resigning.
There is this on pulp fiction:

As for pulp literature, I like it. You see, it’s a sort of . . . it has a sort of nostalgia for me, even though I wasn’t old enough to be reading it during the early thirties when it was in full flood. I like the whole tradition of garish covers, thick pulp pages with untrimmed edges . . . I wish the situation still existed. At its peak two hundred titles a month went on the bookstands — Westerns, Romances, Historical, Fantasy, Science Fiction, Flying Stories. There was even a magazine called Zeppelin Stories, which shows you how specialised the market could get. Writers worked under a tight discipline. The best learned that they could produce very good stuff while working to a tight schedule and under the moral and political restrictions imposed on them by the social conditions of their time. Because don’t forget that this was during the Depression when people wanted what you call escapist literature. You had to be a prolific writer, also. And the pulps accepted things which more respectable magazines wouldn’t touch, among them SF and some types of horror and fantasy. p. 32

And this on sex in SF:

There was a great deal of eroticism in the work of Edgar Rice Burroughs, though because of the time at which he wrote it was largely implicit rather than explicit. If you have ever read his first published novel, A Princess of Mars, it is there from beginning to end, sometimes very powerfully, and quite possibly unconsciously. Later writers such as Howard carried it further out into the open, within the limits of the magazine market. One of the most obvious things about S&S, which has been analysed by many people, is that it’s full of leather, buckles, furs, straps, swords, jewels, all the trappings of the standard erotic story.
When you get writers cashing in on its sudden popularity by including overt sex, they kill the whole motive power of this type of fiction. It’s the fact that the sex element is more or less submerged that drives the story forward. Modern film-makers have almost destroyed the classic horror subjects, such as vampirism, by misusing their freedom to be very explicit in what they put on the screen. p. 36

I think it is observations like these that make me like what little I’ve read of his book reviews.

Overall, this new magazine is a very mixed bag. The pluses for me were the artwork, the Moorcock serial, and the single piece of non-fiction, the minuses were the short fiction, influenced by the worst aspects of the New Wave.

  1. The magazine size is 210 by 274mm, so closer to B5 Extra, 201mm by 276mm.
  2. This is Axtell’s only piece of fiction although he would contribute an interview with Rodney Matthews in the next issue. This suggests that ‘Axtell’ may be a pseudonym for Seddon.
  3. Although this is supposed to be the third part of a trilogy, it is more like the second half of a very long novel. Each novel flows seamlessly into the next.
  4. The first novel, Alien Heat, opens at the End of Time with Jherek Carnelian (the first naturally created human in many years) and his mother having a picnic. They discuss the meaning of the word ‘virtue,’ which Jherek finds baffling. They later make love, before departing in a recreated airborne locomotive to Jherek’s house. You can get a feel for the series from this scene:
    He sounded his whistle.
    “Shuffle off to Buffalo!”
    Responding to the sonic signal, the little locomotive took magnificently to the air, shunting up the sky, with lovely, lime-coloured steam puffing from its smokestack and from beneath its wheels.
    “Oh, they gave him his augurs at Racine-Virginia,” sang Jherek Carnelian, donning a scarlet and cloth-of-gold engineer’s cap, “saying steam-up, you’re way behind time! It ain’t ‘98, it’s old ‘97. You got to get on down that old Nantucket line!”
    The Iron Orchid settled back in her seat of plush and ermine (an exact reproduction, she understood, of the original) and watched her son with amusement as he opened the firedoor and shovelled in the huge black diamonds which he had made specially to go with the train and which, though of no particular use in fuelling the aircar, added aesthetic texture to the recreation.
    “Where do you find all these old songs, Carnelian, my own?”
    “I came across a cache of ‘platters,’“ he told her, wiping honest sweat from his face with a silk rag.
    The train swept rapidly over a sea and a range of mountains. “A form of sound-storage of the same period as the original of this aircar. A million years old, at least, though there’s some evidence that they, themselves, are reproductions of other originals. Kept in perfect condition by a succession of owners.”
    He slammed the firedoor shut and discarded the platinum shovel, joining her upon the couch and staring down at the quaintly moulded countryside which Mistress Christia, the Everlasting Concubine, had begun to build a while ago and then abandoned.
    It was not elegant. In fact it was something of a mess. Two-thirds of a hill, in the fashion of the 91st century post-Aryan landscapers, supported a snake-tree done after the Saturnian manner but left uncoloured; part of an 11th century Gothic ruin stood beside a strip of river of the Bengali Empire period.
    You could see why she had decided not to finish it, but it seemed to Jherek that it was a pity she had not bothered to disseminate it. Someone else would, of course, sooner or later.
    “Carrie Joan,” he sang, “she kept her boiler going. Carrie Joan, she filled it full of wine. Carrie Joan didn’t stop her rowing. She had to get to Brooklyn by a quarter-past nine!” He turned to the Iron Orchid.
    “Do you like it? The quality of the platters isn’t all it could be, but I think I’ve worked out all the words now.”
    “Is that what you were doing last year?” She raised her fine eyebrows. “I heard the noises coming from your Hi-Rise.” She laughed. “And I thought it was to do with sex.” She frowned. “Or animals.” She smiled. “Or both.” p.10-11
    (Nice little nod to Ballard’s novel there.)
    They go on to a party hosted by The Duke of Queens. He has recreated the 28th century Great Fire of Africa with burning cities sculpted from water! Jherek meets various people including the eternally gloomy Mongrove, the time-traveller Li Pao, Lord Jagged, and Mistress Christia the Everlasting Concubine, who is having sex with a gorilla (although this is O’Kala Incardanine in another form). Most significantly he meets a very proper lady time-traveller from the 19th Century called Mrs Amelia Underwood, and Yusharip, a space traveller who is prophesising the end of the Universe (this theme runs in the background throughout the novel). As is the custom among the denizens of the End of Time, they both end up are captives in a menagerie. When Jherek decides to fall in love with Amelia it sets in place the arc of the novel’s events.
    Lord Jagged subsequently suggests to Jherek that he steal Yusharip from My Lady Charlotina so he can trade him to Mongrove for Mrs Underwood (Jherek subsequently delights in the thrill of being called a ‘thief’). When Jherek and Amelia finally spend time together the novel turns from a farce into a culture clash comedy of manners. Eventually they kiss, and it is at this point My Lady Charlotina gets her revenge by snatching Mrs Underwood and sending her back in time to the 19th Century. Jherek eventually follows in a time machine similar to the one in Behold the Man. There are lots of other in-jokes in the book too, such as Jherek being told to use the name ‘Lord Carnell’ (after the previous editor of New Worlds, John Carnell) when he is recruited by a 19th century con-man called Snoozer Vine, who uses Jherek to break into fancy hotels.
    The first novel reaches a climax when Jherek is sentenced to hang for murder—the caper in the hotel goes awry and Snoozer Vine shoots a doorman—by a judge who looks exactly like Lord Jagged but who refuses to acknowledge that he knows Jherek. At the point of the gallows trapdoor dropping he finds himself back at the End of Time, courtesy of the Morphail effect. There are various mentions of this effect throughout the novel—a phenomenon that expels time travellers from a particular period so that time won’t be altered—and other time travel detail that suggests that something underhand is occurring.
    The second book, The Hollow Lands, again starts with a mother and son picnic, this time at Shanslorn, one of the ancient cities. And once again they head off to a party, this time a regatta organised by My Lady Charlotina where the entrants have got the wrong idea about historical ships: the Queen Elizabeth is a huge wooden woman. . . . Later Jherek talks time-travel with the scientist Brannart Morphail (he of the Morphail effect) before going to hunt for a new time-traveller who has been detected by Morphail’s instruments. When The Duke of Queens flying hen breaks down they end up in a forest where they hear a band of wandering musicians who turn out to be the Lat, an aggressive group of one-eyed, three pupiled dwarves who attempt to kidnap them.
    Jherek escapes, only to fall down a tunnel into Wonderland, which is a nursery run by a robotic nurse. The nursery appears to have been in a closed time loop for millions of years. The Lat later turn up, and it isn’t long before Nurse sorts them out. She later speaks to Jerry (as she calls Jherek, who she has developed a soft spot for) about the current time-period, and agrees to send him back to 1896 so he can be reunited with Mrs Underwood.
    Back in 1896 there is more entertainment to be had as Jherek once again upsets the conventions of the times. He meets H. G. Wells on his way to Amelia’s home and has a sincere conversation with Wells about time travel. The next highlight is at Amelia’s house— Jherek is having tea with her when Mr Underwood arrives home, and the conversation spirals entertainingly out of control. The best part of the book.
    Amelia and Jherek end up leaving the house to escape an irate Mr Underwood and are later unsuccessfully pursued by police.
    The last part of the book has them in the company of a number of Café Royale writers and editors when Inspector Springer (the arresting policeman from the first book) arrives to apprehend them. Jagged rescues the pair and puts them in a time machine back to the End of Time. It malfunctions en route and they overshoot their own period and end up in the Silurian era.
    If the first book is a social comedy, this one is more or a farce. + for both books.
  5. Seddon denied that he was Christchild at the time and, I have been told, repeated this a few years ago. The Steve Mitchell character from this story reappears, however, in Mark Ambient’s Due West: Vermilion Sun on Horizon: Dying in issue #5. Ambient, like Axtell, is another one story, one interview author . . . .
  6. I think the colour title plates of the Christchild and Holdstock stories may be by the designers rather than the artists listed. They are of a markedly different style from the B&W artwork for the stories.
  7. Cawthorn didn’t illustrate the third and fourth parts, I assume because he didn’t get paid (I vaguely recall a comment from Michael Moorcock about not getting paid the money for the serial rights after the magazine collapsed, but can’t remember where I read it).
rssrss

Leave a Reply

This site uses Akismet to reduce spam. Learn how your comment data is processed.

The Magazine of Fantasy and Science Fiction #322, March 1978

ISFDB link

Editor, Edward L. Ferman; Assistant Editor, Anne W. Burke

Fiction:
The Persistence of Vision • novella by John Varley ∗∗∗+
Hundred Years Gone • short story by Manly Wade Wellman ∗∗
The Family Man • short story by Theodore L. Thomas
The Seventh Fool • short story by Glen Cook ∗∗∗
Hear Me Now, My Sweet Abbey Rose • short story by Charles L. Grant ∗∗∗+
Down the Ladder • short story by Robert F. Young ∗∗
The Horror Out of Time • short story by Randall Garrett ∗∗∗
Papa Schimmelhorn’s Yang • novelette by Reginald Bretnor ∗∗∗+

Non-fiction:
Cover • by Chesley Bonestell
Books • by Algis Budrys
Cartoon • by Gahan Wilson
Films and Television: The Road to Albany • by Baird Searles
Coming next month
Anyone for Tens? • science essay by Isaac Asimov

The reason I picked up this issue was that I’d watched the movie Damnation Alley1 and couldn’t recall what Baird Searles had said about it in his column (although I remember he reviewed it). After finding the copy and reading Films and Television: The Road to Albany, I discovered that he thought as little of it as I did:

All I can say further is that all those people who came down on Star Wars because it was “childish,” “mindless,” “inept,” “silly,” or “fatuous,” should be condemned to see Damnation Alley ten times to find out what those words really mean. p. 99

He also briefly mentions a UK TV series called Star Maidens, which I’ve never heard of, never mind seen.
After I’d read the column I skimmed the rest of the contents and thought that the line-up of names looked like that of an all-star issue—before noticing, a few moments later, that description on the cover. This was quite unusual for the time as F&SF normally ran only one all-star issue every year, its October anniversary issue. Why there was an extra one in the March of this year I have no idea—I suspect that Ed Ferman realised he had inadvertently put one together, and labelled it as such. That said, there were quite a few special issues around this time,2 so it may have been a marketing decision.

The fiction leads off with The Persistence of Vision by John Varley, who was, at the time, probably the hot new writer of the mid-seventies. Although this wasn’t one of his acclaimed ‘Eight Worlds’ series,3 it would go on to win both the Hugo and Nebula Awards.
The story takes place in a near-future America, and is narrated by a man who has been travelling from commune to commune. In New Mexico he comes upon Keller, a settlement created for a group of deaf-blind people who are the result of a 1960’s German Measles epidemic. He ends up staying, and the story mostly describes the very different way the Kellerians live to compensate for their lack of sight and hearing. More significantly, it is also about how they communicate.
Initially the narrator is taught by Pink, a teenager who later becomes one of his two lovers, how to ‘speak’ to the group.4 She teaches him to spell out letters using his hands. However, there is another level of language more complicated than this which he calls ‘shorthand,’ which is turn is exactly that for a even more complex whole-body form of expression. He sees this at the unusual nightly gatherings the group has:

I thought I was in the middle of an orgy. I had been at them before, in other communes, and they looked pretty much like this. I quickly saw that I was wrong and only later found out I had been right. In a sense.
What threw my evaluations out of whack was the simple fact that group conversation among these people had to look like an orgy. The much subtler observation that I made later was that with a hundred naked bodies sliding, rubbing, kissing, caressing all at the same time, what was the point in making a distinction? There was no distinction.
I have to say that I use the noun “orgy” only to get across a general idea of many people in close contact. I don’t like the word, it is too ripe with connotations. But I had these connotations myself at the time, and so I was relieved to see that it was not an orgy. The ones I had been to had been tedious and impersonal, and I had hoped for better from these people.
Many wormed their way through the crush to get to me and meet me. It was never more than one at a time; they were constantly aware of what was going on and were waiting their turn to talk to me. Naturally, I didn’t know it then. Pink sat with me to interpret the hard thoughts. I eventually used her words less and less, getting into the spirit of tactile seeing and understanding. No one felt they really knew me until they had touched every part of my body, and there were hands on me all the time. I timidly did the same. p. 23-24

Much later (the story is a slow burn) he discovers that the Kellerian adults also get together to ∗∗∗:

The German shepherds and the sheltie were out there, sitting on the cool grass facing the group of people. Their ears were perked up, but they were not moving.
I started to go up to the people. I stopped when I became aware of the concentration. They were touching, but their hands were not moving. The silence of seeing all those permanently moving people standing that still was deafening to me.
I watched them for at least an hour. I sat with the dogs and scratched them behind the ears. They did that chop-licking thing that dogs do when they appreciate it, but their full attention was on the group.
It gradually dawned on me that the group was moving. It was very slow, just a step here and another there over many minutes. It was expanding in such a way that the distance between any of the individuals was the same. Like the expanding universe, where all galaxies move away from all others.
Their arms were extended now; they were touching only with fingertips in a crystal lattice arrangement.
Finally they were not touching at all. I saw their fingers straining to cover distances that were too far to bridge. And still they expanded equilaterally. One of the shepherds began to whimper a little. I felt the hair on the back on my neck standing up. Chilly out here, I thought.
I closed my eyes, suddenly sleepy.
I opened them, shocked. Then I forced them shut. Crickets were chirping in the grass around me.
There was something in the darkness behind my eyeballs. I felt that if I could turn my eyes around I would see it easily, but it eluded me in a way that made peripheral vision seem like reading headlines.
If there was ever anything impossible to pin down, much less describe, that was it. It tickled at me for a while as the dogs whimpered louder, but I could make nothing of it. The best analogy I could think of was the sensation a blind person might feel from the sun on a cloudy day.
I opened my eyes again. p. 38-39

Not only can he not grasp this ineffable sensation, neither can the children of the group, who can all see and hear. His inability to connect with the group on this level (and his other inner demons) eventually lead him to leave the commune.
The last few pages of the story (spoiler) have him return to the group shortly after the Millennium, to find that the adults have ∗∗∗-ed, vanished, transmigrated to what- or wherever. He sees that Pink is now blind and deaf, as are the other remaining ‘normal’ children, and the story finishes with her putting her hands on his ears and eyes and making him the same way.
When I first read this story all those years ago I found the ending exasperating; this time around I thought it worked better. My reservation on this occasion is that the story feels a little dated and hippy-ish, but you can see how its Stranger in a Strange Land/Mimsy Were the Borogroves mashup won it a Hugo and Nebula Award.
Hundred Years Gone is one of Manly Wade Wellman’s ‘Southern Appalachia’ stories according to ISFDB,5 which essentially means that it has the feel of a ‘Silver John’ story without Silver John. In this one a young man makes his way up a hillside trail and collapses at the door of a cabin. When he wakes he finds two woman caring for him, one younger and one older. Eventually we find that the man has made his way there because of a folklore tale about the original owner of the place, which used to be an inn for travellers. The owner killed the visitors for their money, horses, and darker reasons involving devil worship.
In the cabin there is a storeroom with a cross on the door and the windows. There is also a hundred year anniversary of the owner’s death, etc. It is a competent enough tale that plays out pretty much as expected, but it feels a little uneven, and the authorial hand manoeuvring the actors through their paces is too obvious. It rather reads like a by-the-numbers pastiche of Wellman’s work by another author.
The Family Man by Theodore L. Thomas tells of an astronaut whose spaceship is exploring the plume of a comet. This narrative is intercut with scenes from his domestic life with his wife and kids. While he is in the plume he sees a kid’s marble ball go by, as well as a desk. The last scene has him on the surface where he sees another anomalous object:

At ten seconds he looked around, glanced back behind him out the porthole for the first time. Thirty meters behind him, on the surface, was a perfectly square depression on the surface, framed in a rim. A raised bar ran across the center of the surface of the square within the rim, and the bar had openings along its length. Openings, like handholes. p. 77

I was mystified as to what this, and the point of the story, was.
The Seventh Fool by Glen Cook is a slight but entertaining fantasy about a con-artist and thief who arrives in Antonisen, one of the Hundred Cities, and tries to scam one of the candidates in the election for a new Fool. The biter is bit, or nibbled at least.
Hear Me Now, My Sweet Abbey Rose by Charles L. Grant is an unsettling horror story about a man and his three daughters at a new house in the country, and the trouble brought by the young men of the area. The father is particularly possessive of one of the three daughters, Abbey, and this is the core of the story.
I thought this was excellent piece the first time I read it and, while I didn’t appreciate it as much this time around, it is still a strong contribution.
Down the Ladder by Robert F. Young is a nostalgic story of a boy’s childhood, and the visits he made to his grandfather’s and uncle’s house, an old, creaky, and ill-maintained affair with an overgrown garden. The narrative alternates between Jeff’s childhood and the present day, where he runs a restaurant and lives in a new house on the site of his uncle’s old one. Late on in the story (spoiler) there is a rather tacked-on ending that has the uncle extracting from Jeff a promise not to tear down the house after his death, and a mention of the critters that live there . . . .
I think that this story may be typical of Young’s later work: they are well-written and absorbing pieces, but don’t always work as a story.
The Horror Out of Time by Randall Garrett tells of an explorer on a sailing ship which encounters a storm caused by volcanic eruption. After barely surviving the event they come upon land that has risen from the depths. While the captain anchors the ship to make repairs, the explorer goes to investigate a structure he has seen:

The close-up view through the spyglass only made the island look the more uninviting. Rivulets of sea water, still draining from the upper plateau, cut through sheets of ancient slime that oozed gelatinously down the precipitate slopes to the coral-crusted beach below. Pools of nauseous-looking liquid formed in pockets of dark rock and bubbled slowly and obscenely. As I watched, I became obsessed with the feeling that I had seen all this before in some hideous nightmare.
Then something at the top of the cliff caught my eye. It was something farther inland, and I had to readjust the focus of my instrument to see it clearly. For a moment, I held my breath. It appeared to be the broken top of an embattled tower! p. 115

Once on the island and inside the tower he comes upon what he suspects is a sacrificial altar. He sees a carven monstrosity above it and flees back to the ship.
This reads for the most part like a middling Lovecraftian pastiche, but its twist ending is quite clever.
Papa Schimmelhorn’s Yang by Reginald Bretnor starts with the eighty year old lecher having been once again grounded by his wife for his amorous adventures:

So he had retreated to his basement workshop and to the more congenial company of his old striped tomcat, Gustav-Adolf, whose tastes and instincts were much like his own, and had devoted several days to assembling and installing the curious miscellany of valves, gears, tubing, solenoids, and oddly formed ceramics which, in and around a device resembling (though only when you looked at it correctly) the illegitimate offspring of a translucent Klein bottle, constituted the functioning heart of his invention.
The job done, he fired up the boiler and stood over it while it produced a proper head of steam.
Ach, Gustav-Adolf,” he exclaimed, “how nice it iss I am a chenius! Imachine—no vun else knows dot for anti-grafity you must haff shteam, instead of elecdricity vhich gets in der vay. Und I myself do not know vhy, because it iss all in mein subconscience, chust as Herr Doktor Jung told me in Geneva vhen I vas chanitor at der Institut fur High Physics.”
“Mrreow!” replied GustavAdolf, looking up from his saucer of dark beer on the cluttered Schimmelhorn workbench.
“Dot’s right, und predty soon ve see how it vorks.” Papa Schimmelhom made some fine adjustments and peered at the steam gauge on the dashboard. He closed the hood and clamped it down. “Zo, ve are ready!” he exclaimed. Thinking of Dora Grossapfel’s plump behind under easily removable stretchpants, he climbed into the driver’s seat. “Ach, such a pity, Gustav-Adolf! Imachine, my nice Dora among der predty clouds maybe at two thousand feet!” p. 135-136

His nephew Anton turns up and takes him and the modified car to Hong Kong, where he meets two businessmen, Mr Peng, and Mr Plantagenet. Mr Peng explains the latter is the rightful heir to the British throne:

“He is descended directly from another Richard Plantagenet, known as the Lion Hearted, and he is the rightful King of England—”
“Your Machesty—” murmured Papa Schimmelhom politely.
“Thank you,” said His Majesty. “Yes, after we became friends Horace explained the influence of dragons on our history. All that dreadful St. George nonsense, and the other horrible myths and fairy tales. I at once saw the role they’d played in enabling the usurpation of our throne. Not that I have anything against the present usurper, who seems to be a very decent sort of woman, but I do want to set the matter right, you know. That’s simple justice, isn’t it? Besides, Horace and I have all sorts of plans. We shall re-establish the Chinese and British Empires. No one will be able to stand against us. My dear Papa, we shall rule the world!” p. 143

They tell him about the connection between his anti-gravity car, black holes and a parallel universe. This other reality has dragons and a Chinese Empire, and yin and yang are in balance. Papa agrees to work on a portal that will connect the two universes.
As his subconscious works on the problem he works his way through the local women, much to the annoyance of the two stewardesses who were his playmates on the flight over: they tell the wives of the two tycoons what is going on, and they fly to the States to convince Mrs Schimmelhorn to come back with them to put an end to the project:

Mrs. Peng did her best to explain the technicalities of Black Holes and anti-gravity and yang and yin—to engineer a breakthrough into another universe, where there were dragons and the Chinese Empire still flourished.
Mama Schimmelhorn stood up. “Donnerwetter! Die yang und yin I do nodt undershtand, also Black Holes except like maybe in Calcutta. But Papa—dot iss different. Vhen it iss nodt naked vomen, it iss time-trafel, und gnurrs, und sometimes X-rated cuckoo-clocks. Such monkey business. Vell, now I put a shtop!”
“We were hoping you could,” Mrs. Plantagenet said fervently. “I assure you that I have no desire to become Queen of England. I couldn’t possibly cope with that dreadful Labour Party at my age. Besides, Richard keeps talking about crusades against the Saracens, and though I dare say they deserve it, it does seem a bit late in the day for that sort of thing, doesn’t it?”
“Primula’s quite right,” declared Mrs. Peng. “I myself certainly do not want to be Empress of China, surrounded by eunuchs and slave girls and palace intrigues and all that rubbish. Of course, Horace has promised me that he doesn’t want the throne, but there aren’t any other candidates, and—well, you know how men are.”
Mama Schimmelhorn indicated grimly that indeed she did.
“But worst of all,” Mrs. Peng continued, “he wants to bring the dragons back again, even though he knows I can’t stand snakes and lizards and all those horrible crawly things. You see, in ancient China his family had charge of them, and they became quite devoted to the creatures. Can you imagine having the sky full of dragons, Mrs. Schimmelhorn?”
“Dragons?” Mama Schimmelhorn snorted. “Herr Gott, iss bad enough vith seagulls und die filthy shtarlings!” p. 149

The story eventually resolves at an imperial palace in the parallel world. Entertaining and amusing stuff, if you can take its occasional Benny Hill-like sensibilities.

The Cover for this issue is a very poor affair: dull, static, and with amateurishly drawn lizards. Surprisingly, it is by Chesley Bonestell.
Books by Algis Budrys is a rambling column that supposedly starts with a review of Fred Pohl’s Gateway, but it is really a reflection on a type of fiction he suggests is different from Campbellian SF, and stems from the Futurians. Budrys variously describes this:

What is clear is that the major artistic weakness of Futurian technique was a gimmicky, sometimes mordant, always slightly withdrawn effect which lent itself tellingly to important but flashy work such as The Space Merchants, but even at Kornbluth’s hands had difficulty coming to grips with the deeper feelings. Perhaps a term we’re groping for is “anti- Romanticism.” p. 65

Futurians liked to thump you with a cartoon beginning, tell a straight story spotted with wry observations, and hit you with a twist ending. Not until the 1950s did Cyril Kombluth begin making it a rule to end in the withdrawing, omniscient auctorial comment to be found ending such stories as “The Luckiest Man in Denv.”
Or, not ending—terminating… a technique that can be seen again in Pohl’s “Happy Birthday, Dear Jesus,” et seq. p. 65-66

He finishes by saying how Gateway transcends this model:

Gateway represents two departures from the Futurian style, even the evolved Postwar ex-Futurian style. One is that general collage-y technique, like a restrained version of Joe Haldeman’s Mindbridge, whose roots are much elsewhere. But the other is that, in the ending, Brodhead weeps.
Now, people at the endings of many Futurian stories weep. Or they stand aghast, or scream, or drop their jaws. They are cartoons. Not Brodhead. Pohl would not be true to his past if Brodhead were a full figure; he is still not a personality but an archetype—a prole. But he is a lost prole. His enemy is not the fat cat; his troubles are not those of the innocent victim within too large a mechanism. He is, in a sense, not a victim at all. He is large enough a person within himself so that he has the capacity to inflict pain on himself, and to recognize whence it comes. He weeps real tears. From the author of “Let the Ants Try,” Gladiator-at-Law and Slave Ship, this is more than unexpected.
I think Gateway is more than an excellent piece of SF. I think it is a sign that the Futurian/Campbellian dichotomy is at an end just as we begin to grasp the extent of its existence. p. 66

The last part of the essay reviews Knight’s The Futurians, but quickly veers off into how, since the Futurians, SF writers have been taught: universities, Milford, Clarion, etc.
It is a pity there isn’t a letters column in F&SF; it would have been interesting to read the replies to this essay.
Gahan Wilson contributes a Cartoon (God hurling thunderbolts from a cloud and moaning that it isn’t easy) that is a miss for me.
Anyone for Tens? by Isaac Asimov starts with an anecdote:

Occasionally I will write an article for F&SF that will accept, as a matter of course, the development of the Universe and life and man and brain by evolutionary processes. This is taken quietly by my F&SF audience.
Not so if I reach beyond to people not ordinarily exposed to such ideas. If I make similar assumptions in articles in TV Guide, for instance, I rouse the Bible Belt, and I am promptly bombarded with letters on the iniquity of evolutionary ideas or of any notions that are post-Biblical in nature (except for television sets, I presume).
At first, I would conscientiously try to send reasoned replies, and then it became clear that this was equivalent to trying to bail out the ocean with a spoon, I spent some time brooding on human folly.
Then I decided that such brooding also got me nowhere, and so what I do now is glance over each letter for laughs before dumping it.
My favorite recent letter, coming in response to an article on the big bang theory of the origin of the Universe, began as follows: “The trouble with you scientists is that you don’t observe. If you only took the trouble to make the simplest observations you would see at once that the Bible says, ‘In the beginning God created the heaven and the earth.’”
Imagine scientists overlooking that key observation! And it is actually the first verse in the Bible! You would think it was impossible to miss. It makes me feel sad that I must turn now to a mathematical topic concerning which there is no controversy and on which the Bible Belt makes no stand based on their superior powers of observation. p. 123-124

The article itself is about number bases, logarithms, and slide rules. I briefly used the latter before electronic calculators became available, so this was a trip down memory lane.
Finally, Coming next month trails a promising All-British Special issue, with stories from Aldiss, Priest, Cowper, Brunner, Roberts, Watson, Aickman and Bulmer.

A good issue.

  1. The movie of Damnation Alley gets off to a good start actually. The first ten or fifteen minutes take place in an underground missile control room when a Soviet attack occurs. A nuclear conflagration ensues.
    We then cut to two years after the holocaust, and the Earth’s weather has become very strange. By this time Hell Tanner, one of the missile officers, has left the Air Force and we find him on his motorcycle, evading man-size insects. His rebellious attitude does not stop him and his black friend going to Albany in two armoured Air Force cars.
    The rest of the movie consists of various characters either dying (in a storm, and by armoured, killer cockroaches) or being picked up (a woman with a French accent, and a teenage kid). The unifying features of these adventures are people acting like idiots (just as in the more recent Promethus) and Hell Tanner zooming about on his muffler-less motorbike.
    There is also a spectacularly bad piece of script-writing when they discuss the cause of the freak weather (nice SFX skies). This is attributed to a change in the Earth’s axial tilt but, after a half-hearted attempt at explaining this, the scriptwriters give up.
  2. The tail end of 1976 had an October anniversary issue and a November Damon Knight special author issue; 1977 had a July Harlan Ellison special author issue and an October anniversary issue; 1978 had a March all-star issue, an April all-British issue, and an October anniversary issue.
  3. The ‘Eight Worlds‘ series, like much of Varley’s other writing of the time, took the sense of wonder SF of the forties and fifties and married it to a very modern attitude to sexuality, gender and characterisation.
  4. After decades of paedophile scandals it is difficult to view this relationship, between a forty-seven year old man and a thirteen year old girl, dispassionately. However, the sexual attitudes in the story, probably a hangover from the hippie ‘free love’ era, are perhaps best summed up by another passage in the story:
    I also don’t seem to have mentioned homosexuality. You can mark it down to my early conditioning that my two deepest relationships at Keller were with women: Pink and Scar. I haven’t said anything about it simply because I don’t know how to present it. I talked to men and women equally, on the same terms. I had surprisingly little trouble being affectionate with the men.
    I could not think of the Kellerites as bisexual, though clinically they were. It was much deeper than that. They could not even recognize a concept as poisonous as a homosexuality taboo. It was one of the first things they learned. If you distinguish homosexuality from heterosexuality, you are cutting yourself off from communication—full communication—with half the human race. They were pansexual; they could not separate sex from the rest of their lives. p. 40
    Presumably this philosophy applies across the (puberty onwards) ages and well as the sexes.
  5. Wellman’s ‘Southern Appalachia’ series at ISFDB.

This magazine is still being published! Subscribe: Kindle UKKindle USAWeightless Books or physical copies.

rssrss

6 thoughts on “The Magazine of Fantasy and Science Fiction #322, March 1978

  1. Todd Mason

    This was the first issue of F&SF I purchased off a newsstand, newly released. Which leads us to why it was an All-Star Issue: that’s how Edward Ferman tried to soften the blow of a rise in price, as this was the first $1.25 issue.

    As I remember the Ted Thomas story, the point was that the astronaut protagonist was seeking a somewhat greater meaning to his life than he felt he had…the escape hatch into the comet is not a detail I remember, however, so I should reread the story before saying much more. A gentler variation on some of what Barry Malzberg was working on at the time, I think. And the only “true” sf story in the issue, as I consider the Varley and all the other stories fantasies and not a few of them horror fiction, which is part of what I was hoping for in F&SF, and got it in spades in this first new issue.

    As a lonely 13yo several years into puberty, you might well imagine how “The Persistence of Vision” hit me; the notion of a guy in early middle age getting involved with a teen didn’t bother me so much at the time, though I did wonder about that a bit, even given the nature of their circumstances. It’s notable that this was the title story for the US first edition of Varley’s very impressive first collection (the UK publishers presumably decided that title wasn’t skiffy enough, and chose to retitle the collection after arguably the second-best story in the book, “In the Hall of the Martian Kings”–good’n’skiffilicious).

    I liked the Wellman better than you did, as well. The Randall Garrett was one of several parody stories he was publishing at that time, and while I dug the parody, I also dug that it could be read “straight” as well…contrast his “Backstage Lensman” in ANALOG at about the same time. Both are in the TAKEOFF collections.

    The Young doesn’t simply fail as a story. It’s dumb. If not quite as dumb as some of the others he was publishing at this time (I will grant that “The Journal of Nathaniel Worth”, in the July “78 FANTASTIC, has some nice details to it before its ridiculous “slingshot” ending.)

    The discursiveness of Algis Budrys’s review columns puzzled me a bit at first, but I grew to fully aprpreciate them almost immediately, and eagerly sought out THE FUTURIANS. I’d already read some of Asimov’s essays…I always found him (unsurprisingly) most interesting about chemistry (in which he took his PhD and was a professor) and in our mutual passion for astronomy (he wrote sadly little about oceanography, my other scientific passion at the time), very good in physics and the history of science (which last became his primary nonfictional subject), but least interesting in his writing about mathematics. Baird Searles’s review of DAMNATION ALLEY is among his funniest columns, and hard to begrudge him anything there. I liked the Wilson cartoon in this issue, but he did better ones…they essentially never failed to amuse.

    The Cook story struck me as a great fantasy in the Leiber tradition; I would soon see it as an expert Jack Vance pastiche, and prefer it (and other stories in FANTASTIC that year and other early work) to some of Cook’s later contributions. The problem with some Charles Grant stories of this period is the implied rather than stated resolutions to the stories, I thought, couldn’t carry the weight placed upon them by the increasing dread evoked by the narratives as they made their way to the endings. A little less vague allusiveness helped, and I think he had that sense as well, in his later work.

    Glad you were drawn back to this issue.

    Reply
    1. paul.fraser@sfmagazines.com Post author

      Thanks for your comments-it’s good to get an detailed alternate view. Some of this issue (the Thomas, it would seem) went over my head now; a lot more would have if I had read it at 13 (rather than as a nineteen year old). Apart from an absolute value judgement of the Wellman, I don’t think it is as good as the first of the ‘Silver John’ stories I’ve read in the early fifties issues. As to Varley, I think the standouts of this period for me were ‘Gotta Sing, Gotta Dance’ and ‘In the Bowl’.
      You’ll have to explain what you mean about the difference in the implied and stated resolutions to the Grant story (I thought the ending was the latter, an unequivocal ‘possession’ of the father by the dead daughter) or were you talking about his work in general?
      As to the All Star issue coming off the back of a price rise, yes, that rings a bell. I really should read these in order, but what would be the fun in that?

      Reply
      1. Todd Mason

        Definitely the Oxrun Station stories by Grant generally, at least the earlier ones. I will certainly agree that this story, and some of his other non-John stories set in the same milieu, tend to be not quite as good, but I still like them…perhaps my own Appalachian roots are showing.

        Reply
  2. Denny Lien

    Wasn’t Wellman on record somewhere as saying he really disliked the “Silver John” version of his series name (forced on the late novels by the publisher, I believe), and preferred to think of the series name just as “John”?

    Speaking of dislike, I’ve had an irrational (or rational) loathing for Papa Schimmelhorn, and all his works and all his ways, ever since I first encountered him, and it was strong enough to make me instinctively dislike all other Bretnor fiction I read as well. Maybe just my quirk.

    Reply
    1. paul.fraser@sfmagazines.com Post author

      I picked up ‘Silver John’ from Galactic Central, I think, although I see it is on the cover of (at least) one of the books. The three I’ve read in F&SF (from 1951, ’52 and ’62) don’t use that description in their introductions, and they are listed under ‘John the Balladeer’ in ISFDB.
      I don’t think Todd Likes Papa S. much either: can you put your finger on what it is you don’t like?

      Reply

Leave a Reply

This site uses Akismet to reduce spam. Learn how your comment data is processed.

Beneath Ceaseless Skies #218-219, 2nd & 16th February 2017

ISFDB links: #218, #219

Editor-in-Chief, Scott H. Andrews

Other Reviews:
Greg Hullender and Eric Wong, Rocket Stack Rank
Dave Truesdale, Anne Crookshanks, Tangent Online (#218, #219)
Charles Payseur, Quick Sip Reviews (#218, 219)
Various, Goodreads (#218, #219)

Fiction:
#218
Out of the Woods • short story by Marissa Lingen
Men of the Ashen Morrow • short story by Margaret Killjoy
#219
Gravity’s Exile • novelette by Grace Seybold
The Last Dinosaur Rider of Benessa County • short story by Jeremy Sim

Non-fiction:
Source • cover by Florent Llamas

These two issues actually have different covers for a change (a panoramic work has been split in two) but I’ve covered them together; even so it makes for a short ‘issue.’

Out of the Woods by Marissa Lingen is a story about a small group of rebels who wait for the return of their King, and the pardon they hope he will grant them. When he does arrive back in his kingdom it is on his pyre, and his despised brother continues to rule.
After watching four of their number hanged, the central character, Lovis, comes up with a ruse that gets her near to the brother. Then (spoiler) she kills him with a finger-snap spell, a minor fantasy device used earlier in the text. This rather arbitrary event brings to end a tale that consists mostly of talk between the rebels. While this is occasionally interesting, it doesn’t add up what I would call a story.
Men of the Ashen Morrow by Margaret Killjoy has a group of hunters sacrifice a deer to the God Hulokk. The hunters want to bring summer to an end, to prevent the ‘bright monsters’ flooding into the valley:

He would come. Not for the sacrifice—what’s a deer to the god of all rivers and roots and everything on the ground and beneath it—but for the hunters. Hulokk would come when summoned by His people. As like as not, He’d take someone with Him.
Sal didn’t want to die, and she assumed none of her companions did either. But Hulokk must freeze the earth to end the summer, and winter must come for the snows to settle onto the hills, and the snows must come to keep the creatures from the West at bay. Risk was necessary to life, always.
[. . .]
The doe’s blood melted and burned the earth. The smell of old rot poured into the forest. The ground collapsed, pulling the saplings and ferns down into the underworld, and Sal and her company stepped back.
A single segmented leg, infinitely thin and long, crept out from the hole. First one, then another. Then another, another, another. Slower than the setting of the summer sun, His fat, round worm body of flesh and stone rose into the air. His belly was awash with eyes. He looked at Sal, and Sal borrowed the breath of the other hunters. She spoke, in the tongue of the gods:
“I ask you, Hulokk, to bring an end to summer.”
“I will not.” Hulokk’s voice was a thousand voices, across and below the audible.
“I ask you, Hulokk, to bring an end to summer.”
“I will not.” Ancient trees trembled and fell, and Sal felt her heart quiver in her chest from the physical force of the voice.
“I ask you, Hulokk, to bring an end to summer.”
“I will.”
Four legs shot out and wrapped around Lelein, and she screamed, hoarse and angry.
“I ask you, Hulokk,” Sal started, but it took more magic than she could summon to keep her voice in the tongue of the gods. She finished her sentence meekly, in a human language.
“To spare our lives.”
The god dragged Sal’s lover into the depths of the earth. At the last moment, the eldest among the hunters put a quarrel through Lelein’s throat, silencing her forever. As the world grew silent, Sal collapsed at the edge of the of sinkhole and clawed at the dirt in lieu of weeping.
Hulokk froze the earth, and autumn came, then winter. p. 21-23

The story then flashes forward to the end of Sal’s life, when she is in her seventies. In the intervening time she has conducted fifteen sacrifices, and lost nine people, a better performance than any other collective has managed. However, when a horseman arrives requesting her to perform another, she refuses: she has lost enough people . . . . Later, she changes her mind, and attempts the summoning herself.
A good traditional fantasy.

Gravity’s Exile by Grace Seybold gets off to a pretty good start with its protagonist fighting a lizard on the wall of rock that is her world:

Woman and monster hung motionless against the rockface for an endless moment, eyes locked together. Then, abruptly, the lizard clacked its teeth shut, spun on two feet, and skittered away. Despite its dragging rear leg it was unnervingly fast, and in a few heartbeats it had disappeared around a knob of rock and was gone.
Jeone let out a long, shuddering breath, the exhilaration of the fight draining away all at once. With exaggerated care, she tucked the sandal into her belt and pulled herself into a more secure two-handed hold, resting her cheek against the cool stone. Her skin was beaded with sweat. The sun was coming up out of the downclouds now, the day well started. She should get moving, retrieve her pitons and hammock and whatever of her worldly goods the lizard’s sudden attack hadn’t scattered into the cloudy void. Jeone smiled bitterly, picturing some far-down kingdom surprised by a sudden rain of camping equipment. It was the sort of thing that just happened every so often, no matter where on the worldwall you lived: rains of tools, fish, bodies, stranger things. One day Jeone herself would no doubt run out of luck, and her falling body would startle someone far below— p. 4-5

Later she makes her way downwards and comes upon a village. A sentry meets her and she is taken into their cave system. Here she discovers that there are no men, something that unsettles her. After two of the villagers feed and question her she is told to stay where she is while they go to a meeting. Needless to say she follows them, and sees the villagers and nine huge birds, larger than humans and stinking of carrion, watch a pregnant woman give birth to a partly formed human-bird hybrid. She is discovered and captured by the birds, who fly her to what appears to be a series of tunnels and cells in a flying rock. The rest of the story tells of her attempt to escape.
The main problem this story has is its unconvincing world setting. The wallworld is fine, but when it goes beyond this to the monstrous birds and their flying rock it starts reading like a modern and well-written version of some 1930s weird pulp story. Also, as with a lot of the stories in Beneath Ceaseless Skies, there is a lot that remains unexplained, and so it reads like an extract from a longer work.
The Last Dinosaur Rider of Benessa County by Jeremy Sim should have been titled The Last Dinosaur-Riding Gunslinger of Benessa County, and then I wouldn’t have to add much more. This one has Black Jonas returning to a town twenty years after he killed a number of people. The thing that is unusual about this western is that he rides in via the canal system on a pleesaur (plesiosaur presumably). Apart from the strange background of ocean prospecting, pleiosaur riding cowboys, it is a fairly standard story. He goes looking for a man named Doone to get his money (why he waited all this time isn’t explained), and trouble from the past comes looking for him; eventually he leaves town. An vivid piece but, again, it has the feel of a middle story in a long series, or novel extract.

Source is the cover by Florent Llamas. There doesn’t seem to much going on here apart from the bird flying away from the rock and the two figures, but if you look closely there are giant circles carved into the rock and there are two flocks of birds in the distance. An atmospheric landscape piece.

The story by Margaret Killjoy is the best of these four. As for the rest, in media res1 sums it up I think.

  1. Wikipedia’s in media res page.

This magazine is still being published! Subscribe here.

rssrss

Leave a Reply

This site uses Akismet to reduce spam. Learn how your comment data is processed.

Astounding Stories v20n02, October 1937

ISFDB link

Editor, F. Orlin Tremaine

Fiction:
Out of Night • novelette by John W. Campbell, Jr. [as by Don A. Stuart] ∗∗
Mr. Ellerbee Transplanted • short story by Jan Forman ∗∗
Rule of the Bee • short story by Manly Wade Wellman
Galactic Patrol (Part 2 of 6) • serial by Edward E. Smith ∗∗
A Menace in Miniature • short story by Raymond Z. Gallun
Penal World • short story by John Russell Fearn [as by Thornton Ayre]
Stardust Gods • novelette by Raymond Z. Gallun and Robert S. McCready [as by Dow Elstar and Robert S. McCready]

Non-fiction:
Cover • by Howard V. Brown
Interior artwork • by uncredited (x2), Elliott Dold, Jr. (x3), H. W. Wesso (x3),
Into the Future • editorial by F. Orlin Tremaine
Ra, the Inscrutable • science essay by R. DeWitt Miller
Sleet Storm • science essay by John W. Campbell, Jr.
Science Discussions • letters

With this issue of Astounding Stories the magazine started to change. F. Orlin Tremaine1, who had been the editor for five years and had made it the leading SF magazine of its day, was promoted to become an editorial director at Street & Smith, the publisher of the magazine. Between this issue and the November one John W. Campbell2 took over the editorial reins. At the time Campbell was one of SF’s major writers, and he would go on to become probably the most important editor that the science fiction field would ever have. That said, the changes he made at Astounding were gradual, and the next few issues saw only minor alterations.3 The Golden Age period that started in July 1939 was still some way off.

The Cover by Howard V. Brown is a fairly garish, crude affair that was, for the time, a fairly typical Astounding cover. It would be a year or so before Campbell managed to improve the quality of the magazine’s cover and interior art.4
On opening this issue I was struck by the amount of advertising—apart from the contents page there are eight pages of adverts before you get to the first story, and for the usual stuff, ‘Train for a Good Job in Radio,’ correspondence schools, medication for your prostate, fistula, kidney, ‘glands,’ and so on.

The fiction leads off with Out of Night by John W. Campbell, Jr., writing under his Don A. Stuart pseudonym, a story presumably bought (like the contents of the rest of the issue) by outgoing editor F. Orlin Tremaine. It takes place on a far-future Earth dominated by the alien Sarn. It opens with Grayth, the representative of humanity, being told by the alien Sarn-mother that, to limit the future population of humanity, from now on there is to be a five to one ratio of women to men. There are two pages of talking head data-dumping done during this meeting, and I initially missed a key part, which is Grayth’s warning to the Sarn-mother about the ‘Aesir:’

Grayth looked at her steadily, deep-set iron-gray eyes unwavering on jewel-flecked golden ones. He sighed softly. “Your race does not know of the ancient powers of man; you are a race of people knowing and recognizing only the might of the atomic generator, the flare of the atomic blast as power. The power of the mind is great.
[. . .]
“But a crystallization has taken place during these forty centuries, a slow uniformity has built up. The mighty, chaotic thought wills of five hundred million men during three thousand generations were striving, building toward a mighty reservoir of powers, but their very disordered strivings prevented ordered formation.
“During a hundred centuries of chaotic thought, turbulent desire, those vast reservoirs of eternal, indestructible thought energies have circled space, unable to unite. During these last four millenniums those age-old forces have slowly united on a single, common thought that men destroyed by your race during the conquest have sent out.
“We of our race have felt that thing in these last years, that slowly accreting oneness of age-old will and thought, developing reality and power by the gathering of forces generated by minds released by death during ten thousand years. He is growing, a one from many, the combined thought and wisdom and power of the fifteen hundred billions of men who have lived on Earth. Aesir, he is, black as the spaces in which he formed. p. 12

Grayth returns to the human settlement, sets up a jamming device to prevent the Sarn-mother from listening in, and meets with the other leaders. After some discussion they conclude that she hopes to foment a civil war that will decimate humanity, and will then intervene to impose her will. Grayth knows that the other side will be led by Drunnel, an old rival in politics and love, and realises the only way to stop the Sarn-mother is to develop a device that will augment humanity’s developing telepathic powers.
In due course Drunnel gets various weapons from the Sarn, and discovers that the headbands they have received project a force-field that will protect the user not only from other humans but from the aliens as well. Civil war breaks out between the two sides, and this is engagingly described in a good fight scene where glow wands and force shields are repelled by a hail of bricks and rocks, and water, which short circuits the headbands providing the force shield. The fight continues but Grayth’s side cannot win. He agrees to surrender and stand trial if his men are freed.
Needless to say, at Grayth’s trial, Aesir finally turns up. Despite all the energy weapons the Sarn have, Aesir prevails. The Sarn mother changes her mind; all ends well.
Overall, this is a bit of a mess: the Aesir idea isn’t placed in the story particularly adroitly, and his appearance at the end couldn’t be more of a deux ex machina. Also, why is the Sarn mother allowed to survive? For the sequel? On the other hand, these shortcomings are offset by some good action, and the appearance of the Aesir at the end is quite dramatic. This was more of an action tale than I had expected from Campbell’s ‘Don A. Stuart’ pseudonym.

Mr. Ellerbee Transplanted by Jan Forman5 has a Mr Ellerbee at an exposition with his wife when he decides to slip off on his own:

Not only was he tired, not only was it hot, not only did his feet ache, but he thought that he was ill, and angry, too. Perhaps the last batch of hateful rollercoaster rides?, accompanying his flushed and shrilly screaming wife—she had a passion for roller coasters—had indeed upset his stomach. Or perhaps it had been the stifling heat at the dress parade his wife had made him sit through, possibly pleasant enough if he had been nearer to the models. Or perhaps he was irked at his wife’s attitude toward his suggestion that they go and visit Mlle. Sonia, who danced sensationally in the midway.
But now there was respite. For a brief and all too fleeting moment his wife was nonexistent, having retired to fix a shoe buckle which had given way under her enthusiastic promenading. Mr. Ellerbee stood ruminating, holding his hat in his hand and wiping the sweat from his nearly bald head with a large crimson handkerchief. And now, suddenly, his mind was made up. Very well, then, he would go and see this Mile. Sonia. And he sincerely hoped this dereliction would goad his wife. Frightened by this last thought he hurriedly put his hat back on his head and ducked into the crowd.
As he headed in the general direction of the midway, his spirit slowly ebbed. True, there was the midway, with its glamour, the raucous voices of its barkers, and the shrill confusion of its music; but afterward there would be questions, cross-examinations, there would be anger and recriminations, and, above all, his tearful wife in agonies of martyrdom and deep self-pity. Better to return, better to put temptation far away. But already in his mind’s eye he could see her sweeping out of the rest room, looking for him, and finding not a trace of him ; he could see her mouth harden into the familiar thin line, and the cold, glittering look come into her eyes; and he knew it was much too late to retrace his steps. In for a penny, in for a pound, thought Mr. Ellerbee, furtively advancing in the direction of Mile. Sonia. p. 40

He ends up not at Mlle. Sonia’s, but in the Future City exhibit next to it. He ends up at the top of the Power Tower in a room marked ‘Private,’ where his nosiness takes him to the actual future.
Here he runs in to varying degrees of trouble, and his strange behaviour eventually gets him taken to a ‘Euthanatkin,’ before he is arrested and put on trial. The interrogation he undergoes from the judges has one or two interesting aspects—they are disgusted by his claim to have been born naturally—and they eventually send him away to be used for experiments:

So much had happened to Mr. Ellerbee during the last forty-eight hours that he was numb. Nothing mattered any more, neither the pain nor the fear. Even his memory was slowly fading from his consciousness. He barely remembered being dragged out of the courtroom, the terrifying journey in the rocket plane, halfway round the earth it seemed, the cold wastes that surrounded the tall towers of the First City, the grim buildings of the First College of Science, the humiliating tests, the countless pricks of hypodermics, the strange rays that made him reel and faint. Even the incredible sight of seeing all his entrails spread out along a table was fading into the growing haze of his subconscious. p. 48

At the end he somewhat arbitrarily ends up back in the present, where he learns that a madman placed what he claimed was a time machine in the Power Tower. His wife is not impressed by his absence.
This is a fairly standard plot but it’s a well told and very well written story with a some nice touches, and it reminded me of the little H. G. Wells I’ve read.
Rule of the Bee by Manly Wade Wellman is a reminder (to me anyway) that this writer was writing pulp SF long before he became better known for the likes of his ‘Silver John’ folklore fantasy in F&SF.
Unfortunately this story shows little if any of his later prowess—it is mostly a load of nonsense about a Dr Geiger and an experiment to increase the size of a honeybee to that of a horse. Geiger does this with a ray device:

The ray burned for another hour. Twice during this hour Geiger went to a bench stacked with bottles and there mixed carbon, hydrogen, oxygen and other materials. Carefully weighing and checking them, he poured them into the great tank just above the glowing lens. In proportion as the bee grew to kitten-size, cat-size, dog-size, the mixture in the tank dwindled. When the doctor again switched off the power, the prisoner had increased to fill its soap box. p. 52

The enlargement takes place in stages, and Luther (Geiger’s black assistant) suggests to the doctor three times that they remove the creature’s sting. Needless to say, the Good Doctor pooh-poohs this suggestion, stating bees are ‘social animals,’ ‘easily domesticated,’ etc., etc. After this it is just a matter of waiting to see who gets shanked first, and I don’t think I’m giving anything away by saying it isn’t the Good Doctor . . . .
There is a moderately interesting twist at the end where the bee hypnotises Shimada (Geiger’s other, Japanese, assistant) with its big multifaceted eyes, and it later brings back a beehive so the occupants can receive the same treatment. An acid attack by Geiger stymies its plans.
This is written in a readable enough style even if it does ignore the inverse-square law and, initially at least, have an idiot plot.

The undoubted highlight of the issue for fans of the time would have been the start of the new ‘Lensman’ series by ‘Doc’ Smith. Galactic Patrol began in the previous issue, and recounts the graduation and further adventures of Kimball Kinnison, a Lensman and member of the Galactic Patrol. He is implanted with a Lens, a pseudo-living telepathic jewel matched to its wearer by the enigmatic Arisians. Lensmen (eventually) have unlimited authority and scope to combat crime in a galaxy overrun with pirate ships that are controlled by the evil Boskone.
I was curious to see how I would get on with this as in my teens I picked up a copy of Triplanetary and made no progress. When I recently started reading some of the Golden Age Astoundings I deliberately started not with the July 1939 issue but the February 1940 one, so that I wouldn’t have to read the sequel to this, Gray Lensman. Now I am sort of looking forward to it: I was pleasantly surprised with this one; not only did I find it a reasonably easy read (it probably helped that I only read one of the half-dozen twenty to thirty page instalments every few days), but some parts are quite entertaining. You can actually lose yourself in some of it—the story can be quite breathless and exciting—and I also found out where a lot of those fan expressions came from (‘Clear Aether,’ ‘have the jets for it,’ ‘Boskone,’ etc., etc.). On the other hand Smith has a multitude of bad habits: excessive violence, squirm inducing banter between Kinnison and his allies, a habit of describing things as ‘undescribable’ so he doesn’t have to bother, etc., etc.

This episode places Kinnison on the planet Delgon after he and his sidekick VanBuskirk have managed to get vital information about the new power source that the pirate spaceships have, and which is causing problems for law enforcement. The pair are pursued by many pirate ships and are trying to hide on the planet. However, they are attacked by Catlats, before being unexpectedly saved by Worsel, a dragon-like alien. He is a scout for his species, who live on the neighbouring planet of Valentia, and who the sadistic Delgonians prey upon. Worsel soon teams up with Kinnison and VanBuskirk.
The pair listen to Worsel’s account of how all of the earlier scouts from Valentia have disappeared, and Kinnison uses his Lens enabled telepathic power to find out what happened to them. This passage shows the degree of violence in the novel, which sometimes tends towards the sadistic:

In a dull and gloomy cavern there lay, sat, and stood hordes of things. These beings—the “ nobility” of Delgon—had reptilian bodies, somewhat similar to Worsel’s, but they had no wings and their heads were distinctly apish rather than crocodilian. Every greedy eye in the vast throng was fixed upon an enormous screen which, like that in a motion-picture theater, walled off one end of the stupendous cavern.
Slowly, shudderingly, Kinnison’s mind began to take in what was happening upon that screen. And it was really happening, Kinnison was sure of that. This was not a picture any more than this whole scene was an illusion. It was all an actuality—somewhere.
Upon that screen there were stretched out victims. Hundreds of these were Velantians, more hundreds were winged Delgonians, and scores were creatures whose like Kinnison had never seen. And all these were being tortured; tortured to death both in fashions known to the Inquisitors of old and ways of which even those experts had never an inkling.
Some were being twisted outrageously in three-dimensional frames. Others were being stretched upon racks. Many were being pulled horribly apart, chains intermittently but relentlessly extending each helpless member. Still others were being lowered into pits of constantly increasing temperatures or were being attacked by gradually increasing concentrations of some foully corrosive vapor which ate away their tissues, little by little. And, apparently the piece de resistance of the hellish exhibition, one luckless Velantian, in a spot of hard, cold light, was being pressed out flat against the screen, as an insect might be pressed between two panes of glass. Thinner and thinner he became, under the influence of some awful, invisible force, in spite of every exertion of inhumanely powerful muscles driving body, tail, wings, arms, legs, and head in every frantic maneuver which grim and imminent death could call forth. p. 65

The three of them subsequently go to the city and, as a result of various pitched battles (which are nearly all fights to the death), they manage to destroy the Delgon overlords. Then they take their ship to Valentia. On arrival they set work building a communications jammer (a device that didn’t exist before they dreamt it up), capture half a dozen pirate ships (more fights to the death), and set off for Earth.
This section isn’t the best part of the novel6 (the episode on Delgon is little more than an unnecessary subplot) but, overall, it is okay.

I’ve never been that impressed by the little I’ve read of Raymond Z. Gallun (too crude, too pulp), and the two contributions he has in this issue didn’t change my mind. His solo effort is A Menace in Miniature, which starts with an overwrought data-dump from one of the members of a spaceship crew who are exploring a rogue planet that has entered the solar system:

“Paxtonia is just another name for hell!” he whined into his ether phone, addressing his two companions. “It’s just a broken piece of an inhabited world that exploded maybe ten billion years ago! It was shot away from that world’s parent star! Why did it have to wander into our solar system, and establish itself in an orbit around our sun? Nothing could live on it except the spirit of death!
“That’s what it must be—the spirit of death! Those ships that blew up when they got too close to Paxtonia— Some smart people think that maybe there’s an intelligent agent here who did that by exploding the old-type rocket fuel. But there’s nothing here that anybody can find, except the ruins of buildings and machines, and a lot of empty silence! Still, a week ago there were twelve men in this expedition—and now there are only three of us left alive. Please! There isn’t any sense in our staying on Paxtonia! We’ve got to get out of this devil’s paradise—at once!” p. 88

His forebodings prove prescient as he is almost immediately killed, leaving two crewmembers alive, the pilot and a scientist. As the atmospheric pressure is dropping they deduce they must be under attack from tiny projectiles, so they retreat to the war turret with the Scarab, their mini-probe. They use this to build a tiny, sand grain size probe to hunt for the invaders. They release this into the spaceship and find, and partly destroy, them. This, of course, completely overlooks the fact that a tiny probe looking for similar objects in a spaceship would be nigh-on impossible to find given the vast relative volume to be searched.
The pair then follow the few surviving projectiles back to the tiny alien operators, at which point the scientist trots out some eugenics nonsense about how they bred themselves to their diminutive size. Pretty awful.
Penal World by John Russell Fearn is almost as bad. A prisoner on Jupiter sees a small ship land some miles off and decides to make for it and escape the planet. The rest of the story details his journey to the ship. He meets the governor’s daughter along the way—who also has plans to leave the planet—and saves her from the local wildlife. Later, they meet an intelligent telepathic Jovian who helps them on their way: his payment is the smelling salt crystals that the prisoner used to revive the daughter.
Stardust Gods by Raymond Z. Gallun and Robert S. McCready starts with a meteorite, a ‘green star’ landing beside a small town. It knocks out the power, suspends all life and movement, and makes a ‘copy’ of the town which it then takes into deepest space. There it meets up with three other green stars that have been to Venus, Mars and Jupiter.
Meanwhile, Bill, who lives outside the town, wakes up to the whiff of phosgene, something he recognises from his time in the Great War. He goes outside and sees a changed environment:

Now Bill surveyed what lay beyond the smeary window. The mountains were there beyond doubt, even though, to the best of his knowledge, they must have sprouted overnight. At their bases, visible through a greenish-yellow murk, was a jagged plain of gray, pumicelike stone. Nearer, the plain ended in an abrupt drop, forming a sort of cliff, the face of which was glassy and smooth, as if fused by terrific heat.
[. . .]
Then he saw a sun, huge and red, rising in the gap between two monster mountain peaks. A little higher up, and apparently smaller, though this latter condition was probably due to a greater distance, was a second orb, quite like the first. Both were fuzzy and blurred; nor was this entirely an atmospheric phenomenon, caused locally by the murk in the air. These twin, or binary, suns were not ruddy because they had passed the hot glory of their prime; rather, as the age of stars is measured, they were very new, having just contracted from the tenuous nebular stage. Wispy rings of nebulous matter still belted the equators of both. In ages to come, these suns would contract farther and grow hotter. p. 128

The rest of the story falls into two sections. The first has Bill teaming up with a neighbourhood inventor to solve the phosgene problem. After this they go to organise shelters for the townspeople.
The second section forms the bulk of the story and has Bill, the scientist and his female assistant travelling by car to a nearby airfield (fortunately the inventor is also a pilot). At this point a swarm of flying crystal like aliens appear and one breaks a window and enters the car. During this contact, and a later one, we learn that the aliens have brought the townsfolk here to torment them for a bit of ‘fun.’
As they explore the other domes they have various adventures until, eventually, their gas mask filters become contaminated. Fortunately Bill’s dog turns up wearing a gasmask (!) with a bottle of chemicals to refresh their filters. How the dog manages to smell anything in a mask, or cover the distance and terrain so quickly, is not explained.
Finally, the aliens get bored and leave—which was pretty much how I was feeling by this point.
Despite the description above, the first three-quarters of this is an okay read, but when the dog turns up any remaining credibility vanishes.

The Interior artwork, like the cover, is primitive stuff although I thought there were a few illustrations by Wesso7 that have a certain charm, and maybe one of Dold’s. (The illustrations here are all Wesso’s apart from the uncredited illustration for Campbell’s own story.)
Into the Future by F. Orlin Tremaine is a rather high flown editorial:

Ra, the Inscrutable by R. DeWitt Miller is a science article on Radium that is full of hyperbole but not much detail. There is some interesting information on the uses of Radium to treat cancer, but some of it is just mad:

Atomic bombs are not yet a reality in warfare of man against man, but they are already in use in the struggle of man against cancer. Strangest of all, patients who have had within their bodies the ultimate force—subatomic power—feel no pain. In fact, some patients seem to feel a strange exhilaration. One woman in whose body four grams of radium had been placed overnight, refused to sleep. “I didn’t want to lose a moment of that strange feeling of joy and exhilaration,” she explained. p. 105-106

Sleet Storm by John W. Campbell, Jr. is an interesting science article about meteorites and whether they will be a threat to spaceships during their voyages.
Science Discussions hasn’t yet become Brass Tacks, and is exactly what it says. It is subtitled ‘An Open Forum of Controversial Opinion.’ The letters begin with discussion about Atlantis, pro and con. Other subjects include déjà vu, magnetic pole location, and lightning. There is a lot of amateur theorising going on.

Overall, reading this essentially Tremaine-period issue7 was an educational as much as a pleasurable experience. If the Golden Age of SF interests you then it is probably worth reading a few of these transitional issues to see the changes that occur between Campbell’s first issue and the acknowledged beginning of that period, the July 1939 issue of Astounding.

  1. F. Orlin Tremaine at SFE.
  2. John W. Campbell Jr. at SFE.
  3. As Alva Rogers notes in A Requiem for Astounding, p. 49:
    At first there was nothing to intimate to the average reader that a change in editors had taken place: the magazine in those days did not list the name of the editor on the contents page as it was to do later. The “flavour” of the magazine in the last three issues of 1937 was still that of Tremaine, and remained so, substantially, until Tremaine left Street & Smith in May of 1938 and his backlog of stories was used up.
    Mike Ashley offers more details in The Time Machines, p. 107:
    Campbell began at Street & Smith in October 1937, which meant that he started to have an editorial impact from the December issue, although he did not take over the full editorial reins until March 1938. Nevertheless his presence was rapidly noticeable in a variety of changes. In the January 1938 issue Campbell instigated ‘In Times to Come’, whetting readers’ appetites for the next issue. With the March issue he began ‘The Analytical Laboratory’, reporting back on the popularity of stories in previous issues.
    There are other changes that have been pointed out to me. The January editorial mentions that the February issue will be the first of a series of occasional ‘mutant’ ones, an example of evolution in practice. These issues will test out ‘genuinely new’ ideas, the Brass Tacks letter column will be used to validate them, and any successful ideas will be retained. More significantly perhaps, the magazine changes its name from Astounding Stories to Astounding Science-Fiction with the March issue.
  4. If you look at the ISFDB galleries of covers for 1937, 1937, 1938 and 1939, you will see a huge improvement in quality at the end of 1938, helped by a more modern cover redesign on the December issue of that year.
  5. A cursory search revealed no further information about Jan Forman. It is hard to believe that this is the only story from this writer.
  6. For the record (as I’ll probably never read the all of these mags) the sections of the serial I liked the best were the first (an almost Leni Reifenstahl-ish graduation ceremony followed by space battles with pirates), part three (this one has a couple of chapters that are from Boskone’s henchman Helmuth’s point of view, and has an interesting part where he meets the Arisians), part four (more space battles) and part six (more interesting aliens on the way to a satisfying conclusion. The ending is rather abrupt though).
  7. According to SFE, Campbell eventually replaced Wesso with other artists. According to ISFDB, after a short spell illustrating elsewhere he appears to have stopped altogether. This may have been partly to do with a 1940-onwards staff artist job at the New York Times, which is mentioned in his Pulpartists page. Just over a decade after these illustrations appeared he died, age 53.

This magazine is still being published (as Analog Science Fiction)! Subscribe: Kindle UK, Kindle USA or physical & digital copies.

Revised 17/09/2017 to remove the references about this issue being Campbell’s first as editor.

rssrss

Leave a Reply

This site uses Akismet to reduce spam. Learn how your comment data is processed.